UC-NRLF 


557 


! 


!   ill 


llli.1  i 


J»  Henry  Senger 


A  HANDBOOK  OF 

GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


BY 
FRANK  ADOLPH  BERNSTORFF,  PH.D. 

INSTRUCTOR    IN    GERMAN    IN    NORTHWESTERN    UNIVERSITY 


GINN  AND  COMPANY 

BOSTON  •  NEW  YORK  •  CHICAGO  •  LONDON 


IN  MEMORIAM 


COPYRIGHT,  1912 
BY  FRANK  A.  BERNSTORFF 


ALL   RIGHTS   RESERVED 
912.10 


gftc   fltftenaeum   Bre« 

GINN  AND  COMPANY  •  PRO- 
PRIETORS •  BOSTON  •  U.S.A.  , 


PREFACE 

This  handbook,  as  the  name  implies,  contains  only  the  essentials 
of  German  grammar.  It  is  a  drill  book  and  is  intended  primarily 
for  review  work  in  second-year  classes.  It  may,  however,  be  used 
very  successfully  as  a  first-year  book. 

The  subject  matter  has  been  arranged  topically,  and  not  in  the 
form  of  lessons.  For  reviews  and  for  convenience  of  reference  this 
plan  should  prove  most  serviceable.  Abundant  examples  are  given 
in  the  text  to  illustrate  the  various  points  of  grammar,  and,  in  addi- 
tion, English  exercises  to  be  translated  into  German  are  given  in 
the  back  part  of  the  book.  The  list  of  nouns  given  under  sections 
322-339,  will,  it  is  hoped,  help  to  simplify  vowel  mutation  and  the 
declension  of  nouns. 

The  Appendix  contains  a  new  treatment  of  the  declension  of 
nouns,  which  may  appeal  to  many  teachers  as  a  simple  and  practical 
way  of  presenting  this  rather  difficult  subject. 

The  author  is  under  especial  obligation  to  the  publishers  for 
many  valuable  criticisms,  to  his  wife  Lilian  Bergold  Bernstorff  for 
helpful  suggestions,  to  Professor  Chester  Nathan  Gould  of  The 
University  of  Chicago  for  a  careful  reading  of  the  manuscript,  and 
to  Professor  George  O.  Curme  of  Northwestern  University  for 

scholarly  suggestions  and  advice. 

F.  A.  B. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

PRONUNCIATION i 

DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO  SYLLABLES 6 

CAPITALS .  7 

THE  ARTICLES 8 

THE  NOUN 10 

Strong  declension  and  vowel  mutation 10 

Weak  declension .     .  15 

Mixed  declension 16 

Peculiarities  of  nouns 17 

Differentiation  of  certain  nouns 19 

Proper  nouns 21 

Gender  of  nouns 22 

THE  ADJECTIVE  :  DECLENSION  AND  COMPARISON 24 

THE  ADVERB 33 

THE  NUMERALS 35 

THE  PRONOUN 36 

Personal 36 

Reflexive 38 

Possessive 39 

Interrogative 41 

Relative 42 

Demonstrative 44 

Indefinite 46 

THE  PREPOSITION 47 

THE  CONJUNCTION      . 51 

THE  INTERJECTION 54 

V 


vi  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

PAGE 

THE  VERB 55 

Auxiliary  verbs  of  tense 55 

Weak  verbs 55 

Irregular  weak  verbs 67 

Strong  verbs 67 

Separable  and  inseparable  verbs 70 

Reflexive  verbs .  72 

Passive  voice 74 

Modal  auxiliary  verbs 77 

Impersonal  verbs 80 

Subjunctive  mood 81 

THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS 87 

VOWEL  GRADATION 93 

LIST  OF  STRONG  VERBS 95 

DIFFERENTIATION  OF  CERTAIN  VERBS 101 

LISTS  OF  STRONG  NOUNS       103 

APPENDIX in 

EXERCISES 119 

VOCABULARIES 133 

INDEX  .          ...                153 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN 
GRAMMAR 

PRONUNCIATION 
1.  The  alphabet. 

GERMAN        GERMAN          ROMAN  GERMAN  ROMAN 

FORM  NAME  FORM  SCRIPT  SCRIPT 


9( 

a 

a  (ah) 

A 

a 

9 

b 

be  (bay) 

B 

b 

e 

c 

ce  (tsay) 

C 

c 

& 

b 

de  (day) 

D 

d 

@ 

e 

e(ay) 

E 

e 

g 

f 

ef  (eff) 

F 

f 

© 

9 

ge  (gay) 

G 

g 

£ 

f) 

ha  (hah) 

H 

h 

3 

i 

i(ee) 

I 

i 

3 

i 

jot  (yot) 

J 

J 

/ 


J8     I          ka  (kah)          K    k 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


GERMAN 

FORM 

GERMAN 

NAME 

ROMAN          GERMAN              ROMAN 
FORM             SCRIPT                SCRIPT 

S  I 

el  (el)-    | 

LI       ^    S     £?  •* 

>J?m/ 

em  (em) 

M  m     ^  _     C^/C  t 

9?  n 

en  (en) 

N  n      ^    _      £$   * 

D  o 

o  (oh) 

Oo      #    ,        ^      ^ 

SP  P 

pe  (pay) 

P  p       <&f        &  / 

Q  q 

ku  (koo) 

Qq       f  7        @      } 

9J  r 

r  (err  as  in  error) 

R  r       ^    »        C^     ^ 

ewa 

es  (ess) 

s  s    ^y>  ^  ^ 

6 

es-zet  (ess-tset') 

SZ  6                  x^                   * 

s  t 

te  (tay) 

T  t           i/        4<r         (^x         ^ 

U  u 

u  (oo) 

U  u      <W    J^     $$    i 

»» 

vau  (fow) 

Vv       ^^^        ^    , 

28  n> 

w  (vay) 

Ww      ^?  ^      @f.    * 

s  s. 

ix(ix) 

x*     e&g     @$   * 

8  *) 

ypsilon  (ipsilon) 

Yy        #2  ^       $M     n 
,         *f  ^        ^      ^ 

3  s 

zet  (tset) 

z  z       <2          @    * 

^    z          ^    ?         ^        t 

PRONUNCIATION  3 

2.  Mutated  vowels.    31,  a ;  £),  o ;  U,  it ;  $tu,  du ;  aa  and  oo  be- 
come d  and  o. 

3.  Diphthongs.   2tt,  at ;  @t,  ei ;  3lu,  au ;  6u,  eu ;  2Iu,  du. 

4.  Consonant  combinations.     gfy,  d) ;   dt ;    $E),  pf)  ;    £f),  tf) ;   £ ; 

©*,W;  fc< 

5.  The  use  of  ff,  jj,  f ,  and  3,    To  express  ss  in  German  use  jj 
only  between  two  short  vowels,  otherwise  always  use  fy.   When  one 
s  occurs  in  a  word  it  is  expressed  by  the  round  s  (g)  only  at  the 
end  of  a  word  or  syllable ;  in  all  other  positions  long  s  (f)  is  used. 

6.  Pronunciation  of  vowels.   A  vowel  is  short  when  followed  by 
two  or  more  consonants  other  than  inflectional  endings :   lafjen, 
fprecfyen,  fyoffen. 

7.  A  vowel  is  long  —  (i)  when  doubled:   ba§  ^3aar;   (2)  when 
followed  by  a  consonant,  or  by  I)  plus  a  consonant,  in  an  accented 
syllable :    lefert,  33re§el,  fefylen ;   (3)  when  followed  by  more  than 
one  consonant,  provided  the  consonant  (or  consonants)  after  the 
first  is  an  inflectional  ending  :  lobft,  lobt,  Xag3  ;  and  (4)  sometimes 
when  followed  by  rf)  or  ft :  fucfyen,  Sud),  Dftern. 

NOTE.    The  vowel  t  is  long  when  followed  by  c :  fcteten,  Sieb. 

8.  Simple  vowel  sounds  (11,  note). 

LONG        ENGLISH        GERMAN  SHORT       ENGLISH          GERMAN 

a  =  a  in  father-.          SSater  a  (see  note) :  al3 

C  —  a  in  late :  fefyr  C  =  e  mpen  :  benn 

..  film  e  =  ^  mso/a:  lobe 

=t  in  machine'.  •(    '  (finan 

Ipe  i  =  /in//«:  ift 

0  =  <?  in  &?///:  Tt)0^l  P  (see  note) :  fyoffen 

U  =  ^  in  boot :  gut  It  =  u  in  /«// :  butrf) 

ft  has  no  equivalent :  33 diet  ft  =  *  in  w<?/ :  ()(itte 

iJ  has  no  equivalent:  fybren  ii  has  no  equivalent:  offnen 

ii  has  no  equivalent:  iiber    jyj^  ii  has  no  equivalent:  mujjen 

NOTE.  In  German  short  a  has  the  same  sound  as  long  a,  but  is  pro- 
nounced more  quickly.  Short  o  is  between  the  English  o  of  note  and  the 
o  Qinot\  examples:  nodj,  foften,  fyoffen. 


4  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

9.  Diphthongs. 

rti  =  ai  in  aisle :  5Rai  ftU  =  ou  in  house : 

ei  =  «  in  height :  fei  lit  =  we:  pf  ui 

flu  =  ^  in  ^7  :  Stiume 

eu  =  tfy  in  boy  :  treu 

10.  Pronunciation  of  consonants. 

ft  initial  =  English  b  :  Slid),  bitten. 

6  final  or  followed  by  a  consonant  =/  :  2ob,  lobt. 

C  before  a,  o,  u,  or  a  consonant  =  k :  Gonto,  Grebit. 

c  before  e,  i,  t),  d,  b  =  ts :  Gent,  Gtfterne,  Gcifar. 

d)  after  e  or  i :  (i)  Prolong  the  pronunciation  of  English  long  e\ 

(2)  let  the  e-sound  disappear  abruptly ;  (3)  continue  the  stream 

of  breath  forcibly :  id),  mid),  ed)t. 

d)  after  a,  o,  u,  has  a  rough  guttural  sound :  ad),  bod),  fud^en. 
d)  in  words  of  French  origin  =  sh  :  Gfyef,  Gfyarabe. 
(Jj  in  most  words  of  Greek  origin  =  k :  Gfyloroform. 
d)$  when  3  belongs  to  the  stem  =  ks :  J>ad)3,  roadmen. 
b  initial  =  d\  ber  ®ieb. 
b  final  =  /:  unb. 

b  before  another  consonant  =  /:  rebltd). 
f  =/:  fiir,  ttef . 
g  initial  =g  hard  :  ©eneral,  geben. 

r.     ,       f  ch  in  North  German  V'  «*       cm       ^  • 
q  final  =  -{  >:  Xag,  2Beg,  ^rteg. 

L  k  in  South  German  J 

g  before  e  in  French  derivatives  =  z  in  azure :  ^5age,  ©ente. 

gtt  in  French  derivatives  =  ny :  G^ampagner. 

^  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable  =  h  :  §anb,  2Bet§^ett  (13). 

|  =  y  :  ja,  jetjt.    Capital  ^5  before  a  vowel  is  a  consonant ;  before  a 

consonant  it  is  a  vowel :  IJalob,  $faaf . 
t  in  French  derivatives  =  z  in  azure  \  ®te  \ 


I  =  /,  but  German  I  has  a  clearer  sound  than  English  /:  loben. 
ttt,  n,  )J  =  m>  n,p :  mein,  nun, 


PRONUNCIATION  5 

ttg  =  ng  in  singer-.  (Stinger,  finger. 

qil  =  kv  nearly  :  Quefle. 

t  in  stage  pronunciation  =  r  lingual. 

t  in  conversation  =  r  guttural. 

f  when  final  =  ss;  in  all  other  positions  \  =  z\  nwS,  bag,  but  lefen, 

fef)en.    (See  ft  below.) 
frfjtt)  =  shv  nearly :  fdfjroarg,  fcfyroetgen. 
fp  initial  =  shp :  fptit,  fpredfjen. 
ft  initial  =  sht  \  ftefyen,  ©tufyl. 
ft  final  =  English  st\  fjaft,  ift,  ^Haft. 
t  =  /,  but  before  i  plus  another  vowel,  in  terminations,  it  =  ts : 

Nation,  patient. 
t(j  —  t :  X^eater. 
to  =f:  SSater.    In  foreign  words  to  initial  or  medial  =  v\  3Senu§. 


j  —  x :  §er.e,  Senien. 

^  =  u  long  or  short :  35lt)t^ologie,  SD^prte. 

8  =  #:  gu,  Sett. 

11.  Efercise  in  pronunciation. 

S3ud)  §anb  ^nabe  patient 

ab  lobt        rebltd^  al§  Sweater  je^t 

6onto          ©eneral  S^9er  ©oetfye  rufen 

Sent  2ag  2Beg  DueHe  2lt^let  3Keer 

(Stifar  ^onig  nw§  3Sater  raad^fen 

id^  mid^       Courage  fe^en  3Senu§  fie 

ad^  bodjj       S^ampagner  lefen  raenn  fei 

6fyef  ^o^cinn  fpred^en  SKpt^ologte       ^offen 

Gfyrift          Sfaa^  ftc^cn  gu  je^n  SKonwnent 

journal  Nation  Sett  raerben 


NOTE.  The  sound  of  but  very  few  German  letters  may  be  said  to  have 
an  exact  equivalent  in  English.  Paragraphs  8,  9,  and  10,  therefore,  are  only 
approximately  correct.  Good  pronunciation  can  be  learned  only  by  hearing 
each  sound  pronounced  correctly. 


6  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

12.  Accent.    German  words  as  a  rule  are  accented  on  the  first 
syllable. 

EXCEPTIONS,    i  .  The  inseparable  prefixes  (250)  :  nerfteljen. 

2.  Many  words  of  foreign  origin:    lafteten,  Iurio3,  relatin,  Nation, 
etubent,  Snbianer,  $bee,  flartoffel,  glaneil,  papier,  aftufil,  ©goift,  3?atur. 

3.  Many  words  with  foreign  suffixes:  fto^ieren,  lantonal,  £)rutferei. 

4.  Many  compound  adverbs  :  tyercwf,  baoon,  roomit,  metteidjt,  t>orbei. 

5.  A  few  special  words:  lebenbig,  Spohmber,  gorelle,  usually  luttyerifdjj. 

13.  There  are  no  silent  letters  in  German  except  I)  and  e.  The 
former  is  silent  only  in  a  medial  or  final  position  :  f  efyen,  fafy  ;  the 
latter  in  most  words  of  native  German  origin  :  bieten,  Siebe. 

DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO  SYLLABLES 

14.  In  pronunciation.    A  single  consonant  is  pronounced  with 
the  following  vowel  :  lo-ben,  ru=fen,  SBeisjen  ;  also  the  digraph  cf) 
after  a  long  vowel  :  fu=rf)en» 

15.  Double  consonants  and  the  digraphs  dj  (after  a  short  vowel) 
and  ng  are  divided  equally  between  the  two  vowels  :  lafjen,  fyoffen, 
foUen,  fennen,  lad^en,  fangen,  badten  (dt  =  kk). 

16.  If  two  or  more  consonants,  except  the  digraphs  d)  and  ng 
(14,  15),  stand  between  two  vowels,  the  last  one  goes  with  the 
following  vowel.    After  a  consonant  or  a  long  vowel  ft  goes  with 
the  following  vowel.   Examples  :  fyel=fen,  $arp=fen,  txwd)=fen,  fedHen, 
raf=ten,  but  fu^en,  ber=ften,  fyu-ften,  tauten  (from  tafen).    Similarly 
2,  ^  (=  ks,  ts)  :  §eje,  §i^e,  pronounced  §ef  -fe,  §it-fe. 

17.  Compound  words  are  divided  according  to  their  component 
parts:  wn=arbetten,  blut=arm,  ent=el)ren,  2)onner3'tag.    Exceptions 
are  bar,  war,  fyer,  ^in  before  a  vowel  :  ba-riiber,  tt)a=rum,  ^ 


18.  At  the  end  of  a  line.  A  single  consonant  is  written  with  the 
following  vowel:  Io=ben,  ru=fen,  tre^ten,  6e=gel,  2)ie=ner.  The  con- 
sonant combinations  fi,  <$,  f$,  p§,  ft,  and  tl)  are  never  separated  and 
follow  the  above  rule  :  fii-d)ett,  lau-fd)en,  $fyi=Io=fO'pfyie,  la=tt)0'lifd^. 


CAPITALS  7 

19.  Of  two  or  more  consonants,  except  the  above-mentioned 
consonant  combinations  (18),  the  last  one  goes  with  the  following 
vowel  :  fyel-fen,  top-fen,  Irat^en. 

20.  The  combination  tf  becomes  ff  and  the  last  f  goes  with  the 
following  vowel:  §acfe  becomes  §al=fe. 

21.  In  foreign  words  combinations  of  b,  p,  b,  t,  g,  and  I  with 
I   or   t    generally    go    with    the    following    vowel  :    ^U'b 


22.  Compound  words  are  separated  according  to  their  com- 
ponent parts,   but  each  part  of  a  compound  is  separated  into 
syllables  the  same  as  if  standing  alone  :  ent=ef)ren,  fyerniber. 

CAPITALS 

23.  With  an  initial  capital  are  written  : 

1.  All  nouns  :  33ud),  $<xrl. 

2.  All  words  used  as  nouns  :  ber  ©ute,  bet  ©efcmbte,  bag  Soben. 

3.  The  pronoun  (5ie,  you. 

4.  The  possessive  pronoun  ^fyrer,  ^fyt,  %§*£%,  yours. 

5.  The  possessive  adjective  $f)r,  3$te»  ^t,  your. 

6.  In  letters  the  pronouns  bu  and  ifyr,  and  their  possessives  betn 
and  euet,  when  they  refer  to  the  person  or  persons  to  whom  the 
letter  is*  addressed. 

7.  Proper  adjectives  in  er  formed  from  names  of  cities  or  coun- 
tries :  ber  Joiner  SDom,  nadfj  @d^tt)ei§er  2lrt. 

8.  Proper  adjectives  referring  to  persons  :  bd£  Sufffdje  §au3. 

24.  With  a  small  initial  are  written  : 

1.  The  pronoun  /:  id). 

2.  The  reflexive  fid)  even  in  polite  address  :  freuen  <5te  fid). 

3.  Proper  adjectives  not  referring  to  persons  :  ba£  beutfdje 


NOTE.  There  is  a  slight  tendency  at  present  not  to  adhere  strictly  to 
the  rule  of  beginning  every  German  noun  with  a  capital.  This  is  especially 
true  of  scientific  works. 


8  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

THE  ARTICLES 

25.  The  definite  article  is  declined  as  follows : 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

M.  F.  N.  M.  F.  N. 

NOM.  bet  bte  bag,  the  bte,   the 

GEN.  beg  bet  beg,  of  the  bet,  of  the 

DAT.  bent  ber  bem,  to  or  for  the  ben,  to  or  for  the 

Ace.  ben  bte  bag,  the  bte,  the 

NOTE.    For  the  declension  of  biefer  see  91. 

26.  The  definite  article,  as  a  rule,  is  not  omitted  before  nouns 
in  German. 

27.  The  definite  article  is  used  before  a  noun  when  it  denotes 
all  or  a  definite  part  of  its  class.    If  only  an  indefinite  part  is 
referred  to,  the  article  is  omitted. 

3>ie  9JMW&  tft  billiger  alg  ber  2Betn. 
Milk  is  cheaper  than -wine. 

S)ie  3Kild)  in  btefem  ©lag  tft  fauer. 
The  milk  in  this  glass  is  sour. 

%$  trinlc  lieber  3JWd&  ate  flaffee. 
/  like  milk  better  than  coffee. 

28.  The  definite  article  is  used  instead  of  the  possessive  ad- 
jective when  the  possessive  relation  is  so  evident  that  it  cannot 
be  mistaken. 

§aft  bu  ben  SSater  gefefyen  ? 
Have  you  seen  my  father'} 

6r  ftecfte  bte  §anb  in  bie'3fofd)e. 
He  put  his  hand  into  his  pocket. 

29.  The  definite  article  is  used  before  abstract  nouns,  names  of 
the  seasons,  months,  days  of  the  week,  streets,  proper  names  when 
preceded  by  an  adjective,  feminine  names  of  countries,  and  the 
neuters  bag  (SIfajs  and  bag 


THE  ARTICLES  9 

2)ie  Unfcfyulb  fyat  einen  $reunb  im  §immel,  innocence  has  a  friend 

in  heaven. 
2)er  $rul)ling  ift  bie  jcfyonfte  $eit  be§  Qa^reS,  spring  is  the  most 

beautiful  time  of  the  year. 

®er  6onntag  ift  em  Sftufyetag,  Sunday  is  a  day  of  rest. 
3d)  roofyne  in  bet  SBefyrenftra^e,  I  live  in  Behren  Street. 
5Der  !leine  ©eorg  ift  gefaflen,  little  George  has  fallen. 

NOTE.  The  article  is  omitted  before  names  of  months  and  days  of  the 
week  when  used  adverbially,  except  after  the  prepositions  an  and  in :  feit 
Suni  E)at  e3  nitf)t  geregnet,  it  hasn't  rained  since  June ;  er  ift  feit  3JUmtag 
franf,  he  has  been  sick  since  Monday ;  but  am  ©onntag,  on  Sunday,  im 
3itni,  in  June. 

30.  The  indefinite  article  tin,  a,  an,  and  feitt,  not  a,  no  (adj.),  are 
declined  as  follows : 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

M.  F.  N.  M.  F.  N.  M.  F.  N. 

NOM.  ein  eine  ein  fein  teine  fein  !eine 

GEN.  eineS  einer  eine§  feineS  leiner  feine§  fetner 

DAT.  einem  einer  einem  feinem  leiner  leinem  feinen 

Ace.  einen  eine  ein  feinen  leine  fein  feine 

NOTE.   The  word  fein  is  a  negative  article. 

31.  The  indefinite  article  is  generally  omitted  before  a  predicate 
noun  used  in  a  general  sense,  designating  a  whole  class  of  objects 
or  beings.    It  is  always  omitted  after  al3. 

@r  ift  2lr§t. 

He  is  a  physician. 

@r  ift  al8  ©elefyrter  fefyr  beru^mt. 
He  is  very  famous  as  a  scholar. 

32.  The  possessive  adjectives  mein,  my,  bein,  thy,  your;  fein, 
his;  ifyr,  her;  jein,  its;  unfer,  our;  euer,  your;  ifyr,  their;   gfyr, 
your,  are  declined  like  fein.    When  used  without  a  noun  they  are 
possessive  pronouns  (136). 


10  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

THE  NOUN 

33.  Declension  of  nouns.    There  are  three  noun  declensions  :  the 
strong,  the  weak,  and  the  mixed. 

34.  The  declension,  vowel  mutation,  and  gender  of  nouns  can 
best  be  learned  by  constant  drill  in  giving  their  principal  parts. 
These  are  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular  and  the  nominative 
plural.    In  learning  these  forms  the  definite  article  must  always 
accompany  the  noun.    Examples  :  nom.  sing,  ber  Xag,  gen.  sing. 
beg  Xageg,  nom.  pi.  bie  Sage  ;  nom.  sing,  bag  §aug,  gen.  sing,  beg 
§aufeg,  nom.  pi.  bie  §aufer. 

35.  Table  of  endings. 

DECLENSION   N.  SING.   G.  SING.     N.  PLURAL  VOWEL  MUTATION 

Strong  (41) 

Class  I  -g  Sometimes 

T  Masc.  monosyllables  often 
Class  II         —      -g  or  -eg     -e     J  Fem-  monosyllables  always 


Class  III  -g  or  -eg     -er  Always 

Weak  -n  or  -en     -n  or  -en  Never 

Mixed  -g  or  -eg     -n  or  -en  Never 

36.  All  nouns  end  in  n  in  the  dative  plural. 

37.  Feminine  nouns  do  not  change  their  form  in  the  singular. 

38.  All  feminine  nouns  except  SJlutter  and  Sodjter  belong  either 
to  the  second  class  strong  or  to  the  weak  declension. 

39.  Only  strong  nouns  have  vowel  mutation. 

40.  The  last  member  of  a  compound  noun  determines  its  gender 
and  declension  :  bag  §aug,  ber  ©cfyliifjel,  ber  §aitgfrf)luffel. 

41.  The  strong  declension.    The  strong  declension  has  three 
classes.    They  are  distinguished  from  each  other  by  the  nominative 
plural.    The  first  class  does  not  take  an  inflectional  ending  in  the 
nominative  plural  ;  the  second  class  adds  e,  and  the  third  et  * 


THE  NOUN  II 

EXAMPLES :  NOMINATIVE  GENITIVE  PLURAL 

First  Class  ber  ©paten  beg  ©patens  bie  ©paten 

Second  Class  ber  Sag  beg  £ageg  bie  Sage 

Third  Class  bag  £aug  beg  fraufeg  bie  £>aufer 

42.  The  ending  eg  of  the  genitive  singular  is  usually  confined 
to  monosyllables ;  and  even  there  it  is  used  only  when  §  is  difficult 
to  pronounce,  or  to  avoid  a  clash  of  accents  when  an  accented 
syllable  follows  in  the  next  word. 

EXAMPLES  :  beg  gufceg,  beg  Sifdjeg,  beg  §aufeg,  beg  £>orfeg  or  2)orfg, 
beg  Xageg  or  Sagg ;  but  beg  -Jftanneg  2Jhit,  not  beg  -Jtfanng  3Jhit. 

43.  Usage  varies  in  regard  to  adding  e  in  the  dative  singular. 
It  is  generally  confined  to  monosyllables,  and  is  often  omitted  even 
there.    It  is  always  omitted  in  nouns  of  the  first  class. 

EXAMPLES  :  bem  Sage  or  Sag ;  bent  §aufe  or  £aug ;  bem  $onige  or 
$omg ;  but  always  bem  £efyrer,  bem  SSogel,  bem  ©paten. 

44.  The  strong  declension,   class  I.    Examples :    ber   ©paten, 
spade \    ber  Sefyrer,  teacher-,    ber  93ruber,  brother-,   bag  ©ebaube, 
building. 

SINGULAR 

ber  ©paten  ber  Sefyrer  ber  Sruber  bag  ©eba'ube 

beg  ©patent         beg  Sefyrerg          beg  Sruberg  beg  ©ebdubeg 

bem  ©paten         bem  Se^rer          bem  Sruber  bem  ©ebaube 

ben  ©paten          ben  Sefyrer  ben  Sruber  bag  ©ebaube 


PLURAL 

bie  ©paten 

bie  Sefyrer 

bie  Sruber 

bie  ©ebaube 

ber  ©paten 

ber  Sefyrer 

ber  Sriiber 

ber  ©eba'ube 

ben  ©paten 

ben  Sefyrern 

ben  33riibern 

ben  ©eba'uben 

bie  ©paten 

bie  Sefyrer 

bie  Srttber 

bie  ©ebaube 

45.  Membership. 

1.  Masculines  in  el,  en,  er. 

2.  Neuters  in  el,  en,  er,  d)en,  lein,  and  those  beginning  with  the 
prefix  ge  and  ending  in  e. 


12 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


3.  Two  feminines  :  9Jtutter  and  Softer. 

NOTE  i.    Here  belong  infinitives  used  as  nouns  ;  also  ber  $tife. 

NOTE  2.  No  monosyllabic  nouns  belong  to  this  declension,  except 
occasionally  bd3  $nie. 

NOTE  3.  Nouns  in  cfjen  and  lein  are  neuter  and  usually  have  the  stem- 
vowel  mutated. 

46.  Vowel  mutation  in  class  I. 

1.  21  masculines  in  el,  en,  er  (327). 

2.  3)a3  Softer. 

3.  Two  feminines  :  Sautter  and  Sod)ter. 

47.  The  following  nouns  of  this  class  generally  omit  n  in  the 
nominative   singular:    ber   $riebe,   ber   $unle,   ber  ©eban!e,   ber 
©laube,  ber  §aufe,  ber  9Jame,  ber  Same,  ber  Scfyabe,  and  ber  3Bide. 

48.  2)er  $elfen  often  drops  en  in  the  nominative  and  accusative 
singular. 

49.  The  strong  declension,  class  II.    Examples:  ber  Sag,  day; 
bie  Stabt,  city,  bag 

youth,  young  man. 


year;  ber  Sontg,  king;  ber  Bungling, 
SINGULAR 


ber  Sag 


bem  Sage 
ben  Sag 

bie  Sage 
ber  Sage 


bie  ©tabt 
ber  ©tabt 
ber  ©tabt 
bie  ©tabt 

bie  ©tabte 
ber  ©tabte 


ber  Sbnig       ber  Bungling 


bem 
ba§ 

bie 
ber 


bem  $bnig 
ben 


PLURAL 


bie  Sbnige 
ber  $bmge 


bem  ^tingling 
ben  Bungling 

bie  Sunglinge 
ber  ^iingltnge 


ben  ^agen    ben^tdbten    ben  Qa^ren    ben  5lonigen 

bie  Sage      bie  ©tcibte      bie  ^afyre       bie  ^bntge      bie  Qiingltnge 

50.  Membership. 

1.  Most  masculine  monosyllabic  and  many  polysyllabic  nouns. 

2.  Feminines: 

(a)  Mutating  :  about  33  monosyllables,  mostly  in  t,  b,  or  §  (324); 
and  compounds  in  tunft  and  flud)t,  as  bie  2lu§!unft,  bie 
(//)  Those  ending  in  ni§  and  fal,  as  bie  Seforgm3,  bie 


THE   NOUN  13 

3.  Neuters: 

(a)  All  neuters  in  nig  and  fal,  as  bag  §tnberntg,  bag  Sdjicffal. 
(fr)  All  mutatable  nonmutating  neuter  monosyllabic  nouns,  as  . 
bag  $al)r,  bag  $aar  (335). 

(c)  Two  mutating  neuters  :  bag  $lo£  and  bag  Gfyor  (51,  A  3). 

NOTE.  No  practical  rule  can  be  given  for  this  class.  All  masculine  and 
neuter  nouns  not  included  in  one  of  the  other  declensions  belong  to  the 
second  class  strong  declension. 

51.  Vowel  mutation  in  class  II. 

A.  Monosyllables : 

1.  About  200  masculines  (322). 

2.  All  feminines  (324). 

3.  Two  neuters:  bag  fjlofc,  pi.  bte  $loj$e,  and  bag  (Sfyor,  pi.  bte 
Gfybre  or  gfyore  (66, 326). 

B.  Polysyllables: 

1.  Nine  foreign  masculines,  as  ber  2Utar  (329). 

2.  Feminines: 

(a)  Compounds  in  funft  and  f(ud)t. 
(f)  ®ie  2lrmbruft  and  bte  (Sefd&nwlft. 

52.  The  strong  declension,  class  III.     Examples:   ber  3Utann, 
man\  bag  $tnb,  child-,  bag  §aug,  house;  bag  2lltertum,  antiquity. 

SINGULAR 

ber  5Ulann  bag  ^tnb  bag  §aug  bag  2Utertum 

beg  5!Jlanneg         beg  $inbeg         beg  §aufeg  beg  Slltertumg 

bem  5Ranne          bem  Sinbe          bem  §auje  bem  3lltertitm 

ben  9JJann  bag  Ktnb  bag  §aug  bag  3lltertum 

PLURAL 

bte  5Ranner  bte  $tnber  bte  §aufer  bte  3l(tertumer 

ber  SRanner  ber  ^tnber  ber  §aufer  ber  Slltertitmer 

ben  3Kcinnern  ben  ^tnbern  ben  §aufern  ben  2Htertumern 

bie  banner  bte  ^tnber  bte  §aufer  bte  2lltcrtumcr 

NOTE.  Nouns  in  turn  mutate  the  vowel  of  this  suffix  and  take  er  in  the 
plural.  See  also  74,  5. 


14  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

53.  Membership. 

1.  Eight  masculine  monosyllables  (323). 

2.  About  50  neuter  monosyllables  (325,  333). 

3.  Eight  neuter  polysyllables  (331). 

4.  All  nouns  ending  in  turn  (74,  5). 

54.  Vowel  mutation  in  class  III.    All  mutatable  nouns  of  this 
class  have  vowel  mutation. 

55.  Recapitulation  of  vowel  mutation.    Most  monosyllabic  and 
polysyllabic  nouns  do  not  mutate ;  but  a  large  number  of  nouns, 
especially  monosyllables,  do  mutate.    The  mutating  nouns  fall  into 
the  following  groups : 

A.  Monosyllables : 

1.  About  200  masculines  (322,  323).    Six  of  these  take  er  in  the 
plural  and  the  rest  take  e. 

2.  All  feminines  (324). 

3.  About  35  neuters: 

(a)  33  with  plural  in  er  (325). 

(£)  Two  with  plural  in  e:  bag  $Iof$,  pi.  bie  $lbj$e,  an^  bag  @fyor, 
pi.  bie  Sfjbre  or  6f>ore  (66,  326). 

NOTE.  The  group  of  nonmutating  monosyllables  is  very  large.  It  in- 
cludes about  265  masculines  and  all  neuters  except  about  35.  For  a  list  of 
the  more  common  nonmutating  monosyllables  see  333-336. 

B.  Polysyllables  with  vowel  mutation. 

Only  a  very  small  number  of  polysyllabic  strong  nouns  have 
vowel  mutation.  To  this  group  belong : 

1.  21  masculines  in  el,  en,  er  (327). 

2.  Two  masculines  in  turn  :  ber  3Reirf)tum  and  ber  $rrtum  (74,5). 

3.  Nine  foreign  masculines  (329). 

4.  The  feminines  Gutter,  £od)ter,  5lrmbruft,  and  ©efcfyrrjulft,  and 
the  feminine  compounds  in  funft  and  fludjt,  as  bie  2(ugfunft,  pi.  bie 
aUtgtiinfte. 

5.  All  neuters  in  turn  (74,  5),  bag  Softer,  and  bag  ©emarf),  bag 
©efyalt,  bag  ©ettmnb,  bag  £ofyital  (331-332). 


THE  NOUN  15 

56.  The  weak  declension.    The  weak  declension  contains  only 
masculine  and  feminine  nouns.   Masculines  add  n  or  en  in  all  cases 
except  the  nominative  singular.     Feminines  add  n  or  en  only  in 
the  plural. 

57.  Examples :  bet  Snabe,  boy ;  bie  $rau,  lady ;  ber  ©tubent, 
student ;  bie  Sefyrerin,  lady  teacher  •  bet  §err,  gentleman,  Mr. 

SINGULAR 

bet  $nabe     bie  grau      ber  ©tubent       bie  Sefyrerin  ber  §err 

be3  $naben  ber  grau      be3  ©tubenten  ber  Sefyrerin  be§  §errn 

bem  $naben  ber  grau      bem  ©tubenten  ber  Sefyrerin  bem  §errn 

ben  $naben  bie  $rau      ben  ©tubenten  bie  Sefyrerin  ben  §errn 

PLURAL 

bie  Snaben    bie  grauen  bie  ©tubenten  bie  Sefyrerinnen  bie  §erren 

ber  ^naben    ber  grauen  ber  ©tubenten  ber  2efyrerinnen  ber  §erren 

ben  ^naben   ben  ^rauen  ben  ©tubenten  benSefyrerinnen  ben§erren 

bie  $naben    bie  ^rauen  bie  ©tubenten  bie  Sefyrerinnen  bie  §erren 

NOTE  i.    Weak  nouns  do  not  have  vowel  mutation. 
NOTE  2.   No  neuter  nouns  belong  to  the  weak  declension. 
NOTE  3.    Feminines  formed  from  masculines  by  adding  in  double  the  n 
before  adding  the  plural  ending  en. 

NOTE  4.   The  noun  §err  omits  the  inflectional  e  in  the  singular. 

58.  Membership. 

1.  All  feminine  nouns  except  those  contained  in  the  second 
class  strong  declension  (50,  2),  and  Gutter  and  Xodjter  (45,  3). 

2.  Masculine  nouns  in  e  representing  living  beings,  as  ber  Snabe, 
ber  Soroe,  ber  2lffe ;  and  two  representing  things :  ber  23urf)ftabe 
and  ber  Sefyttte.  // 

NOTE.    Here  also  belong  a  number  of  masculines  which  do  not  end  in  e 
in  the  nominative  singular,  as  ber  ©raf  (337). 

3.  Foreign  words : 

(a)  Masculines  accented  on  the  last  syllable  and  representing 
living  beings,  as  ber  2egat. 


l6  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

EXCEPTIONS.  Nouns  ending  in  accented  al,  an,  tin,  ar,  tir,  eur,  ier,  or, 
belong  to  the  second  class  strong  declension  whether  they  represent 
living  beings  or  lifeless  things,  as  ber  ©eneral,  ber  $umpan,  ber  <5out)eran, 
ber  $omtnentar,  ber  <Se!retar,  ber  (Eljafjeur,  ber  Officer,  ber 


(£)  Masculines  in  accented  anb,  enb,  ant,  ent,  and  grapfy,  repre- 
senting persons  or  things,  and  also  ber  Cornet  and  ber  planet. 
Examples:  ber  sIRulttpltlanb,  ber  SRinuenb,  ber  ga&rtfant,  ber 
©tubent,  ber  ^aragrapfy. 

59.  The  mixed  declension.    The  mixed  declension  uses  strong 
endings  in  the   singular  and  weak  in  the   plural.     Nouns  taken 
from  French,  English,  and  other  modern  languages  add  g  in  the 
plural.    (For  examples  see  61,^3.)    The  noun  §erg  is  irregular  m 
declension. 

60.  Examples:    bag  2luge,  'eye\   ber  SDoltor,  doctor-,    bag  @iu= 
btum,  study. 

SINGULAR 

bag  2luge  ber  ®o!tor  bag  ©tubium  bag  §erg 

beg  2lugeg  beg  SDoftorg  beg  6tubiumg  beg  §er§eng 

bem  Singe  bem  2)o!tor  bem  ©tubium  bem 

bag  3luge  ben  SDoftor  bag  ©tubium  bag  §erg 

PLURAL 

bie  2lugen  bte  2)oftoren  bie  (Stubten  bie 

ber  2lugen  ber  ®oltoren  ber  Stubien  ber 

ben  3lugen  ben  ®o!toren  ben  6tubten  ben 

bte  3lugen  bie  ®oltoren  bie  ©tubien  bie  §ergen 

61.  Membership. 

A.  Native  German  words  : 

1.  About  50  masculines,  a  few  of  which  are  monosyllabic  (338). 

2.  About  15  neuters,  mostly  monosyllabic  (339). 

B.  Many  foreign  words  : 

i.  Masculine  nouns  in  on,  or,  ug,  and  tug  from  Latin  and  Greek. 
(See  notes  i  and  2  below.) 


THE  NOUN  I/ 

NOTE  i.  Both  on  and  or  are  short  and  unaccented  in  the  singular  but 
long  and  accented  in  the  plural,  as  ber  2)o!tor,  pi.  bie  2)oftoren  ;  ber  2)  a* 
tnon,  pi.  bie  2)amonen.  Words  in  accented  on,  or,  belong  to  the  second 
class  strong  declension,  as  ber  9)2ajor,  pi.  bie  •JTCajor'e. 

NOTE  2.  Foreign  masculines  in  u3  and  iug  usually  remain  unchanged  in 
the  singular,  as  ber  -ftunttug,  beg  9?Utttiug,  bie  -ftuntten.  Those  in  ug  are 
going  over  to  the  second  class  strong  declension,  as  ber  ©Iobti3,  beg  ©lo= 
buffeg,  bie  ©lobuffe  or  ©loben. 

2.  Neuter  nouns  from  Latin  and  Greek  : 
(a)  Those  ending  in  a,  as  bag  2)rama. 

(£)  Those  ending  in  eum,  turn,  uum,  on  (unaccented),  which  in 
the  plural  become  een,  ten,  uen,  en,  as  bag  SJtufeum,  pi.  bie  -JKufeen  ; 
bag  ©tubiutn,  pi.  bie  ©tubien  ;  bag  ®ifiirf)on,  pi.  bie  ®iftid)en. 

(c)  Those  ending  in  il,  al,  with  plural  in  ten.    These  nouns  are 
going  over  to  the  second  class  strong  declension.    Examples  :  bag 
gofftl,  pi.  bie  $offile  or  goffilten  ;  bag  -JKineral,  pi.  bie  5RineraIe 
or  3JJineralien. 

(d)  bag  Snfcft  and  bag  ^ntereffe. 

3.  Masculine    and   neuter   nouns    and   a  f  ew  •  f  eminines  from 
French,  English,  and  other  modern  languages.  These  words  add  g 
in  the  plural.    Notice  the  following  examples  : 

'  bag  SReftaurant  beg  Seftaurantg  bie  SReftaurantg 

bie  SSitta  ber  SSilla  ,     bie  SSiEag  or  ffitUen 

ber  Sorb  beg  Sorbs  bie  Sorbg 

bie  Sabp  ber  Sabt)  bie  Sabng  or  Sabteg 

ber  ®on  beg  ®ong  bie  $)ong 

ber  $af^a  beg  ^afc^ag  bie 


NOTE.  Foreign  words  of  the  mixed  declension  are  not  usually  accented 
on  the  last  syllable.  Exceptions  are  nouns  ending  in  il,  al,  bag  3nfelt,  and 
a  few  others. 

62.  Peculiarities  of  nouns.  The  singular  form  of  masculine  and 
neuter  nouns  of  weight,  measure,  or  quantity  is  used  after  numerals. 
Two  feminines,  bie  §anb  and  bie  3Kar!,  also  belong  here. 

Karl  tranf  groei  ©lag  2Baffer. 
Carl  drank  two  glasses  of  water. 


1  8  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


ift  funfjefyn 
The  horse  is  fifteen  hands  high. 

£)ag  3^mmer  foftet  groei  9Jtarf. 
The  price  of  the  room  is  two  marks. 

63.  The  noun  denoting  the  material  weighed  or  measured  is  in 
apposition  to  the  noun  of  weight,  measure,  or  quantity;  but  if  ac- 
companied by  an  article  or  a  demonstrative  adjective,  it  is  in  the 
genitive,  or  in  the  dative  with  t)on  ;  if  accompanied  by  an  adjective 
without  the  article  it  may  be  in  apposition  or  in  the  genitive. 

Sroei  ©lag  2Baffer,  mit  groei  ©lag  SBafjer,  two  glasses  of  water,  with 

two  glasses  of  water. 
©ib  mir  groei  ©lag  beg  fallen  SBafferg  or  t)on  bem  fatten  SBaffer,  give 

me  two  glasses  of  the  cold  water. 

3tt)ei  ©Ia§  falte§  2Bafjer  or  fallen  2Bafjerg,  two  glasses  of  cold  water. 
•JJtit  §roei  ©lag  faltem  28afjer  or  jeneg  2Bafjerg,  with  two  glasses  of 

cold  water  or  of  that  water. 

64.  Some  nouns  have  no  plural,  as  bte  2lfcf)e,  ber  §afer,  bie 
5Mat^ematif,  ber  Sn^alt;  others  no  singular,  as  bie  ©Item,  bie  Dftern, 
and  bie  $erien. 

65.  Nouns  with  borrowed  plurals. 

ber  Sau  be§  Saueg  bie  33auten  building 

•!  ber  Seruf  beg  Serufg  bie  Serufgarten  calling 

v  bag  Seftreben  beg  SSeftrebeng  bie  33eflrebungen  effort 

ber  Setrug  beg  Setrugg  bie  Setriigereien  fraud 

ber  Sunb  beg  S3unbeg  bie  Sunbnifje  league 

bag  @rbe  beg  6rbeg  bie  ©rbfd^aften  inheritance 

bag  $euer  beg  ^euerg  bie  ^euer3britnfte  conflagration 

bie  gurdjt  ber  gurd^t  bie  Sefurdjtungen  fear 

c  violence,  violent 
bte  ©eroalt      ber  ©eroalt       bte  ©eroalttattgfetten  4 

bag  ©liicf        beg  ©litcfeg      bie  ©titcfgfdae          I  fortune>  fortu~ 

L  nate  experiences 


THE   NOUN 


bie  ©imft 

ber  ©unft 

bie  ©imftbegeigungen 

favor 

ber  Summer 

beg  $ummerg 

bie  ^iimmerniffe 

sorrow 

bag  Seben 

beg  2ebeng 

bie  9JJenfd)enleben 

life,  lives 

bag  Seib 

beg  Seibeg 

bie  Seiben 

suffering 

ber  Sofyn 

beg  Sofyneg 

bie  Selo^nungen 

reward 

ber  9Korb 

beg  TOorbeg 

bie  -JKorbtaten 

murder 

ber  Sat 

beg  Sateg 

bie  Satfd^Idge 

counsel 

ber  5Raub 

beg  Saubeg 

bie  Sdubereien 

robbery 

^er  ©dfjmuc! 

beg  ©d^mudteg 

bie  ©d^mudtfad^en 

ornament 

]  ber  ©egen 

beg  ©egeng 

bie  ©egnungen 

blessing 

^  ber  ©treit 

beg  ©treiteg 

bie  ©treitigfeiten 

dispute 

'    ber  Sob 

beg  Sobeg 

bie  Sobegfatte 

death 

bag  Ungliic? 

beg  Ungliidtg 

bie  Ungludfgfdtle 

misfortune 

f  /7W/CY777     twnrh- 

ber  SSerrat 

beg  SSerratg 

bie  SSerrdtereien       •< 

. 

L 

erous  acts 

s  ber  3<mf 

beg  3<*n!eg 

bie  3imfereien 

quarrel 

66.  Differentiation  of  certain  nouns. 

^  ber  Sanb 

beg  Sanbeg 

bie  S9dnbe 

volume 

bag  Sanb 

beg  Sanbeg 

bte  Sdnber 

ribbon 

ybag  S5anb 

beg  Sanbeg 

bie  Sanbe 

bond,  fetter 

bie  Sanbe 

ber  S3anbe 

bie  Sanben 

band,  troop 

ber  Saiier 

beg  <3auerg 

bie  33auern 

peasant 

|  ber  93auer 

beg  x3auerg 

bie  93auer 

bird  cage 

ber  Sunb 

beg  <3iinbeg 

bieSunbnifje(Sunbe) 

alliance 

bag  Sunb 

beg  "Ounbeg 

bie  93imbe 

bundle 

ber  @hor 

beg  v^-borg 

bie  6bbre 

choir 

bag 


beg 


bie 


<  choir  (part  of  a 


ber  ®ienfttnann 


bie  ®ien[imdnner 


{servant  (  i?i 
\ 
I.     a  home) 

bet  Sienfimann   beg  ®ienftmanne3    bie  ®ienftmannen 


20 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


bag  2)ing 

beg  Singeg 

bie  ®inge 

(  thing    (a   general 
\           term) 

bag  ®ing 

beg  ®ingeg 

bie  Singer 

f  thing   (a    specific 

i.            term) 

ber  ®orn 

beg  S)orneg 

bie®ornen(2)orner)  thorn 

bie  Some 

varieties  of  thorns 

ber  (gffeft 

beg  gffclts 

bie  (gffcfte 

effect 

bie  ©ffeften 

movable  goods 

ber  @rbe 

beg  @rben 

bie  @rben 

heir 

bag  @rbe 

beg  grbeg 

bie  @rbfrf)aften 

inheritance 

\  ber  gaben 

beg  gabeng 

bie  gtiben 

thread 

M  ber  $aben 

beg  gabeng 

bie  ^aben 

fathom 

ber  glur 

beg  ^lurg 

bie  $lure 

entrance  hall 

I 

bie  $lur 

ber  ^lur 

bie  gluren 

(field  or  entrance 
{            hall 

|bag  ©efjalt 

beg  ©e^alteg 

bie  ©e^dlter 

salary 

^ber  ©efyalt 

beg  ©e^alteg 

bie  ©exalte 

intrinsic  value 

/bag  ©ejtcfyt 

beg  ©eficfytg 

bie  ©efid)ter 

face 

:  bag  ©efid)t 

beg  ©efid)tg 

bie  ©efidjte 

vision 

ber  §eibe 

,beg  §eiben 

bie  §eiben 

heathen 

bie  §eibe 

ber  §eibe 

bie  §eiben 

heath 

bag  §orn 

beg  §orneg 

bie  Corner 

horn 

bie  §orne 

kinds  of  horn 

1  ber  §ut 

beg  £uteg 

bie  §iite 

hat 

-bie  §ut 

ber  §ut 

bie  §uten 

guard 

J  ber  $unbe 

beg  ^unben 

bie  ^unben 

customer 

bie  $unbe 

ber  $unbe 

bie  Sunben 

news 

A  ber  Saben 

beg  Sabeng 

bie  Saben  (Saben) 

shutter 

ber  Saben 

beg  Sabeng 

bie  Saben 

store 

bag  Sanb 

beg  Sanbeg 

bie  Sdnber 

land 

bie  Sanbe 

states,  districts  {parts 
of  a  political  whole) 

NOTE.    The 

old  plural  form 

Sanbe  sometimes  occurs  in  poetry  in  place 

of  Sanber,  and 

remains  also  in 

proper  names,  as  bie 

sj£ieberlcmbe. 

THE  NOUN 


21 


bag  £td)t 

beg  Sidjteg 

bte  Stater 

light 

bag  Sid&t 

beg  Sidjteg 

bte  Std^te 

candle 

ber  Sat 

beg  Sateg 

bte  Satfcfyltige 

advice 

ber  Sat 

beg  Sateg 

bie  Sate 

councilor 

ber  ©d)ilb 

beg  ©cfyilbeg 

bie  ©djilbe 

shield 

bag  ©rf)iib 

beg  ©^tlbeg 

bte  ©d^tlber 

shop  sign 

ber  ©rfjur^ 

beg  ©djjurgeg 

bie  ©c^itrge 

apron  for  men 

bte  ©rf)ttr§e 

ber  ©dt)ur§e 

bte  ©dtjitrgen 

apron  for  women 

ber  ©ee 

beg  ©eeg 

bie  ©een 

lake 

bte  ©ee 

ber  ©ee 

bie  ©een 

sea 

)  ber  ©tod 

beg  ©todeg 

bie  ©tbde 

cane 

ber  ©tod 

beg  ©todeg 

bie  ©tode  - 

story  (of  a  house) 

r^ber  ©trauft 

beg  ©traufteg 

bte  ©trau^e 

ostrich 

ber  ©traufc 

beg  ©trau^eg 

bie  ©trau^e 

combat,  bouquet 

ber  £etl 

beg  Setlg 

bie  Xeile 

part 

bag  Scil 

beg  ^etlg 

bie  Xeile 

share 

bag  S£or 

beg  Sorg 

bie  Xore 

gate 

ber  STor 

beg  ^oren 

bie  Soren 

fool 

bag  !£udf) 

beg  2itd)eg 

bie  Sitdjer 

piece  of  cloth 

bag  Zud) 

beg  Sud^eg 

bie  Xudje 

kind  cf  cloth 

bag  SBort 

beg  SBorteg 

bie  Sffiorter 

word 

bie  2Borte 

f  words  in  connected 

,      j  • 

L            speech 

67.  Proper  nouns.    Proper  nouns  add  g  in  the  genitive  singular. 
Those  ending  in  a  sibilant  (f,  £,  fd),  £,  5)  take  the  apostrophe  only 
or  add  eng  in  the  genitive,  but  names  of  places  take  t)on,  as  bte 
©tra^en  Don  $artg.    Feminines  in  e  may  take  either  g  or  ng.    But 
proper  nouns,  except  neuter  names  of  countries,  take  no  ending 
when  preceded  by  the  definite  article. 

68.  When  a  proper  noun  is  preceded  by  a  title  (except  §err, 
which  is  always  declined)  the  name  only  is  declined.    But  if  the 
definite  article  is  used  before  the  title,  the  title  and  not  the  name 
is  declined. 


22  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

69.   Examples : 
Sari          griij 
SarlS        gri$' 

or 

Sari 
Sari 


Suife 

Serta 

ber  fleine  Sari 

SuifenS 

SertaS 

beS  lleinen  Sari 

or  SuifeS 

Suife 

Serta 

bem  lleinen  Sari 

Suife 

Serta 

ben  lleinen  Sari 

bag  t>ereinigte  SDeutfd^Ianb  Saifer  SBil^elm     ber  Saifer 

beg  oereinigten  ®eutfd^lanb§  Saifer  2Btl^elmg  be§  Saifer^  3BilE)elm 

bem  t)ereinigten  2)eutfd^lanb  Saifer  2Bil^elm     bem  Saifer  2Bil^elm 

ba§  t)ereinigte  SDeutfd^lanb  Saifer  2Bil^elm     ben  Saifer  SBilfyelm 

§err  ^rofeffor  <Sd^mibt  ber  §err  ^Jrofeffor  ©d^mibt 

§errn  ^rofeffor  <5dE)mibt3  be§  §errn  $rofeffor§  ©d^mibt 
§errn  ^rofeffor  ©djmibt  bem  §errn  ^rofeffor  ©d^mibt 
§errn  ^5rofeffor  ©d^mibt  ben  §errn  $rofeffor  ©d^mibt 


NOTE.  2)a3  Dereinigte  3)eutfd^lanb  means  .united  Germany,  §err  ^5ro= 
feffot  ©C^tntbt,  simply  Professor  Schmidt,  and  not  Mr.  Professor  Schmidt. 

70.  Gender.   Very  few  rules  in  respect  to  the  gender  of  German 
nouns  are  practical  (34).    A  careful  application  of  the  following 
statements,  however,  may  prove  helpful. 

71.  Nouns  denoting  living  beings  usually  follow  natural  gender. 

72.  Masculine  are  : 

1.  The  names  of  the  seasons,  months,  days,  and  points  of  the 
compass  : 

(a)  grilling,  ©ommer,  §erbft,  SBinter. 

(V)  Sanuar,  gebruar,  3Kar§,  2lprtl,  3Kai,  $uni,  $uli,  Slugufi, 
September,  Dftober,  3tot)ember,  3)e§ember. 

(c)  ©onntag,  SJlontag,  ®ien§tag,  SRittroocI),  SDonner^tag,  ^reitag, 
©onnabenb  or  (SamStag. 

(d)  ber  9Jorben,  ber  ©uben,  ber  Dften,  ber  2Befien. 

2.  Nouns  in  m,  ling,  id^,  ig,  as  ber  Saum,  ber  3tin9lhtg>  ber 
Seppid^,  ber  Sonig. 

EXCEPTIONS  :  ba3  §eim,  bag  Samm,  bie 


0& 


THE  NOUN  23 

3.  Nouns  in  er  denoting  agency  :  ber  ©dfjneiber. 

4.  Nouns  in  en,  unless  they  are  infinitives  used  as  nouns  (74,  3) : 
ber  ©arten,  ber  Dfen,  but  bag  Seben,  bag  Semen. 

5.  Most  monosyllables  formed  from  the  roots  of  verbs,  as  frf)lie= 
f;en,  ber  (2>$lu£;  binben,  ber  Sanb. 

73.  Feminine  are: 

1.  The  names  of  German  rivers.    Exceptions:    ber  Sftfyetn,  ber 
•Jfedfar,  ber  9Katn,  ber  Sober,  ber  Sorfjer,  ber  Serf),  and  a  few  others. 
Most  foreign  rivers  are  masculine :  ber  $orban,  ber  SJliffiffippt. 

2.  The  names  of  trees,  plants,  flowers,  and  fruits :  bte  (Std)e,  bie 
2;raube,  bie  9^ofe,  bte  Strne. 

EXCEPTIONS  :  ber  Slpfel,  ber  $ftrfid),  ber  Sorbeer,  ber  • 

3.  All  nouns  ending  in  ei,  fyett,  lett,  fdfjaft,  ung,  and  in :  bte 
33raueret,  bie  SBetgfyeit,  bte  Sletntgfeit,  bte  $reunbfrf)aft,  bie  33ebin= 
gung,  bie  greunbtn. 

4.  All  nouns  in  e  derived  from  adjectives  and  the  roots  of  verbs, 
as  fait,  bie  Salte ;  Iteben,  bie  Stebe. 

74.  Neuter  are : 

1.  The  names  of  cities,  countries,  and  islands:  Serltn,  2)eutfrf)= 
lanb,  ^ranfreid^,  ©tgtlten. 

EXCEPTIONS  :  bie  (Sd^roeij,  bie  £iir!et,  bie  ^Sfalj,  and  a  few  others. 

2.  The  names  of  minerals,  except  ber  ©tafyl.    Examples:  bag 
©olb,  bag  6tfen,  bag  ©tlber. 

3.  All  parts  of  speech  other  than  nouns,  used  substantively  and 
not  referring  to  persons :  bag  ©efyen,  bag  $iir  unb  SBtber,  bag  2lrf) 
unb  2Bel),  but  ber  2Ute,  bte  ©ute. 

4.  The  letters  of  the  alphabet:  bag  31,  bag  51. 

5.  All  nouns  in  turn  and  tel,  except  ber  $rrtum  and  ber  3ftetrf)= 
turn.    Examples:  bag  $urftentum,  bag  SDrttteL 

6.  All  nouns  in  d)en  and  letn.    These  endings  are  diminutive 
suffixes  and  usually  cause  mutation,  as  bte  $rau,  bag  gtauletn ;. 
bte  5Kagb,  bag 


24  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

THE  ADJECTIVE 

75.  Adjectives  are  of  two  kinds  : 

'  (a)  The  definite  article  (25). 

)  The  demonstrative  and  interrogative  adjectives 

1.  Limiting^  (91,  97). 

(<:)  The  indefinite  article  and  the  possessive  and 
indefinite  adjectives  (30,  89,  90). 

2.  Qualifying,  as  gut,  alt. 

76.  Most  adjectives   in   German  are   declined,   but  qualifying 
adjectives  used  in  the  predicate  or  appositively  are  declined  only 
when  accompanied  by  an  article. 

77.  There  are  two  adjective  declensions,  the  strong  and  the 
weak.    An  adjective  is  declined  strong  when  no  determining  word 
precedes  it,  and  weak  if  it  is  preceded  by  a  determining  word.    See 
note,  and  78-80. 

NOTE*.  When  eitrig-,  mefyrer-,  roenig,  mel,  and  fold)  precede  the  quali- 
fying adjective  it  is  weak  in  the  singular  and  strong  (or  sometimes  weak) 
in  the  plural  (90). 

78.  The  determining  words  are  : 

1.  ber,  biefer,  jener,  jeber,  ad,  einig-,  mefyrer-  (90,  note  5  ;  91). 

NOTE.    The  masculine  of  mefyrer-  is  not  used  in  the  singular. 

2.  etn,  lein,  rnein,  betn,  fein,  unfer,  euer,  tfyr,  5fyr  (32)- 

3.  mcmd)(er),  fol$(er),  tnel(er),  n)eldj(er)  (80;  90,  note  i;  and 96). 

79.  The  words  ein,  !etn,  mein,  etc.  (78,  2)  have  no  ending  in  the 
nominative  singular  masculine  and  neuter  and  in  the  accusative 
singular  neuter.    The  adjective  following  them,  therefore,  takes 
the  strong  endings  (masculine  er  and  neuter  e3)  in  these  three 
cases.     Thus  we  have  what  is  sometimes  called  the  mixed  declen- 
sion of  adjectives. 

80.  The  words  given  under  78,  3,  sometimes  omit  their  inflec- 
tional endings,  and  the  adjective  following  them  then  has  strong 
endings,  as  man$  guter  3Utcmn,  triel  gute3  23rot. 


c(cr) 

WEAK 

e(i 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

e 

CO 

/'ln~ 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

THE  ADJECTIVE  25 

81.  Table  of  endings  of  the  adjective  declensions. 

STRONG 

er  e  e3 

en  er  en 

em  er  em 

A  en  e  e$ 

e  e  e 

er  er  er 

en  en  en 

-•  e  e  e 

82.  The  strong  endings  are  like  those  of  the  definite  article,  ex- 
cept that  the  genitive  singular  masculine  and  neuter  of  qualifying 
adjectives  is  always  weak,  that  is,  ends  in  en.    Present  usage  does 
not  admit  the  old  genitive  ending  e3,  but  it  is  still  retained  in  a 
few  fixed  expressions,  as  reined  §ergen£,  gute£  SRutg.    Limiting  ad- 
jectives (75),  however,  end  in  e3  in  the  genitive  singular  masculine 
and  neuter. 

i.  Notice  the  vowels  in  bie,  ba3,  and  e,  e3. 

83.  Two  or  more  qualifying  adjectives  used  with  a  noun  follow 
the  same  declension :   nom.  guter  alter  5Rann,   gen.  guten  alten 
3Jlanne3;  nom.  ber  gute  alte  SRann,  gen.  be3  guten  alten  -IJJanneS. 

84.  The  strong  declension  (adjective  +  noun). 

SINGULAR 

guter  3Dtann  gute  $rau  gute§ 

guten  -JftanneS  guter  $rau  guten 

gutem  9Jlanne  guter  $rau  gutem  Stnbe 

guten  3Kann  gute  grau  gute^  Sinb 

PLURAL 

gute  Scanner  gute  ^rauen  gute  $inber 

guter  banner  guter  ^rauen  guter  $tnber 

guten  TOannern  guten  ^rauen  guten  ^tnbern 

gute  SRcinner  gute  ^rauen  gute 


26 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


85.  The  weak  declension  (determining  word  -+-  adjective  -f  noun). 


bet  gute  3Jlann 
beg  guten  -Kanneg 
bem  guten  5Jtanne 
ben  guten  SJJann 

bie  guten  Scanner 
ber  guten  9Jtdnner 
ben  guten  DJlannern 
bte  guten  -JRanner 

fein  guter  SWann  (79) 
feineg  guten  9Jtanneg 
feinem  guten  9Jtanne 
feinen  guten  5Rann 

leine  guten  -JRanner 
leiner  guten  9JZanner 
feinen  guten  sJRannern 
feine  guten  Scanner 


SINGULAR 

bte  gute  $rau 
ber  guten  $rau 
ber  guten  grau 
bte  gute  grau 

PLURAL 

bie  guten  $rauen 
ber  guten  grauen 
ben  guten  gtauen 
bte  guten  grauen 
SINGULAR 

feine  gute  grew 
feiner  guten  $rau 
feiner  guten  grau 
feine  gute  $ratt 

PLURAL 

feine  guten  $rauen 
feiner  guten  grauen 
feinen  guten  grauen 
feine  guten  grauen 


bag  gute 
be§  guten 
bem  guten  Sinbe 
ba§  gute  ^inb 

bie  guten  Sinber 
ber  guten  Sinber 
ben  guten  ^inbern 
bie  guten  ^inber 

fein  gute§  Sinb 
feineS  guten  SinbeS 
feinem  guten  Sinbe 
fein  gute3  Kinb 

feine  guten  Sinber 
feiner  guten  Sinber 
feinen  guten  Sinbern 
feine  guten  ^inber 


86.  Adjectives  used  as  nouns  retain  the  adjective  declension. 


SINGULAR 

©uter  ©ute    ber  ©ute  bag  ©ute  fein  ©uter 

©uten  ©uter  beg  ©uten  beg  ©uten  feineg  ©uten 

©utem  ©uter  bem  ©uten  bem  ©uten  feinem  ©uten 

©uten  ©ute    ben  ©uten  bag  ©ute  feinen  ©uten 


PLURAL 


©ute 
©uter 
©uten 
©ute 


bie  ©uten 
ber  ©uten 
ben  ©uten 
bie  ©uten 


feine  ©uten 
feiner  ©uten 
feinen  ©uten 
feine  ©uten 


einigeg  ©ute 
einigeg  ©uten 
einigem  ©uten 
einigeg  ©ute 

einige  ©uten 
einiger  ©uten 
einigen  ©uten 
einige  ©uten 


NOTE,    ©itttgeg  ©ute  in  the  singular  means  some  good  (an  abstract  noun) ; 
in  the  plural,  some  good  things  or  some  good  people. 


THE  ADJECTIVE  2/ 

87.  Participles  used  as  adjectives  or  nouns  are  declined  like 
adjectives. 


SINGULAR 


gelefyrter  SJlann 
gelefyrten  3JZanne3 
gelefyrtem  -JRanne 
gelefyrten  SRann 

bet  ©elefyrte 
be3  ©elefyrten 
bem  ©elefyrten 
ben  ©elefyrten 

!ein  ©elefyrter 
feineS  ©elefyrten 
feinem  ©elefyrten 
feinen  ©elefyrten 

PLURAL 

gelefyrte  banner  bie  ©elefyrten  feme  ©elefyrten 

gelefyrter  Scanner  bet  ©elefyrten  feiner  ©elefyrten 

gelefyrten  DJJannern  ben  ©elefyrten  feinen  ©ele^rten 

ge!eE)tte  banner  bie  ©elefyrten  feine  ©ele^rten 

88.  An  adjective  may  be  formed  from  the  name  of  a  city  by 
adding  er.     It  is  indeclinable  and  written  with  a  capital  (23,  7) : 
nom.  bet  Sblner  ®om,  gen.  be3  Joiner  2)om3,  dat.  bem  fiblner  2)om, 
ace.  ben  Joiner  ®om. 

89.  The  possessive  adjectives  are  mein,  bein,  jein,  i^r,  fein,  unfer, 
euer,  i^r,  and  ^^t.  They  are  possessive  adjectives  when  used  before 
a  noun,  as  mein  §ut,  feine  $eber,  unfer  33ud).    For  their  declension 
see  30 ;  for  their  use  as  possessive  pronouns  see  136-140. 

90.  The   indefinite    numeral    adjectives    may   be    grouped   as 
follows : 

1.  Those  containing  the  idea  of  number. 

(a)  Uninflected  :  allerfyanb,  allerlei,  all  kinds  qf-,  ein  paar,  a  few. 

(b)  Inflected:    ember-,    other \    beib-,    both ;    manrf),    many  a\ 
tne^rer-,  several '  \  jeber,  each  (never  weak,  but  mixed  (79)  if  pre- 
ceded by  the  indefinite  article). 

(c)  The  indefinite  article :  ein,  # ,  an  (30). 

2.  Those  expressing  quantity. 

(a)  Uninflected :  ein  roenig,  a  little ;  etnwS,  some ;  bi^en,  little 
(bit}. 

(b)  Inflected  :  gan§,  all,  whole ;  ^alb,  half. 


28  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

3.  Those  expressing  quantity  before  a  noun  in  the  singular,  and 
number  before  a  noun  in  the  plural. 

(a)  Uninflected :  genug,  enough ;  mefyr,  more ;  lauter,  eitel,  noth- 
ing but. 

(&)  Inflected  (strong):  all,  all\  roeld),  some. 

(c)  Inflected  :  eintg-,  some,  a  few,  harmonious-,  gefamt,  all,  entire-, 
famtlid),  all,  entire ;  iibttg,  the  rest ;   triel,  much,  pi.  many ;   roenig, 
little,  pi  few. 

(d)  The  negative  article :  feitt,  not  a,  no  (adj.). 

NOTE  i.  When  manrf)  precedes  the  indefinite  article  it  is  not  declined. 
It  is  also  sometimes  not  declined  when  it  precedes  another  adjective. 
Examples :  mand)  ein  3Jtann,  mancfj  eines  2ftanne3 ;  mancf)  guter  .2JJann, 
mantf)  guten  2ftanne3, 

NOTE  2.  The  form  mefyrer-  is  a  double  comparative,  being  composed  of 
the  comparative  mefyr  and  the  comparative  suffix  er. 

NOTE  3.  An  article,  or  a  demonstrative  or  a  possessive  adjective,  pre- 
ceding bi|tf)en,  is  in  the  neuter  gender  regardless  of  the  gender  of  the  noun 
which  follows  bifjdjen. 

NOTE  4.  ©ang  and  fjalb  are  not  declined  when  used  alone  before  neuter 
names  of  places,  as  nom.  ganj  3)eutfrf)lanb,  gen.  gang  2)eutfdjlanb3,  but 
nom.  ba3  ganje  SDeutfdjlanb,  gen.  be3  garden  25eutfd)lanb3. 

NOTE  5.  2111  before  the  definite  article  or  a  possessive  adjective  gener- 
ally remains  undeclined  in  the  singular  and  sometimes  also  in  the  plural : 
all  bag  SBaffer,  all  or  alle  meine  Spfel. 

91.  The  demonstrative  adjectives  are  biefer,  jener,  bet  (92),  bet* 
jelbe,  berjenige  (92),  bet  ntimlidje  (85),  and  fold)  (96).  When  they 
do  not  limit  a  noun  they  are  demonstrative  pronouns  (152).  The 
declension  of  biejer  and  berfelbe  is  as  follows : 

SINGULAR  PLURAL  SINGULAR  PLURAL 

^ 

biefer  biefc  biefeS  biefe  berfelbe     biefelbe    ba^felbe  biefelben 

biefe3  biefer  biefe§  biefer  be^felben  berfelben  be^felben  berfelben 

biefem  biefer  biefem  btefen  bemfelben  berfelben  bemf elben  benfelben 

btefen  biefe  biefe^  biefe  benfelben  biefelbe    ba^felbe  btefelben 

NOTE.  Limiting  adjectives  do  not  take  en  in  the  genitive  singular  mas- 
culine and  neuter  (75,  82). 


THE  ADJECTIVE  29 

92.  ®er  as  a  demonstrative  adjective  is  declined  like  the  definite 
article.   SDerjenige  is  declined  like  berfelbe. 

93.  The  forms  be3gleid)en  (sing.)  and  bergleidjen  (pi.,  but  used 
also  of  the  sing.)  are  indeclinable. 

94.  2)iefe3,   neuter  nominative  and  accusative  singular,   often 
drops  its  ending  e3  and  becomes  bie3. 

95.  ®tefer  and  jener  call  attention  to  nearness  and  remoteness, 
while  bet  merely  emphasizes.    To  indicate  its  stress  bet  is  often 
printed  with  spaced  type. 

SDtefer  3Jtann  ift  reid),  jener  ift  arm. 
This  man  is  rich,  that  one  is  poor. 

2)er  9Jtann  ift  reid). 
That  man  is  rich. 

3in  ber  §infid)t  fyaben  @te  redjt. 
In  that  respect  you  are  right. 

96.  ©oldj  is  never  declined  when  it  precedes  the  indefinite  article, 
and  is  often  not  declined  before  another  adjective.    Examples : 
nom.  fold)  ein  3Jlann,  gen.  fold)  eine3  -Dtanne^ ;  nom.  fold)  gute3 
33rot,  gen.  fold)  guten  33rote3. 

97.  The  interrogative  adjectives  are  roeldjer,  which,  what,  and 
fiir  etn,  what  kind  of.    They  are  declined  as  follows  : 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

roeldjer  9Jfarm  roelcfye  -JRtinner 

roeldjeS  3Ulanne3  tpeld^er  Scanner 

tueld^em  9Jtanne  roeldjen  3JJannern 

tuelc^en  5Rann  t^eld^e  banner 

fiir  ein  9Kann  tt>a3  fiir  banner 

fiir  etne3  9Jlanne§  n)a§  fiir  3Mdnner 

fiir  etnem  3Wanne  raa§  fiir  9Jidnnern 

fiir  einen  SUtann  raag  fiir  SJldnner 

NOTE.   2Beldj)er  as  an  interrogative  adjective  is  declined  like  biefer. 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


98.  Comparison  of  adjectives.  Adjectives  are  compared  in  Ger- 
man by  adding  to  the  positive  er  to  form  the  comparative  and  ft 
to  form  the  superlative.  If  the  positive  ends  in  a  dental  (b,  t) 
or  a  sibilant  (f,  j$,  fd),  $),  the  superlative  adds  eft.  Participles  in 
enb  or  et  add  ft.  Adjectives  in  el,  en,  er,  suppress  an  e  if  another 
syllable  is  added  which  begins  with  e,  as  ebel,  eblet,  bet  eble,  ben 
eblen  or  ben  ebeln  -JRcmn.  Examples : 


deep 

tief 

tiefer 

tiefft 

am  tiefften 

diligent 

fletfeig 

fleifetger 

fletfetgft 

am  fleifcigften 

wild 

rotlb 

ttnlber 

nrilbeft 

am  roilbeften 

old 

alt 

alter 

alteft 

am  alteften 

sweet 

w 

fiifeer 

ffljjep 

am  fii^eften 

charming      retjenb       reigenber       reigenbft      am  reigenbften 
cultured        gebilbet      gebilbeter      gebtlbetft     am  gebilbetften 

99.  A  number  of  adjectives  are  irregular  in  comparison. 

good 
much 

little 

large 
near 
high 

NOTE,    -iftaf)  adds  c  in  the  superlative, 
bfoer,  ber  foofie  SBaum,  etn 


gut 

beffer 

beft 

am  beften 

tnel 

me^r 

meift 

am  meiften 

r  n>emger 

roemgft 

am  roenigften 

toenig 

L  minber 

minbeft 

am  mtnbeften 

grofe 

grower 

grb^t 

am  grofcten 

nal) 

na^er 

nad^ft 

am  ndd)ften 

^0^ 

^o^er 

fyocfyft 

am  l)5d)ften 

drops  c  when  e  follows,  as 


100.  A  number  of  adjectives,  used  only  in  the  comparative  and 
superlative,  are  derived  from  adverbs. 


ADVERB          COMPARATIVE 

au^en  ber  bie  ba3  tiu^ere 

erft  ber  bie  ba§  etftere 

fytnten  ber  bie  ba3  fytntere 

tnnen  ber  bie  ba§  tnnere 

le^t  ber  bie  ba§  le^tere 


SUPERLATIVE 
ber  bie  bag  du^erfte 
ber  bie  bag  erfte 
ber  bie  bag  fytnterfte 
ber  bie  bag  tnnerfte 
ber  bie  bag  le£te 


am  aufjerften 
am  erften 
am  fymterften 
am  innerften 
am  le^ten 


THE  ADJECTIVE  31 

101.  The  comparison  of  equality  is  expressed  by  fo  .  .  .  al£, 
fo  ,  .  .  nrie;  ebenfo  .  .  .  ate,  ebenfo  .  .  .  rate. 

@ie  ift  jo  (ebenfo)  reidj  ate  (rote)  er. 

She  is  as  rich  as  he  is. 

<5ie  ift  ebenfo  fjiibfd)  ate  (rote)  ifyre  Scfyroefter. 

She  is  just  as  pretty  as  her  sister. 

102.  9JJefyr  and  roeniger  are  used  in  comparing  two  qualities  of  the 

same  object. 

@r  ift  mefyr  fleifeig  ate  begabt. 

He  is  more  industrious  than  talented. 
@r  ift  roeniger  begabt  ate  fleifctg. 
He  is  less  talented  than  industrious. 

103.  The  English  than  is  expressed  in  German  by  ate,  and 
the  ...  the  by  je  .  .  .  je  or  je  .  .  .  befto. 

Carl  is  larger  than  his  brother. 
Sari  ift  grower  ate  fein  SBruber. 
The  sooner  the  better. 
3e  e^er  je  (befto)  beffer. 

104.  The  superlative  of  adjectives  may  be  classified  as  follows : 
the  relative,  as  ber,  bic,  ba3  tieffte;  the  am  form  (used  only  in  the  pred- 
icate), as  am  tiefften ;  and  the  absolute,  as  liebft,  or  fjodjft  intereffant. 

105.  The  relative  superlative  of  an  adjective  expresses  the  high- 
est degree  with  reference  to  two  or  more  persons  or  things. 

grit*  ift  ber  flei^igfte  Snabe  in  ber  6d§ule,  Fred  is  the  most  studious 

boy  in  school. 
Sari  fyat  einen  gro^en  2lpfel,  aber  gri$  l)at  ben  gtb^ten,  Carl  has  a 

large  apple,  but  Fred  has  the  largest  one. 
griis  ift  ber  fletfjigfte  t>on  alien,  Fred  is  the  most  studious  of  all. 
Unfer  §au§  ift  bag  neuefte  in  biefer  <5traf$e,  our  house  is  the  newest 

in  this  street. 

NOTE.    In  the  third  and  fourth  sentences  ber  fleifctgfte  and  ba3  neuefte 
are  predicate  superlatives  (106). 


32  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

106.  The  superlative  degree  of  a  predicate  adjective  is  expressed : 

1.  By  the  relative  superlative. 

$arl  ift  grofc. 
Carl  is  tall. 

Sari  ift  bet  grojste  t)on  ben  bret  Snaben. 
Carl  is  the  tallest  of  the  three  boys. 

NOTE.    See  also  105,  third  and  fourth  sentences. 

NOTE.  A  predicate  adjective  is  one  that  is  used  as  complement  to  a  copu- 
lative verb. 

2.  By  the  am  form,  which  is  a  phrase  in  the  dative  case,  and 
is  used : 

(a)  When  a  person  or  thing  is  compared  with  itself  at  different 
times  or  places  or  under  different  circumstances. 

(£)  When  objects  are.  compared  which  do  not  belong  to  the 
same  class. 

§iet  tft  bet  @ee  lief,  here  the  lake  is  deep. 

§ier  ift  bet  @ee  am  lief  [ten,  here  the  lake  is  deepest. 

6r  fiifylt  fid)  fdjroad),  he  feels  weak. 

6r  fill)  It  fid)  fyeute  am  fd)ttwd)ften,  he  feels  weakest  to-day. 

®ie  ^Pflaume  ift  grofc,  bie  33irne  nod)  grower,  abet  bet  Slpfel  ift  am 

grbjsten,  the  plum  is  large,  the  pear  larger,  but  the  apple  is  the 

largest :;  but  notice 
2>er  2lpfel  ift  gro^,  bicfcr  nod)  grower,  abet  jener  ift  ber  grofste,  that 

apple  is  large,  this  one  is  larger,  but  that  one  is  the  largest. 

107.  The  absolute  superlative  is  used  to  express  a  very  high,  or 
the  highest,  degree  without  making  a  comparison,  as  liebfter  SSater  ! 
dearest  father-,  befte  2Bare  §u  billtgften  ^reifen  !  best  goods  at  the  lowest 
prices.    It  may  be  expressed  by  the  superlative  alone  or  by  the 
superlative  strengthened  by  after,  as  afterliebfte3  Stnb,  dearest  child, 
but  more  frequently  it  is  expressed  by  using  in  connection  with  the 
positive  form  of  the  adjective  a  word  which  has  the  general  mean- 
ing of  very,  as  fefyr,  fyod)ft,  du^etft,  riefig;  for  example,  fybd)ft  tnter= 
effant,  very  interesting-,  aujjerft  angenefym,  extremely  agreeable. 


THE  ADVERB  33 

108.  Declension.  Comparatives  and  superlatives  follow  the  reg- 
ular adjective  declension. 

SINGULAR 

dlterer  3Kann  ber  altere  3ftann  mein  alteftcS  Sinb 

dlteren  5Ranne§  be3  dlteren  9Jtanne3  metneS  dlteften  $inbe3 

dlterem  SRanne  bem  dlteren  SRanne  meinem  dlteften  $inbe 

dlteren  SRann  ben  dlteren  5Rann  mein  altefteS  Sinb 

PLURAL 

altere  banner  bie  dlteren  Planner  meine  dlteften  Sinber 

dlterer  banner  ber  dlteren  Scanner  meiner  dlteften  Sinber 

dlteren  -JJZdrinern  ben  dlteren  SDtdnnern  meinen  dlteften  ffinbern 

altere  SUfdnner  bie  dlteren  banner  meine  dlteften  Sinber 

109.  Vowel  mutation.    A  few  very  common  monosyllabic  adjec- 
tives mutate  the  root  vowel  in  the  comparative  and  superlative. 

alt      grob      fyod)      Hug       lang       fdjroarg     sometimes  also  bang, 
arg      groft     jung     franl     nafy       ftar!  bumm,  rot,  and  a 

arm     fyart      fait      furg       fd^arf     roarm  few  others 

j 

THE  ADVERB 

110.  Comparison  of  adverbs.  Adverbs  are  compared  as  follows  : 
beautifully        frfjon        fcpner        am  fd^onften        aufs  fd^onfte 
easily               leid^t        leister        am  leicfyteften       auf§  leid^tefte 
near                 nal)          naljer          am  ndd^ften          auf^  nddjfte 
often                oft           ofter  am  bfteften          auf§  bftefte 

111.  Adverbs  form  their  comparative  like  adjectives.  The  super- 
lative is  generally  expressed  by  a  dative  or  an  accusative  phrase 
which  may  be   called  respectively  the  relative   and  the  absolute 
superlative  of  adverbs  (105,  107).     The  relative  superlative  of  an 
adverb,  however,  must  not  be  confused  with  the  am  form  of  the 
adjective  (106,  2).    Decide  in  each  case  whether  the  corresponding 
positive  form  is  an  adjective  or  an  adverb.    The  adverbial  superla- 
tive without  a  preposition  occurs  in  only  a  few  cases  (116). 


34  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

112.  The  relative  superlative  of  an  adverb  expresses  the  rela- 
tively highest  degree  attained  by  a  person  or  thing  when  compared 
with  another  person  or  thing,  or  with  itself  at  different  times 
or  places  or  under  different  circumstances. 

Sari  frf)reibt  am  fd)bnften  t)on  aft  ben  Snaben. 
Of  all  the  boys  Carl  writes  the  most  beautifully. 

Sutfe  fingt  immer  frfjbn,  aber  fyeute  fang  fie  am  fcpnften. 
Louise  always  sings  beautifully,  but  to-day  she  sang  more  beautifully 
than  ever. 

113.  The  absolute  superlative  of  an  adverb  expresses  a  very  high 
degree  without  making  a  comparison. 

6r  empfing  mid)  auf§  freunblicfyfte. 
He  received  me  most  cordially. 

2)er  SKenfd)  ift  auf§  nad)fte  mit  ben  Sieren  uerroanbt.  (®oet$e.) 
Man  is  very  closely  related  to  the  animals. 

114.  A  number  of  adverbs  are  irregular  in  comparison. 

gut       beffer  am  beften  balb       efyer  am  efyeften 

»ffer  am  beften  r  roeniger  am  roentgften 

.  roofyler  am  roofylften  L  minber  am  minbeften 

gern      lieber  am  liebften  mel        mefyr  am  meiften 

115.  Notice  the  meaning  of  mel,  fefyr,  gern,  lieber,  and  am  Iteb- 
ften  in  the  following  sentences : 

@r  fprirf)t  mel,  he  talks  much. 

@r  Itebt  fie  fe^r,  he  loves  her  very  much. 

6r  trinlt  gern  SRildj,  he  likes  milk. 

@r  trinft  lieber  See  al£  Saffee,  he  prefers  tea  to  coffee. 

6r  trinlt  am  liebften  5ftildj,  he  likes  milk  best  of  all. 

116.  Several  absolute  superlatives  are  formed  irregularly,  as 
dufjerft,  balbigft,  ergebenft,  freunblid)ft,  gefdEigft,  giitigft,  fyer§li<i)ft, 
^bd^ft,  jiingft,  Idngft,  meift,  minbeft,  mbglid)ft,  beftenS,  erften^,  britten^, 
fruf)eften£,  ^od^)ften§,  meiftenS,  minbeften^,  roenigften^,  nadjftenS. 


NUMERALS  35 

NUMERALS 

117.  Cardinals.    The  cardinals  are  : 

1  ein§,  2  groei,  3  brei,  4  met,  5  fiinf,  6  fed£)3,  7  fieben,  8  adfjt, 
9  neun,  10  gefyn,  11  elf,  12  groblf,  13  breigefyn,  14  wergefyn,  15  fiinf- 
gefyn,  16fe<i)geE)n,  17  fiebgefyn,  18  acfytgefyn,  19  neungefyn,  20  groangig, 
21  einunbgrtmngig,  22  groeiunbgroangig,  30  breiftig,  40  tnergig,  50 
fiinfgig,  60  fedjgig,  70  fiebgig,  80  arf)tgig,  90  neungig,  100  fyunbert, 
1000  taufenb,  1,000,000  eine  SKiHion. 

118.  The  cardinals  except  etn  are  not  declined.    $wei  and  brei 
sometimes   form  a  genitive   graeier,  breier,   and  a  dative  groeien, 
breien. 

119.  @in  when  used  with  a  noun  is  either  a  numeral  adjective 
or  the  indefinite  article.    As  a  numeral  adjective  it  is  sometimes 
printed  with  spaced  letters  or  with  a  capital.    It  is  declined  like 
the  indefinite  article,  or  when  preceded  by  the  definite  article  it  is 
declined  like  a  weak  adjective. 

NOTE.    For  the  use  of  etn  as  an  indefinite  pronoun  see  162. 

120.  Ordinals.    The  ordinals  from  one  to  twenty  are  formed  by 
adding  t  to  the  cardinals  and  from  twenty  upwards  by  adding  ft,  as 
bet  tnerte,  bet  tnergefynte,  ber  gttwngigfte,  bet  brei^igfte,  ber  fiebgtgfte, 
bet  fyunbertfte. 

EXCEPTIONS.    @rft,  britt,  fed^ft,  ftebt  (beside  fie&ent),  and  ud)t. 

121.  The  ordinals  are  declined  like  adjectives. 

122.  Words  derived  from  numerals. 

1.  Nouns.    They  are  formed  by  adding  tel  (derived  from  Xeil)  to 
the  ordinals,  as  ein  Srittel,  ba§  SDritteL 

2.  Adjectives.    These  are  formed  from  the  cardinals  by  adding 
facf),  fdltig,  erlei,  and  malig,  as  einfarf),  tnerftiltig,  breierlei,  einmalig. 

3.  Adverbs.  Ordinal  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  mal  to  the 
cardinals   and  en£  to  the  ordinals,  as  eintnal,  erftenS ;  groeimal, 
groeitenS. 


36  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

PRONOUNS 

123.  Personal  pronouns. 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

First      Second  Third  First   Second         Third 

Person     Person  Person  Person  Person        Person 

M.  F.  N.  M.  F.  N. 

NOM.  id)        bu       er       fie     eg  trnr    ifyr  fie 

GEN.  meiner  beiner  feiner  ifyrer  feiner  unfer  euer  ifyrer  Sfyrer 

DAT.  tnir       bir      ifym     ifyr     ifym  ung    eud)  ifynen  3$nen 

Ace.  mid)     bid)      ifyn     fie     eg  ung    eud)  fie      ©ie 

124.  In  poetry  the  genitives  meiner,  beiner,  feiner  are  frequently 
replaced  by  the  older  forms  mein,  bein,  fein. 

125.  A  personal  pronoun  referring  to  a  preceding  noun  agrees 
with  it  in  gender  and  number. 

2Bo  ift  mein  §ut  ?   §aben  @ie  ifyn  gefefyen  ? 
Where  is  my  hat  ?    Have  you  seen  it  ? 

126.  Personal  pronouns  referring  to  neuter  nouns  which  denote 
persons,  as  bag  grdulein,  bag  -IRabdjen,  bag  SBeib,  generally  follow 
the  natural  gender. 

2Bie  Ijeifet  bag  3Kabd)en  ?   @ie  (or  @s)  ^ei^t  SKarie. 
What  is  the  girPs  name  ?    Her  name  is  Marie. 

127.  The  genitive  singular  of  eg  was  formerly  eg,  and  this  form 
still  occurs  in  certain  phrases,  as : 

@r  ift  eg  roert. 
He  is  worthy  of  it. 

£$d)  bin  eg  miibe. 
I  am  tired  of  it. 

128.  When  things  are  referred  to,  the  dative  and  the  accusative 
of  the  personal  pronouns  after  a  preposition  are  represented  by  the 
adverb  ba  (bar  before  vowels).    ®a  (bar)  is  prefixed  to  the  prep- 
osition, and  the  resulting  compound  is  an  adverb. 


PRONOUNS  37 

@r  rouble  mdf)t3  batxm. 

He  knew  nothing  of  it  or  of  them. 

3$)  bin  bafiir. 

I  am  in  favor  of  it  or  of  them. 

§ier  ifi  ein  £ifd).   Segen  6ie  ^fai  33urf)  barauf. 
/>  a  table.    Lay  your  book  upon  it. 


129.  The  genitive  forms  are  compounded  with  roegen,  tmflett, 
and  fyalben,  and  the  r  of  the  pronoun  changes  to  t,  as  meinetroegen 
from  meiner  4-  roegen  ;  likewise  meinettmlien,  euretfyalben,  etc. 

130.  For  the  sake  of  emphasis  the  personal  pronouns  of  the  third 
person  are  often  replaced  by  the  demonstrative  ber,  bie,  ba§  (152). 

3)en  Sdcfer  fenne  id^  fefyr  gut,  abet  ber  E)ei^t  ©cfymtbt  unb  nid^t  2Berner, 
The  baker  1  'know  quite  well,  but  his  name  is  Schmidt  and  not  Werner. 


131.  The  pronouns  of  address  —  bit,  ifyr,  and 

1.  <5ie  is  used  where  no  great  intimacy  exists.    It  is  plural  in  form 
and  takes  its  verb  in  the  third  person  plural,  but  is  used  in  address- 
ing one  person  or  more  than  one.    It  is  always  written  with  a 

capital  letter. 

@te  ftnb  fletjstg. 

You  are  industrious. 

3$  fyabe  Ste  nid)t  gefefyen. 
I  didn't  see  you. 

6r  roirb  3$nen  gleirf)  fyelfen. 
He  will  help  you  immediately. 

2.  The  singular  bu  and  the  plural  tfyr  are  used  in  speaking  to 
near  relatives,  intimate  friends,  children,  animals,  and  inanimate 
objects.     2)u  is  also  used  in  addressing  God. 

9Jiein  ©ofyn,  bu  bift  fefyr  fletftig,  my  son,  you  are  very  industrious. 
$<i)  fyabe  bid)  nidfjt  gefefyen,  I  did  not  see  you. 
^inber,  i^rmu^t  je^tnad^  §aufe  §tty\\,  children,  you  must  go  home  now. 
Unfer  SSater,  ber  bu  bift  in  bem  ^tmmel,  our  Father  which  art  in  heaven. 


38  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

132.  Reflexive  pronouns.    There  is  but  one  distinctively  reflexive 
form,  which  is  fid),  self,  and  it  occurs  only  in  the  third  person.    The 
other  forms  are  supplied  by  the  personal  pronouns.   The  declension 
is  as  follows : 

NOM.  — 

GEN.  metner  beiner  feiner  ifyrer  tmfer  euer  ifyrer  3$re* 

DAT.  mir  bit  fid)  fid)  un3  eud)  fid)  fid) 

Ace.  mtdj  bid)  fid)  fid)  un3  eud^  fidf)  fid) 

NOTE  i.    Reflexive  pronouns  have  no  nominative  (254). 
NOTE  2.    Illustrative  sentences  : 

3d)  fcfyone  metner,  I  spare  myself. 
3d)  fd)meid)le  mir,  I  flatter  myself. 
3d)  freue  midj,  I  am  glad. 
@r  freut  ficl),  he  is  glad. 
greuen  ©te  ftcty  ?  Are  you  glad? 

133.  The  indeclinable  forms  felbft  and  felber,  self,  are  intensive 

pronouns. 

2Bir  felbft  (or  feiber)  finb  ^ier. 

We  ourselves  are  here. 

2)er  ^rdfibent  felbft  (or  felber)  formte  nid^t  fommen. 
The  president  himself  could  not  come. 

134.  To  avoid  ambiguity  in  the  plural,  the  reciprocal  pronoun 
eincmber  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  reflexive.    3Bir  lieben  un3 
may  mean  we  love  each  other  or  we  love  ourselves ;   whereas  roir 
lieben  eirtanber  can  mean  only  we  love  each  other. 

135.  The  dative  of  the  reflexive  pronoun,  in  connection  with  the 
definite  article,  is  often  used  in  German  for  the  English  possessive 
adjective  when  the  sense  is  clear,  especially  when  referring  to  parts 
of  the  body. 

3$  fyabe  mir  ben  3lrm  gebrodfjen. 
I  broke  my  arm. 

@r  fyat  fid)  in  ben  finger  gejdjnitten. 
He  cut  his  finger. 


PRONOUNS 


39 


136.  Possessive  pronouns.    The  masculine  nominative  of   the 

possessive  pronouns  (except  unf(e)rer,eu  (e)  ret)  is  like  the  genitive  of 

the  corresponding  personal  pronouns  (123).   The  personal  pronouns 

with  their  corresponding  possessives  in  all'  genders  are  as  follows : 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 


tdj 
bu 
er 
fie 


meiner 

beiner 

feiner 

ifyrer 

feiner 


meine 

beine 

feine 

ifyre 

feine 


tt)ir 


fie 

<5ie 


unf(e)rer  unf(e)re  unf(e)re§ 
eu(e)rer    eu(e)re    eu(e)re§ 
ifyrer        ifyre 


meine§ 

beineg 

feineg 

ifyreS 

feineS 

137.  The  possessive  pronouns  may  be  preceded  by  the  definite 
article,  and  meiner,  meine,  meineS  then  become  ber  meine,  bie  meine, 
ba3  meine.  There  is  also  a  form  in  ig  which  is  never  used  without 
the  definite  article  :  ber  meinige,  bie  meinige,  ba3  meinige.  Notice 
the  possessive  pronouns  in  the  following  sentences  :  2Bo  ifi  $E)r  (89) 
§ut  ?  meiner  (ber  meine,  ber  meinige)  ift  fyier,  where  is  your  hat  ? 
mine  is  here  ;  ©eben  Sne  mir  3$ren  (89)  SaH  bitte,  id)  fyabe  meinen 
(ben  meinen,  ben  meinigen)  t)erloren,^'^  me  your  ball,  please,  I  have 
lost  mine.  Without  the  definite  article  the  possessive  pronouns  are 
declined  like  limiting  adjectives  (82)  ;  with  the  definite  article  they 
are  declined  like  qualifying  adjectives. 

SINGULAR 

M. 

ber  meine 
be3  meinen 


M.  F.  N. 

meiner  meine  meineS 
meineS  meiner  meineS 
meinem  meiner  meinem 
meinen  meine  meineS 
PLURAL 

M.F.  N. 

meine 
meiner 
meinen 
meine 


N. 

ba§  meine 


SINGULAR 
F. 

bie  meine 

ber  meinen  be§  meinen 
bem  meinen  ber  meinen  bem  meinen 
ben  meinen  bie  meine  hen  meinen 
PLURAL 

M.  F.N. 

,  bie  meinen 
ber  meinen 
ben  meinen 
bie  meinen 


40  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

138.  In  the  predicate  the  possessive  pronoun  expresses  either 
mere  ownership  or  identity  of  ownership.    In  the  first  case  the  pro- 
noun is  uninflected  and  emphasizes  the  idea  of  possession,  whereas 
in  the  second  it  is  inflected  and  emphasizes  the  idea  of  identity. 
Notice  the  following  examples : 

1.  Of  ownership. 

2)er  £ut    I  r  the  hat  i 

®ie  $eber  \  ift  mein,  \  the  pen    \  is  mine. 

SDag  SBudf)  J  [the  book  J 

2Bag  metn  ift,  ift  aucf)  bein,  what  is  mine  is  also  thine. 

3)ag  ift  aHeg  metn,  that  is  all  mine. 

®enn  bein  ift  bte  $raft,  for  thine  is  the  power. 

SBag  euer  ift,  foE  euer  bleiben,  what  is  yours  shall  remain  yours. 

NOTE.    The  forms  tfyr,  her,  tfyr,  their,  and  3^r,  your,  are  always  inflected 
when  used  in  the  predicate. 

2)a3  Slid)  ift  if)re3  (bag  tljre,  bag  i^rige). . 

The  book  is  hers  or  theirs. 

2)a3  Sud)  ift3E)reg  (bag  3^re,  bag  S^rige). 

The  book  is  yours. 

2.  Of  identity. 

2)ein  28iHe  ift  aud^  bet  meine  (ber  meinige,  meiner). 
Your  will  is  also  mine. 

©ein  Sog  rourbe  aud^  bag  unfere  (bag  unfrige,  unfereg). 
His  fate  became  ours  too. 

139.  The  personal  pronouns  er,  fie,  and  eg,  used  as  subject,  are 
followed  in  the  predicate  by  the  uninflected  possessive,  and  the  in- 
definite pronoun  eg  (157)  by  the  inflected  possessive. 

28em  (141)  gefybrt  biefer  §ut?   6r  ift  metn. 
•JBem  ge^ort  biefe  geber?   @ie  ift  mein. 
2Bem  ge^ort  bief^g  33ud^  ?   @g  ift  mein. 

(this  hat  1 
this  pen    \  belong  ?    It  is  mine, 
this  book  ] 


PRONOUNS  41 

2Bem  gefybrt  biefer  §ut?   @3  ift  meiner  (ber  meine,  ber  meinige). 
2Bem  gefybrt  biefe  $eber  ?   @3  ift  meine  (bie  meine,  bie  meinige). 
•JBem  gefybrt  biefe^  Sud^  ?   @3  ift  rneine^  (ba§  meine,  ba§  meinige). 
r  Mw  /^^/  i 

To  whom  does  •<  this  pen    \  belong  ?    It  is  mine. 
\  .,*    ,__v| 


140.  The  possessive  pronouns  with  the  definite  article  are  often 
used  as  nouns,  the  plural  referring  to  one's  relatives  or  party  asso- 
ciates, the  neuter  singular  to  one's  property  or  duty. 

3d)  liebe  bie  SReinen,  Hove  my  people. 

2)ie  uerbunbeten  g-elbfyerren  fafyen  roie  bie  $f)tigen  furs  SSaterlanb 

fdmpften,  the  allied  generals  saw  how  their  soldiers  were  fighting 

for  their  country. 

Gr  Derlor  ba3  (Seine,  he  lost  his  property. 
Gr  ^at  ba§  ©einige  geian,  he  has  done  his  duty. 

141.  Interrogative  pronouns.    The  interrogative  pronouns  are 
toer,  who ;  nm3,  what ;  raeld^er  (97),  which  one ;  and  n)a§  fiir  einer, 
what  kind.    They  are  declined  as  follows  : 

SINGULAR  PLURAL        MASCULINE 

roer  roa§  roelcfyer  rceldje  n>elc^e§  roeld^e  roag  fiir  einer 

roeffen  roeffen  n>eld^e§  roelcfyer  raeld^e^  raeld^er  roa§  fiir  eine3 

went  —  roeld^em  raeld^er  roeldfjem  raeld^en  n)a§  fiir  einem 

wen  roa§  raeld^en  raeld^e  raeldje^  raeld^e  roa§  fiir  einen 

142.  28er  is  both  masculine  and  feminine,  singular  and  plural, 
and  refers  to  persons.    2Ba£  is  neuter  and  refers  to  things.    28er 
and  Ttw3  can  never  be  used  as  interrogative  adjectives. 

28 er  roar  e3  ?    Who  was  it  ? 

2Beld)er  raar  bag  ?    Which  one  was  that  ? 

28c$  roollen  @ie  ?    £F"/to  do  you  wish  ? 

3$  l)abe  einen  fd^raarjen  §ut.   2Ba§  fiir  einen  {)aben  ©te  ?   /  /^z'<? 

^  tor^  hat.     What  kind  have  you  ? 
§ier  finb  groei  JHofen.    -JBeldje  raoHen  ©ie?   Z^r^  ^r^  two  roses. 

Which  one  do  you  wish  ? 


42  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


143.  The  dative  of  tofl3  is  often  supplied  by  the  adverb  tt)0  (root 
before  vowels)  plus  a  preposition,  as  tx)orau3,  roobei,  tDOtnit,  tt)0t)on, 
n)0§u,  roonad).    The  accusative  admits  of  the  same  substitution,  as 
rooburd),  roofur,  roogegen.    The  tendency  at  present  is  to  use  roaS 
in  all  cases,  as  roegen  ttw3,  mit  txw3,  um  trm3,  etc. 

NOTE.    For  the  use'of  : 

1.  3Bet,  Tt)a3,  and  roelcfyer  as  relative  pronouns  see  145-148. 

2.  2Ber  and  roelcf)  as  indefinite  pronouns  see  163. 

3.  SBelcfyer  and  wa%  fur  ein  as  inf  •  Adjectives  see  97. 

144.  Relative  pronouns.   The  r^      i  ^ronouns  are  ber,  bie,  ba§  ; 
roeldjer,  roeldje,  roeldje^  ;  and  sometimes  roer  and  wa%.    The  former 
are  definite  relatives  and  the  latter  indefinite. 

SINGULAR  PLURAL  SINGULAR  PLURAL 

bet       bie       bag        bie  roeldjer    roeldje    raeld^eS  trjeldje 

befjen  beren  befjen     beren  befjen      beren     befjen  beren 

bent      ber      bem        benen  njeld^em  raeld^er  roeldjem  tDeld^eti 

ben      bie       ba§        bie  roelcfyen   n)eld>e    raeld^e^  raeld^e 

145.  SBelrfjer  as  a  relative  pronoun  uses  the  genitive  of  bet.   Its 
own  genitive,  singular  n)eld)e3,  roelrf)er,  roeldjeS,  plural  roeld^er,  occurs 
very  rarely  and  never  stands  before  the  noun  upon  which  it  depends. 

2)ie  ©tabt,  beren  3Kauer  (never  roeldfjer  5Rauer)  nod)  ftefyt,  l)ei^t 

SRotljenburg. 
The  city  whose  walls  are  still  standing  is  called  Rothenburg. 

®ie  Waiter,  innerfyalb  beren  (or  raeld^er)  bie  2Utftabt  liegt,  rourbe 

»or  3>af)rfyunberten  erbaut. 
The  wall  which  surrounds  the  old  part  of  the  city  was  built  centuries  ago. 

146.  When  the  relative  pronoun  refers  to  things  its  dative  and 
accusative  after  a  preposition  are  often  replaced  by  the  adverb  roo 
(roor)  plus  a  preposition. 

®a§  Sudf),  rootton  (t)on  bem,  won  roeldjem)  id)  fpredje,  ift  fefyr  alt. 

The  book  of  which  I  am  speaking  is  very  old. 

2)a3  ifi  ber  s$unft  roorum  (um  ben,  um  roeld^en)  e3  fid^ 

That  is  the  point  in  question. 


PRONOUNS  43 

147.  293cr  as  a  relative  pronoun  means  he  who,  whoever.    It 
always  includes  its  antecedent,  which,  however,  is  sometimes  em- 
phasized by  the  demonstrative  pronoun  bet. 

2Cer  nirfjt  fyoren  null,  muf;  fiifylen. 
He  who  will  not  hear  must  feel. 

SSer  fdjltift,  bet  fimbigt  nid)t. 
He  who  sleeps  sins  not. 

2)er  -JJtann,  ben  <  ~\)  id)  faf),  war  beuifdj. 

The  man  whom  j,s  a  German. 

148.  2Bd$  as  a  relative  pronoun  means  that  which,  whatever. 
It  is  an  indefinite  neuter  relative,  and  is  used  more  extensively 
than  roer.    28a3  may  include  its  antecedent,  or  its  antecedent  may 
be  a  neuter  personal,  demonstrative,  or  indefinite  pronoun,  —  as 
e§,  ba§,  aHe§,  etroaS,  nid)t3,  —  a  neuter  noun  of  indefinite  meaning 
(especially  a  superlative  used  as  a  noun),  or  a  whole  clause. 

5Ba§  fid)  liebt,  necft  fid). 
Lovers  tease  each  other. 

2Ba3  mid)  auf  btefer  SBelt  betrubt,  bag  nmfyret  furge  3^t, 
2Ba§  abet  meine  6eele  liebt,  ba§  bleibt  in  (Sroigfeit. 
The  trials  of  this  world  are  of  short  duration, 
But  that  which  satisfies  my  soul  is  eternal. 

@r  bat  mid)  §u  fdjreiben,  roa§  id^  aud)  tat. 
He  asked  me  to  write,  which  I  did. 

NOTE  i.    If  the  antecedent  is  in  a  different  case  from  roer  or  roa3,  it  must 
be  expressed  by  a  demonstrative. 

SBer  liigt,  bem  glcwbt  man  nidjt. 
One  does  not  believe  him  who  lies. 
2Ba3  roaljr^aft  tft,  bem  benfet  nad^. 
Think  on  those  things  which  are  true. 

NOTE  2.  The  words  and),  immer,  aud)  immer,  nur,  autf)  nur  are  frequently 
used  with  roer  and  raa^  as  relatives  and  thus  make  their  meaning  more 

general-  3Ber  er  auc^  fei. 

Whoever  he  may  be. 


44  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

149.  In  a  relative  clause  the  inflected  verb  comes  last. 

®ag  33urf),  bag  auf  bem  Xifrfje  Itegt,  ift  eine  ©rammatif. 
The  book  which  lies  on  the  table  is  a  grammar. 

3$  fyabe  bag  Surf)  gefunben,  bag  @te  aerloren  fatten. 
I  found  the  book  which  you  had  lost. 

150.  A  personal  pronoun  of  the  first  or  second  person,  used  as 
antecedent  of  the  relative  bet,  bie,  bag,  is  often  repeated  after  the 
relative.    If  it  is  not  repeated,  the  verb  is  in  the  third  person. 

2Btr,  bie  nrir  bie  ©emfen  jagen,  nrifjen  bag,  we  who  hunt  the  chamois 

know  that. 
3$),  bet  trf)  3fyr  greunb  bin,  traue  Sfynen,  I  who  am  your  friend 

trust  you. 
2)u,  ber  bu  metn  greunb  btft,  txrirft  mtr  fyelfen,  you  who  are  my 

friend  will  help  me. 
33eracfyteft  bu  fo  beinen  $atfer,  Sell,  unb  mid^,  ber  fyier  an  fetner 

©tatt  gebtetet  ?    Do  you  thus  despise  your  emperor,  Tell,  and 

me  who  rules  here  in  his  stead? 

151.  In  German  a  relative  clause  is  always  set  off  by  commas. 
See  sentences  above. 

152.  Demonstrative  pronouns.   The  demonstrative  pronouns  are 
bet,  biefer,  jener,  berfelbe,  berjemge,  folder,  folrf)  etner,  etn  folder, 
and  fo  etner  (91). 

SINGULAR  PLURAL  SINGULAR  PLURAL 

ber      bte     bag      bie  fold)  etner     etn  foldjer        foldje 

beflen  beren  befjen   beren,  berer    fold)  etneg    etneg  folrfjen     folder 
bem    ber     bem      benen  fold)  etnem   etnemfold^en    folrfjen 

ben     bte     bag      bte  folrf)  etnen    etnen  fol^en     jold^e 

NOTE.'  For  the  declension  of  biefer,  berfelbe,  berjenige,  and  folder,  see  91. 

153.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  ber  is  declined  like  the  relative 
ber,  except  that  it  has  two  forms  in  the  genitive  plural,  beren  and 
berer.    The  form  berer  usually  refers  to  persons. 


PRONOUNS  45 

@r  gebadjte  berer,  bie  in  3Rot  roaren. 

He  was  mindful  of  those  who  were  in  distress. 

@ie  erinnert  fid)  gern  ifyrer  greunbinnen,  befonberS  berer  au§  ifyrer 

©djuljeit. 
She  enjoys  recalling  her  friends,  especially  those  of  her  school  days. 

<5ie  erinnert  fid)  gern  ijrer_@rlebniffe,  befonberS  beren  au3  tfyrer 


She  enjoys  recalling  her  experiences,  especially  those  of  her  school  days. 

154.  The  genitive  of  the  demonstrative  pronoun  refers  to  an 
oblique  case  in  a  sentence,  while  the  possessive  adjective  refers  to 
the  subject. 

2)er  ©raf  fyat  biefem  9Jtanne  unb  beffen  ©ofyne  afleS  anwertraut. 
The  count  has  intrusted  everything  to  this  man  and  to  his  (the  man's) 


2)er  ©raf  fyat  biefem  3Kanne  unb  fetnetn  ©o^ne  atte§  ant)ertraut. 
The  count  has  intrusted  everything  to  this  man  and  his  (the  count's)  son. 

155.  The  neuter  nominative  and  accusative  form  biefeg  often 
omits  its  ending  e3  and  becomes  bte§. 

156.  ©old)  may  precede  the  indefinite  article  and  is  then  not 
declined  (see  96)  :  nom.  fold)  etner  ;  gen.  fold)  etne3. 

157.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  ba§  and  bte3,  the  indefinite 
e3,  and  the  interrogative  roeld)e3  are  used  with  the  verb  fetn  and  a 
predicate  noun  of  any  gender  and  number  to  express  identity  of  the 
subject  and  predicate.    The  predicate  noun  governs  the  verb. 

ftnb  Sitter,  those  are  books. 
tft  eine  Sofe,  this  is  a  rose. 
finb  Spfel,  they  are  apples. 

finb  bie  fcpnften  Slutnen  ?    Which  are  the  most  beautiful 
flowers  ? 

NOTE.    For  the  demonstrative  ber,  bie,  ba3  used  for  the  personal  pro- 
nouns see  130. 


46  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

158.  The  former  is  expressed  by  jener  and  the  latter  by  btefer. 

£err  ©dfjmibt  unb  £err  33run§  finb  3?acf)barn;  biefer  i[t  reidfj,  jener 

arm. 
Mr.  Schmidt  and  Mr.  Bruns  are  neighbors  ;  the  former  {Mr.  S.)  is 

poor,  the  latter  (Mr.  B^)  rich. 

159.  The  dative  and  the  accusative  of  bte£  and  ba$  after  a  prepo- 
sition are  often  replaced  by  tyier  or  ba  plus  a  preposition  (cf.  128). 

SDdDon  roeifc  idf)  nidf)t3. 
Of  that  I  know  nothing. 

®agu  bin  tdj  nod)  nidfjt  berett. 
I  am  not  ready  for  that  yet. 

§ierin  ftimmten  fie  nid^t  iiberein. 
In  this  they  did  not  agree. 

160.  The  idea  of  nearness  or  remoteness  is  emphasized  by  using 
the  adverbs  fyier,  ba,  or  bort  in  connection  with  the  demonstratives. 

SDtefer  9Kann  fyier  ift  reidfjer  ate  jener  bort. 
This  man  here  is  richer  than  that  one  yonder. 

161.  Indefinite  pronouns.   The  indefinite  pronouns  are  man,  one ; 
jemanb,  somebody ;  niemanb,  nobody ;  jebermann,  everybody ;  etroa§, 
some,  something  \  and  nid^t§,  nothing.   They  are  declined  as  follows  : 

man  jemanb  jeberman 

eine§  jemanb^  jebermanng 

einem  jemanb(em)  jebermann 

einen  jemanb(en)  jebermann 

NOTE.  Niemanb  is  declined  like  jemanb.  @ttt)a3,  sometimes  contracted 
to  ttm3,  and  md)t^  are  indeclinable.  Notice  also  that  the  oblique  cases  of 
man  are  replaced  by  eitt-. 

162.  The  following  indefinite  adjectives  are  used  also  as  indef- 
inite pronouns.    In  the  singular :  einer,  irgenb  einer ;  in  both  sin- 
gular and  plural :  jeber,  jebroeber,  jeglicfyer,  and  f einer ;  in  the  plural 


PREPOSITIONS  47 

only  :  atte,  cmbere,  beibe,  einige,  etlidje,  manege,  mefyre,  tnefyrere,  t)iele, 
and  roenige.    Of  these  the  following  may  be  preceded  : 

1.  By  the  definite  article:  bet  anbere,  bie  beiben,  ber  eine,  ber 
jebe,  ber  jebroebe,  ber  jeglidje. 

2.  By  the  indefinite  article  :  ein  anberer,  ein  jeber,  ein  jeglidfjer, 
ein  manner,  and  ein  mefyrereS. 

NOTE.    The  words  given  in  the  preceding  paragraph  are  declined  like 
adjectives. 

163.  The  interrogatives  roer  and  roeldj  may  be  used  as  indefinite 
pronouns.    They  are  then  frequently  accompanied  by  irgenb  : 


@r  roifl  un3  roelrfje  geben. 
He  wants  to  give  us  some. 

%tf)  fyabe  letn  ©elb.   §aben  @te 
I  have  no  money.    Have  you  some? 

63  muf$  mir  irgenb  n>er  etraa^  leifyen. 
Somebody  must  loan  me  some. 


PREPOSITIONS 

NOTE.  Only  those  prepositions  which  are  of  frequent  occurrence  are 
given  in  the  following  lists. 

164.  Prepositions  which  govern  the  genitive  are  : 

rodfyrenb,  during  bieSfeit,  this  side  of        um  . . .  roiEen,/^ 

roegen,  on  account  of      jenfeit,  the  other  side  of         the  sake  of 

ftutt,     'i  .  -        innerhalb,  within 

V  instead  of 
anftatt,  J  aufterfyalb,  outside  of 

iro^,  in  spite  of  unterfyalb,  below 

oberfyalb,  above 

NOTE  i.  SBegett  sometimes  follows  the  word  which  it  governs.  For 
meinetroegen  etc.  see  129. 

NOTE  2.  Slnftatt  and  ftatt  govern  also  an  infinitive,  as  anftatt  JU  gefjor- 
djen,  instead  of  obeying. 


48  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

165.  Prepositions  which  govern  the  dative  are  : 

au3,  out  of  nad),  towards,  to,  after,  gegenitber,  opposite 

auj$er,  outside  of,  according  to  nad)ft,  next  to 

except  feit,  since,  for  nebft,  besides 

bei,  by,  with,  at  the  non,  of,  from,  by  famt,  together  with 

house  of  §u,  to  guttnbet,  contrary  to 

nut,  with  entgegen,  against 

166  When  nadfj  means  according  to,  it  follows  its  noun  :  -JReiner 
URetnung  nad)  irren  @ie  fidfj,  according  to  my  opinion  you  are  mis- 
taken. Observe  also  the  difference  between  nad)  bem  §aufe,  nadf) 
£>aufe,  and  gu  §aufe  :  $d)  gefye  n'ad)  bem  §aufe,  I  am  going  to  the 
house  ;  ,^d)  gefye  nad^  £mufe,  /  am  going  home  ;  3>d()  bin  §u  §aufe, 
7^7^  at  home.  Also  note  the  difference  between  icfy  gefye  nad)  ifym, 
I  am  going  after  him  (that  is,  to  get  him),  and  id)  gel)e  gu  il)m,  /<^w 
going  to  see  him,  I  am  going  to  his  house.  The  present  tense  of  a 
verb  accompanied  by  the  dative  after  feit  is  used  to  express  an 
action  or  a  state  which  began  in  the  past  and  still  continues  in  the 
present  :  (St  tft  fd)on  feit  etner  2Bod)e  franf,  he  has  been  sick  for  a 
week  ;.  2Btr  n>ofynen  feit  bem  erften  9Jtai  in  unferem  neuen  §aufe,  we 
have  been  living  in  our  new  house  since  the  first  of  May. 

167.  Prepositions  which  govern  the  accusative  are  : 

bt§,  up  to  gegen,  against  tmber,  against 

burd),  through  ofyne,  without  entlang,  along 

\\\\ffor  um,  about,  around 


NOTE.    Dfyne  and  um  are  followed  also  by  an  infinitive,  as  ofyne  tfjn 
,  without  seeing  him  ;  lim  IlltJ  JU  jetn,  to  be  brief. 


168.  Prepositions  which  govern  both  the  dative  and  the  accu- 
sative are  : 

an,  at,  to,  by  in,  in,  into,  to  unter,  under 

auf,  on,  upon,  for    neben,  beside  »or,  before,  ago 

fyinter,  behind  iiber,  above,  across    §nnfd)en,  between,  among 


PREPOSITIONS  49 

169.  The  prepositions  of  the  preceding  paragraph  govern  the 
dative  in  expressions  : 

1.  Of  place  where,  in  which. 

2.  Of  time  when. 

3)ie  ^inber  finb  auf  bem  ®ad),  the  children  are  on  the  roof. 

2)ie  ^inber  laufen  in  bem  ©arten,  the  children  are  running  in  the 

garden. 
$ri£  gefyt  am  ©onnabenb  immer  nadj  §aufe,  Fred  always  goes  home 

on  Saturday. 

SSor  einer  2Bod)e  roar  idj  §u  §aufe,  a  week  ago  I  was  at  home. 
3jm  3>uni  fd)lief$t  bie  <5d)ule,  ^^/  closes  in  June. 

170.  The  prepositions  given  under  paragraph  168  govern  the 
accusative  in  expressions : 

1.  Of  place  where  to,  towards,  or  into  which. 

2.  Of  time  how  long,  until  when. 

®te  Sinber  laufen  in  ben  ©arten. 

The  children  are  running  into  the  garden. 

gri£  cjefyt  nur  auf  einen  Xag  nadfj  §aufe. 
Fred  is  going  home  only  for  a  day. 

§eute  iiber  einen  SRonat  roerben  tx)ir  in  33erlin  fein. 
A  month  from  to-day  we  shall  be  in  Berlin. 

171.  In  abstract  expressions  where  the  idea  of  motion  or  of 
place  does  not  appear  an,  in,  unter,  and  t)or  take  the  dative,  auf 
and  iiber  the  accusative. 

Sin  ifyren  $riirf)ten  foHt  ifyr  fie  erfennen. 
By  their  fruits  ye  shall  know  them. 

3jn  bet  §infidjt  fyaben  6ie  red^t. 
In  that  respect  you  are  right. 

3$  freue  mid)  iiber  meine  Hlaffe. 
I  am  delighted  with  my  class. 


50  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

172.  The  following  examples  may  serve  to  illustrate  more  fully 
the  use  of  the  prepositions  which  govern  both  the  dative  and  the 
accusative. 

ACCUSATIVE  DATIVE 

3$  lege  bag  33ud()  auf  ben  Sifdj.   SDag  33ud()  Kegt  auf  bem  23fd&. 

I  lay  the  book  on  the  table.  The  book  lies  on  the  table. 

3d)  gel)e  in  bag  ftimrtm.  3$  gefye  in  bem  3tmmer  auf  unb  ab. 

/  #  #2  going  into  the  room  .  1  am  walking  to  and  fro  in  the  room. 

3d)  gelje  fyinter  bag  §aug.  3$  9«^  fyinter  bem  §aufe. 

I  am  going  behind  the  house.         I  am  walking  behind  the  house. 

3d)  gefje  an  bie  Stir.  3$  &in  cin  ber  £ur. 

./#;«  ^ztfflg1  ^  ^  d&w.  /^w  ^/  M^  door. 

3d)  fd^reibe  ben  ©a^  an  bie  Safcl.  ®er  ©a|  ftc^t  an  ber  Safcl. 
/^zw  writing  the  sentence  on  the    The  sentence  is  on  the  board. 
board. 

35a3  Jltnb  fefcte  fid^  neben  fie.       2)a§  Sinb  fa^  neben  tyr. 
7%^  r^/7(/  J^/  down  beside  her.        The  child  sat  beside  her. 

SDie  6i^ung  bauerte  bi§  fpat  in   2Bir  famen  fpat  in  ber  9Jad)t  nadlj 

bie  S^ad^t.  §aufe. 

The  sessionlasted  far  into  the  night.   We  came  home  late  at  night. 

liber  ben  ^hinft  fagte  er  nidjt§.     5Jtid)  graut  t)or  ber  ^riiftmg. 
He  didn't  say  anything  concern-    I  dread  the  examination. 
ing  that  point. 

173.  The  definite  article  often  contracts  with  a  preposition. 


an  bem  =  am  gegen  ba§  =  gegenS  iiber  bag 

an  ba§  =  an§  ^inter  bem  =  Ijinterm  urn  bag 

auf  bag  =  aufg  fyinter  bag  =  fyinterg  unter  bem  =  unterm 

au^er  bem  =  au^erm  in  bem       =  im  unter  bag  =  unterg 

bei  bem  =  beim  in  bag        =  ing  t)on  bem  —  t)om 

burd^  bag  =  burd^g  iiber  bem    =  iiberm  §u  bem     =  gum 

fiir  bag  =  furg  iiber  ben     =  iibern  gu  ber      =  gur 


CONJUNCTIONS  51 

CONJUNCTIONS 

174.  Conjunctions  are  of  two  kinds,  coordinate  and  subordinate. 
Coordinate  conjunctions  connect  elements  of  the  same  kind  or 
rank.    Subordinate  conjunctions  connect  elements  of  unequal  rank. 

175.  Coordinate  conjunctions.    Some  of  the  most  common  pure 
coordinate  conjunctions  are : 

i.  Simple  2.  Correlative 

unb,  and  ebenfo  .  .  .  rote,  both  .  .  .  and 

abet,  but  nicfet  nur  .  .  .  fonbern  aud),  ") 

,     \not  only  .  .  .  but  also 
alletn,  but,  yet      md)t  auem  . . .  fonbern  aud),  J 

fonbern,  but         foroof)! .  .  .  al$  (or  aud)),  as  well . . .  as,  both  . . .  and 
benn,y^  entroeber  .  .  .  ober,  either .  .  .  or 

ober,  or  roeber  .  .  .  nod),  neither  .  .  .  nor 

176.  The  above  conjunctions  do  not  affect  the  position  of  the 
verb,    ©ntroeber  .  .  .  ober,  however,  may  take  either  the  natural 
or  the  inverted  order :  Gntroeber  er  ift  nidjt  flei^ig  ober  er  ift  butnm, 
or  gntroeber  tft  er  nid)t  fleifcig  ober  er  ift  (or  tft  er)  bumm,  he  is 
either  lazy  or  stupid. 

177.  9l6ct  is  used  after  negative  as  well  as  affirmative  statements. 
It  qualifies  the  preceding  statement,  but  does  not  contradict  it. 

Gr  tft  begabt,  aber  faul. 
He  is  talented,  but  lazy. 

<5te  tft  nid)t  fyiibfd),  aber  fie  ift  gut. 
She  is  not  pretty,  but  she  is  good. 

6r  lam  nidjt,  aber  er  blieb  nid)t  ofyne  ©tunb  §u  §aufe. 
He  didrft  come,  but  he  had  reason  for  remaining  at  home. 

178.  Sonbent  contradicts,  and  is  used  only  after  a  negative. 

@r  ift  nidjt  reid),  fonbern  arm. 
He  is  not  rich,  but  poor. 

6r  fyat  ba§  §au3  nidjt  gemietet,  fonbern  er  fyat  e3  gelauft. 
He  did  not  rent  the  house,  but  he  bought  it. 


52  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

179.  Stttctn  is  used  very  little.     It  admits  the  preceding  state- 
ment, but  introduces  some  limitation. 

£)te  S3lume  ift  fdjon,  allein  fie  buftet  nicfyt. 
The  flower  is  beautiful,  but  it  is  not  fragrant. 

2)a3  gfeft  t)erltef  prddjtig,  aHetn  e3  bauerte  gu  lange. 
The  festivity  was  a  great  success,  but  it  lasted  too  long. 

180.  Adverbial  coordinate  conjunctions  generally  cause  inversion 
(293).    Some  of  the  most  common  are : 

1.  Additive. 

audf),  also  \&vfo\& ,  furthermore 

auf$erbem,  besides  bergletdjen,  likewise 

bagu,  besides  wmt\\i\\§ ,  particularly 

§ubem,  moreover  befonberS,  especially 

2.  Partitive. 

tetl3  .  .  .  teil£,  partly  .  .  .  partly 

eineStetlfo  .  .  .  anbernteil^,  1  on  the  one  hand  .  .  .  on  the 

einerfett3  .  .  .  anberfettg,   ]     other  hand 

3.  Adversative  or  restrictive. 

fytngegen,     1  ilbrigen^,  moreover 

bafjingegen,  \-on  the  contrary  tro^bem,  in  spite  of  that 

bagegen,      J  inbeffen,  meanwhile 

glei<i)tt)0l)l,  ^  beffenungead^tet,  notwith- 

standing 


groat, 
bod), 


however,  never- 

,,  ,  fogar,  even 

theless 

fonft, 

anbernfaU^, 


otherwise 


md)t3beftott)emger,  nevertheless  tneltnefyr,  but  rather 

4.  Ordinal. 


"?'.    \fint  Jann,/^  8«Ie|t,  | 

erftenS,  J  ferner,  further 


gtt)eiten§,  second  barauf,  thereupon  balb  .  .  .  balb,  now 

S,  third,  etc.  .  .  .  now 


CONJUNCTIONS  53 

5.  Illative. 

alfo,  so  bann,  then  folqlicfo,  1 

,  '      ,  '     8     •      ^consequently 

barum,         7      -  raeut(D>&fe.ttm  fomtt,     j 

I  therefore,  on 

-  - 


, 

beshalb,     J-  7  nun,  «^w,  conse-    bemnadb,^  ..     . 

\thataccount  P        ,        \accordingly 

be^roegen,  j  quently  jonadl),    ) 


bafyer,  hence  fo,  so 

NOTE.    An  illative  conjunction  joins  an  inference  or  a  conclusion  to  a 
preceding  clause. 

181.  Subordinate  conjunctions.    Subordinate  conjunctions  con- 
nect dependent  with  principal  clauses.    The  verb  in  a  dependent 
clause  stands  at  the  end.    For  exceptions  see  295-297. 

182.  The  following  list  contains  only  the  most  important  sub- 
ordinate conjunctions : 

al3,  as,  when  nacfybem,  after         '    ttwtttt,  when 

al3  ob,      ^asif,         jenadjbem, according as  roeil,  because 
al3tt)enn,J  as  though  ob,  whether  roenri,  if,  when 

bet)or,  before  obgleid),!  roenn  audj,  "1 

big,  until  obfdbon,  \although       raenn  aleid),  \ 

*         I  «/^«  */ 
ba,  «j,  ««^.  V»KCO    obtool)!,  j  ruenn  fd^on,  j 


ii,  in  order  that    \t\i,  since  (of  time)  rcarum 

^ 

*      j  ,                         r  r,    r=   >  . 

ecje,  ^w«                  fobalb  al§,  J  rt)te, 


bafe,  M^/  fobalb,      ^  roeSbalb 

'  ' 


,  "1 
b/j      y 


falls,  ^  ^^  M^/       fooft,       l  n)o, 

I     '  '         >as  often  as 
tnbem,    i     ,.,          fooytal§,j  roofer,  whence 

tnbefjen,  /  roci^renb,  while  wo^in,  whither 

'  i  .  2Bcmn  in  direct  or  indirect  questions. 
2  .  3lfe  in  referring  to  one  occasion  in  past  time. 

TTru  f^n  re^errmg  to  the  present  -and  the 

wnen  =  ^ 

future. 

.       -     . 

in  referring  to  repeated  or  customary 

action  in  the  past. 


54  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

* 

184.  UBatttt  is  used  only  in  direct  or  indirect  questions 

2Bann  ttrirb  ber  Slr^t  lommen  ? 
When  will  the  doctor  come  ? 

$>d()  tt)etf$  ntd)t,  nwnn  er  lommt. 
/  do  not  know  when  he  will  come. 

185.  211$  as  a  temporal  conjunction  refers  to  one  occasion  in 

3$  roadjte  auf,  a(3  bie  Ufyr  fed)§  fdjlug. 
I  awoke  when  the  clock  struck  six. 

@r  roar  fdjon  fyier,  al§  icf)  fam. 
Z^  was  here  when  I  came. 

2113  id)  i^n  fat),  bad^te  id)  an  6te. 
When  I  saw  him  I  thought  of  you. 

186.  SBetttt  as  a  temporal  conjunction  refers  to  the  present  or 
the  future  in  all  circumstances,  but  to  the  past  only  in  case  of 
customary  or  repeated  action.    It  cannot  be  used  in  a  question. 

S)ic  Slumen  bliifyen,  roenn  e3  grufyjafyr  rairb. 
The  flowers  bloom  when  spring  comes. 

@r  roirb  lommen,  raenn  e§  gu  fpat  ift. 
He  will  come  when  it  is  too  late. 

$ri£  lam  tmmet,  n>enn  bie  ©tunbe  j($on  angefangen  ^atte. 
Fred  always  came  when  the  lesson  had  begun. 

2Benn  idf)  ifyn  faf),  bad)te  id^  an  ©ie. 
Whenever  I  saw  him  I  thought  of  you. 

INTERJECTIONS 

187.  Interjections  are  used  to  express  sudden  emotion,  a  feeling 
of  surprise,  or  a  command. 

188.  When  an  interjection  is  used  in  connection  with  the  names 
of  the  Deity  the  expression  must  not  be  translated  literally.    This 
would  be  misinterpreting  the  meaning  of  the  German  phrase. 


A.  Form  -{ 


VERBS  55 

VERBS 

189.  The  verb  in  German  bears  a  strong  resemblance  to  the  verb 
in  English.    It  has  two  voices,  the  active  and  the  passive ;  four 
moods,  the  indicative,  subjunctive,  imperative,  and  conditional ;  six 
tenses,    the   present,   imperfect,  perfect,   pluperfect,   future,   and 
future  perfect ;  three  persons,  first,  second,  and  third ;  two  numbers, 
singular  and  plural ;  and  two  kinds  of  verbal  substantives,  the  in- 
finitives and  participles. 

190.  Notice  the  following  outline  of  the  verb  as  to  form  and 
meaning : 

'  i.  weak  :  loben  (224). 

2.  strong:  frf)lagen  (231). 

3.  irregular  weak:  brennen  (230). 

f  (a)  of  tense :  fyaben,  fetn,  roerben  (221- 

I  223). 

1  (b)  of  mood :  biirfen,  Ibnnen,  mogen, 
miiffen,  foflen,  rooHen  (267). 

r  i.  transitive:  loben,  fdjlaqen  (196). 
B.  Meaning  <( 

I  2.  intransitive:  fallen,  leben. 

191.  No  verb  can  be  conjugated  without  the  aid  of  the  auxiliary 
verbs  of  tense,  but  the  auxiliaries  themselves  may  be  used  independ- 
ently of  other  verbs. 

192.  A  verb  may  be  conjugated  with  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  mood 
to  express  ability,  necessity,  and  the  like. 

193.  Weak  verbs  in  German  correspond   to   regular  verbs  in 
English.    The  imperfect  ends  in  te  or  ete,  the  tense  sign  of  weak 
verbs,  and  the  past  participle  in  t  or  et.    The  stem  vowel  never 
changes 

loben,  lobte,  gelobt,  to  praise 
reben,  rebete,  gerebet,  to  speak 
rubern,  ruberte,  gerubert,  to  row 
fycmbeln,  fycmbelte,  gefyanbelt,  to  act 


56  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

194.  Strong  verbs  in  German  correspond  to  irregular  verbs  in 
English.    In  the  imperfect  the  stem  vowel  changes  and  there  is  no 
ending  to  indicate  tense.    The  past  participle  ends  in  en. 

fatten,  ftel,  gef  alien,  to  fall 
frf)lagen,  frf)lug,  gefdjlagen,  to  strike 

195.  Irregular  weak  verbs  have  the  characteristics  of  both  strong 
and  weak  verbs.    They  have  vowel  change  and  add  the  tense  sign 
ie  in  the  imperfect,  as  brennen,  brannte,  gebrannt,  to  burn. 

196.  Only  transitive  verbs  have  voice  —  the  active  and  the 
passive  (260).  In  the  active  voice  the  subject  is  acting,  in  the  passive 
voice  the  subject  is  acted  upon. 

3<$  lobe  ben  3Utonn. 
I  am  praising  the  man. 

3$  roerbe  gelobt. 
I  am  being  praised. 

197.  The  principal  parts  of  a  verb  are  the  present  infinitive,  the 
first  person  of  the  imperfect  indicative,  and  the  past  participle.    It 
is  of  the  greatest  importance  to  learn  the  .principal  parts  of  every 
verb  and  how  they  are  applied  in  the  conjugation.     Examples : 
loben,  lobte,  gelobt ;  fcfylagen,  fd)lug,  gefcfylagen. 

198.  The  present  infinitive  of  most  German  verbs  ends  in  en. 
Exceptions :  fein,  iun,  and  verbs  in  eln  and  ern,  as  fycmbeln,  to  act, 
and  rubern,  to  row. 

199.  The  perfect  infinitive  is  composed  of  the  past  participle  of 
the  verb  to  be  conjugated  and  the  present  infinitive  of  its  auxiliary— 

haben  or  fein.  .    , 

gelobt  fyaben,  to  have  praised 

gelommen  fein,  to  have  come 

200.  The  stem  of  a  verb. 

1.  The  present  stem  is  found  by  dropping  the  ending  en  (n  after 
el  and  er)  of  the  infinitive. 

2.  The  imperfect  stem  is  the  second  member  of  the  principal  parts. 


VERBS  57 

201.  The  present  participle  is  formed  by  adding  b  to  the  present 
infinitive,  as  lobenb,  jefyenb.    Exceptions :  feienb  and  tuenb,  whose 
infinitives  are  respectively  feitt  and  tun. 

202.  The  gerundive,  or  future  passive  participle,  in  German  is 
formed  by  using  §u  with  the  present  participle. 

3)er  gu  nerefyrenbe  9Kann. 
The  man  to  be  honored. 

®ie  nie  gu  t>ergeffenben  Xaten. 
The  deeds  never  to  be  forgotten. 

203.  The  past  participle  has  the  prefix  ge.    Exceptions  :  insepa- 
rable verbs,  verbs  in  teren  and  eien,  and  the  strong  participle  of 
the  modal  auxiliaries  (248,  275). 

serftefyen,  t)erftanb,  t>erftanben,  to  understand 
roiberftefyen,  tmberftanb,  twberftanben,  to  withstand,  resist 
regteren  (12,  3)",  regterte,  regiert,  to  rule 
burfen,  burfte,  geburft  or  burfen,  to  be  allowed 

204.  The  first  and  third  persons  plural,  present  indicative  and  sub- 
junctive, are  always  like  the  present  infinitive.  Exceptions :  \ ein  (221) 
and  tun,  which  has  tuen  in  the  subjunctive. 

205.  The  stem  vowel  of  the  present  subjunctive  in  all  German 
verbs  is  always  like  that  of  the  present  infinitive. 

206.  The  use  of  (jadcu  as  an  auxiliary.   All  transitive  verbs  and 
most  intransitive  verbs  are  conjugated  with  fyaben. 

207.  Verbs  conjugated  with  Ija&etU 

1.  All  transitive  verbs. 

2.  All  reflexive  verbs. 

3.  The  modal  auxiliaries. 

4.  Most  impersonal  verbs. 

5.  Durative  intransitive  verbs. 

NOTE.  Durative  intransitive  verbs  express  duration  without  calling  atten- 
tion to  the  beginning  or  the  end  of  an  act.  They  refer  to  the  whole  dura- 
tion of  an  action  even  though  it  take  but  a  second. 


58  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

®er  Setter  fyat  ben  ©driller  gelobt,  the  teacher  praised  the  pupil. 

Set  Secret  fyat  fid)  gelobt,  the  teacher  praised  himself. 

2Ber  fyat  bag  33ud^  getoollt  ?    Who  wanted  the  book  ? 

@3  fyat  geregnet,  it  rained. 

3$  fyabe  gut  gefdjlafen,  I  slept  well. 

Sinb  fyat  geweint,  the  child  has  been  crying. 

33lume  fyat  gebliifyt,  the  flower  has  bloomed. 
fyat  ben  gangen  Xag  gerttten,  he  rode  the  whole  day. 

$tnb  ^at  gefd^rten,  the  child  screamed. 
®ie  2olomotit)e  ^at  gepftffen,  the  engine  whistled. 

208.  The  use  of  fettt  as  an  auxiliary.   Only  intransitive  verbs  are 
conjugated  with  fein.    If,  however,  they  call  attention  to  the  duration 
of  an  act,  they  are  conjugated  with  fyaben  (207,  note). 

209.  Verbs  conjugated  with  fetru 

1.  Verbs  which  express  a  change  of  condition. 

2.  Verbs  which  denote  motion  to  or  from  a  place. 

3.  Verbs  which  denote  motion  pure  and  simple  without  calling 
attention  to  duration. 

4.  Verbs  which  call  attention  to  the  beginning,  the  end,  or  the 
result  of  an  action. 

5.  The  following  impersonal  verbs:  gefdfjefyen,  gelingen,  gliidten, 
geraten,  mifjltngen,  mi^gludten,  mtftraten, 

6.  (5ein,  roerben,  bleiben. 

3)er  -JRann  tft  geftorben,  the  man  died. 

tft  in  bag  2)o,rf  geritten,  Carl  rode  into  the  village. 

$tnb  tft  gef  alien,  the  child  fell. 
ift  etngefdfjlafen,  he  went  to  sleep. 
ift  aufgeroadjt,  he  has  waked  up. 
ie  Slume  tft  erbliiljt,  the  flower  has  blossomed  out. 

@d)iff  ift  gefunfen,  the  ship  has  sunk. 
ift  gefc^eljen,  it  has  happened. 
ift  tnir  gelungen,  I  succeeded. 

bin  ba  geblieben,  I  stayed  there. 


VERBS  59 

210.  Classification  of  tenses.    The  tenses  may  be  classified  as 
follows : 

1 .  Simple  :  present  and  imperfect. 

2.  Compound  :  perfect,  pluperfect,  future,  future  perfect,  present 
conditional,  and  perfect  conditional. 

NOTE.    Compound  tenses  take  an  auxiliary,  simple  tenses  do  not,  as  id) 
fyabe  gelobt,  id)  roerbe  loben;  but  id)  lobe,  id)  lobte. 

211.  Formation  of  tenses.    The  perfect  indicative  is  formed  by 
adding  the  past  participle  to  the  present  indicative  of  either  jew  or 
fyaben. 

212.  The  perfect  subjunctive  is  formed  by  adding  the  past  par- 
ticiple to  the  present  subjunctive  of  either  fein  or  fyaben. 

J   213.  The  pluperfect  indicative  is  formed  by  adding  the  past  par- 
ticiple to  the  imperfect  indicative  of  either  fein  or  fyaben. 

214.  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  formed  by  adding  the  past 
participle  to  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  either  fein  or  fyaben. 

215.  The  future  indicative  is  formed  by  adding  the  present  in- 
finitive to  the  present  indicative  of  roerben. 

216.  The  future  subjunctive  is  formed  by  adding  the  present 
infinitive  to  the  present  subjunctive  of  roerben. 

217.  The  future  perfect  indicative  is  formed  by  adding  the  per- 
fect infinitive  (199)  to  the  present  indicative  of  roerben. 

218.  The  future  perfect  subjunctive  is  formed  by  adding  the 
perfect  infinitive  to  the  present  subjunctive  of  roerben. 

219.  The  present  conditional  is  formed  by  adding  the  present 
infinitive  to  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  roerben. 

220.  The  perfect  conditional  is  formed  by  adding  the  perfect 
infinitive  to  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  roerben.- 

NOTE.    Apply  the  above  remarks  to  the  conjugations  which  follow. 

(Spricfjroorter.   Ubung  macfyt  ben  ^OZetfter. 

28a3  §an3d)en  nid^t  lernt,  lernt  §an3  nimmermefyr. 


6o 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


221.  Conjugation  of  feitt,  to  be. 

fetn  roar 

feienb  (201) 

fet  feib 


geroefen  (197) 
geroefen  fetn  (199) 
feien  6ie  (240) 


INDICATIVE   SUBJUNCTIVE 
Present 


id)  bin 
bu  btft 
erift 
roir  finb 
ifyr  feib 
fie  finb 


fet 

feieft 

fet 

feien 

feiet 

feien 


Imperfect 


id)  roar 
bu  roarft 
er  roar 
rotr  roaren 
il)r  roart  ' 
fie  roaren 


rodre 

rodreft 

ware 

n>dren 

nwret 

roaren 

INDICATIVE 

icfy  roerbe  fein 
bu  toirft  fetn 
er  n)irb  fein 
Ttnr  roerben  fein 
il)r  roerbet  fein 
fie  toerben  fein 


INDICATIVE 

Perfect 

id)  bin  geraefen 
bu  btft  geroefen 
er  ift  geroefen 
twr  finb  geraefen 
i^r  feib  geraefen 
fie  finb  geroefen 

Pluperfect 

idj  roar  geroefen 
bu  roarft  geroefen 
er  roar  geroefen 
roir  roaren  geroefen 
t^r  roart  geroefen- 
fie  roaren  geroefen 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

fet  geroefen 
feieft  geroefen 
fei  geroefen 
feien  geroefen 
fetet  geroefen 
feien  geroefen 

rodre  geroefen 
rodreft  geroefen 
rodre  geroefen 
roaren  geroefen 
rodret  geroefen 
roaren  geroefen 


Future 


Future  Perfect 


id)  roerbe  geroefen  fein 
bu  roirft  geroefen  fein 
er  roirb  geroefen  fein 
rotr  roerben  geroefen  fein 
ifyr  roerbet  geroefen  fetn 
fie  roerben  geroefen  fein 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

roerbe  fein 
roerbeft  fein 
roerbe  fetn 
roerben  fein 
roerbet  fein 
roerben  fein 

roerbe  geroefen  fein 
roerbeft  geroefen  fein 
roerbe  geroefen  fein 
roerben  geroefen  fetn 
roerbet  geroefen  fein 
roerben  geroefen  fetn 


VERBS 


61 


Present 

id)  rxwrbe  fein 
bu  nwrbeft  fein 
er  tmirbe  fein 
twr  nwrben  fein 
ifyr  ttwrbet  fein 
fie  roiirben  fein 


CONDITIONALS 

Perfect 

roiirbe  geroefen  fein 
ttmrbeft  geroefen  fein 
ttwrbe  geroefen  fein 
nwrben  geroefen  fein 
nnirbet  geroefen  fein 
nwrben  geroefen  fein 


222.  Conjugation  of  (jabcn,  to  have. 

^aben 
^abenb  (201) 


INDICATIVE     SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 


id)  fyabe 
bu  |aft 

er  fyat 


tyr  Ijabt 
fie  fyaben 


fyabe 

Ijabeft 

^abe 

Ijaben 

l)abet 

fyaben 


Imperfect 


id^  ^citte 

l)dtte 

bu  fjatteft 

fytitteft 

er  ^atte 

^dtte 

rt)ir  fatten 

fatten 

ifyr  ^attet 

^dttet 

fie  fatten 

fatten 

INDICATIVE 
id)  roerbe  i)aben 
bu  twrft  ^aben 
er  rairb  l)aben 
nnr  raerben  ^aben 
i^r  raerbet  fyaben 
fie  raerben  {)aben 


geljabt  (197) 
gefyabt  ^aben  (199) 
^aben  @ic  (240) 


INDICATIVE 


Perfect 


id)  ^abe  gefyabt 
bu  ^aft  ge^abt 
er  fyat  geEjabt 
n)ir  ^aben  ge^abt 
ifyr  J)abt  ge^abt 
fie  ^aben  gefyabt 


Pluperfect 


id)  ^atte  ge^abt 
bu  fyatteft  ge^abt 
er  ^aite  gefyabt 
roir  fatten  geljabt 
i^r  fyattet  ge^abt 
fie  fatten  getjabt 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

fyabe  ge^abi 
^abefi  ge^abt 
fyabe  ge^abt 
^aben  ge^abt 
^abet  gefyabt 
tjaben  ge^abt 

f)dtte  ge^abt 
fyatteft  ge^abt 
^dtte  ge^abt 
fatten  gefyabt 
^cittet  geljabt 
fatten  ge^abt 


Future 


SUBJUNCTIVE 
roerbe  ^aben 
raerbeft  l)aben 
roerbe  ^aben 
raerben  Ejaben 
raerbet  fyaben 
raerben  E)aben 


62  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Future  Perfect 

id)  roerbe  gefyabt  fyaben  rnerbe  gefyabt  fyaben 

bu  nrirft  gefyabt  fyaben  roerbeft  gefyabt  fyaben 

er  n)irb  gefyabt  fyaben  roerbe  gefyabt  fyaben 

ttrir  roerben  gefyabt  fyaben  roerben  gefyabt  ^aben 

t^r  roerbet  ge^abt  fyaben  raerbet  geE)abt  l)aben 

fie  roerben  ge^abt  ^aben  roerben  getjabt  fyaben 

CONDITIONALS 
Present  Perfect 


\§  tDurbe  ^aben  raiirbe  gel)abt  ^aben 

bu  nwrbeft  ^aben  rourbeft  ge^abt  fyaben 

er  Toiitbe  ^aben  roiirbe  gefyabt  ^aben 

rait  raiirben  ^aben  ^                    wiitben  geljabt  ^aben 

iE)t  nwrbet  ^aben  njurbet  geE)abt  l)aben 

fie  roiirben  E)aben  n>urben  ge^abt  fyaben 

NOTE.    The  conditionals  are  periphrastic  forms  of  the  subjunctive,  and 

may  be  used  instead  of  the  subjunctive  in  conditional  clauses. 


223.  Conjugation  of  toerben,  to  become,  grow. 

roerben  nwrbe  (rtwrb)        geroorben  (197) 

rt)erbenb  (201)  geroorben  fein  (199) 

n>erbet  roerben  @ie  (240) 


INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE                    INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 
Present                                                                  Perfect 

id)  roerbe  rcerbe  id)  bin  geraorben  fei  geraorben 

bu  rairft  raerbeft  bu  bifi  geroorben  feiefi  gen)orben 

er  roirb  raerbe  er  ift  geroorben  fei  geraorben 

wir  rt)erben  roerben  n)ir  finb  geraorben  feten  geroorben 

iFjr  rcerbet  noerbet  iljr  feib  geroorben  feiet  geraorben 

fie  roerben  werben  fie  finb  geworben  feien  geraorben 


VERBS 

INDICATIVE        SUBJUNCTIVE  INDICATIVE 

Imperfect 

id)  raurbe  (raarb)     raiirbe 
bu  raurbeft(raarbft)  raiirbeft 
er  raurbe  (raarb)      raurbe 
rair  raurben  raiirben 

ifyr  raurbet  raiirbet 

fie  raurben  raurben 


63 

SUBJUNCTIVE 
Pluperfect 

idj  raar  geraorben      ware  geraorben 
bu  raarft  geraorben    raareft  geraorben 
er  raar  geraorben       raare  geraorben 
rair  raaren  geraorben  raaren  geraorben 
ifyr  raart  geraorben    raaret  geraorben 
fie  rcaren  geroorben  tt)dren  geraorben 


INDICATIVE 

id^  roerbe  rt)erben 
bu  rairft  raerben 
cr  ttnrb  raerben 
tuir  raerben  roerben 
i^r  tt)erbet  roerben 
fie  roerben  raerben 


Future 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

tuerbe  roerben 
werbeft  roerben 
njerbe  raerben 
roerben  roerben 
raerbet  tDerben 
toerben  roerben 


Future  Perfect 


id^  roerbe  geroorben  fein 
bu  roirft  geroorben  fein 
er  nrirb  geraorben  fein 
roir  raerben  geraorben  fein 
i^r  roerbet  geraorben  fein 
fie  roerben  geroorben  fein 


roerbe  geraorben  fein 
raerbeft  geraorben  fein 
raerbe  geraorben  fein 
raerben  geraorben  fein 
raerbet  geraorben  fein 
raerben  geraorben  fein 


CONDITIONALS 


Present 

id)  raiirbe  raerben 
bu  raiirbeft  raerben 
er  raiirbe  raerben 
rair  raiirben  raerben 
i^r  raiirbet  raerben 
fie  raiirben  raerben 


Perfect 

raiirbe  geraorben  fein 
raiirbeft  geraorben  fein 
raiirbe  geraorben  fein 
raiirben  geraorben  fein 
raiirbet  geraorben  fein 
raiirben  geraorben  fein 


64 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


224.  Weak  verbs.   Conjugation  of  lobcn,  to  praise. 
loben  lobte  gelobt  (197) 


lobenb  (201) 
lobe 

INDICATIVE      SUBJUNCTIVE 
Present 


lobt 


gelobt  fyaben  (199) 
loben  @ie  (240) 


id)  lobe 
bu  lobft 
er  lobt 

lobe 
lobeft 
lobe 

tt)ir  loben 

loben 

tyr  lobt 
fie  loben 

lobet 
loben 

Imperfect 

id)  lobte 
bu  lobteft 
er  lobte 

lobte 
lobteft 
lobte 

tmr  lobten 

lobten 

tyr  lobtet 
fie  lobten 

lobtet 
lobten 

INDICATIVE 

id)  roerbe  loben 
bu  tmrft  loben 
er  txnrb  loben 
n>ir  werben  loben 
ifyr  roerbet  loben  . 
fie  roerben  loben 


INDICATIVE 


Perfect 


id)  fyabe  gelobt 
bu  fyaft  gelobt 
er  fyat  gelobt 
n)ir  l)aben  gelobt 
ifyr  ^abt  gelobt 
fie  fyaben  gelobt 


Pluperfect 


id)  l)atte  gelobt 
bu  fyatteft  gelobt 
er  fyatte  gelobt 
n)ir  fatten  gelobt 
iljr  Ijattet  gelobt 
fie  fatten  gelobt 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

fyabe  gelobt 
^abeft  gelobt 
fyabe  gelobt 
Ijaben  gelobt 
l)abet  gelobt 
^aben  gelobt 
t 

fyatte  gelobt 
Ijdtteft  gelobt 
l)dtte  gelobt 
fatten  gelobt 
pttet  gelobt 
fatten  gelobt 


Future 


Future  Perfect 


id)  n>erbe  gelobt  ^aben 
bu  roirft  gelobt  ^aben 
er  wirb  gelobt  fyaben 
roir  raetben  gelobt  fyaben 
il)r  n>erbet  gelobt  ^aben 
fie  roerben  gelobt  l)aben 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

roerbe  loben 
roerbeft  loben 
werbe  loben 
roerben  loben 
roerbet  loben 
roerben  loben 

rx)erbe  gelobt  Ijaben 
roerbeft  gelobt  ^aben 
n)erbe  gelobt  Ijaben 
werben  gelobt  ^aben 
raerbet  gelobt  l)aben 
n>erben  gelobt  l)aben 


VERBS  65 

CONDITIONALS 
Present  Perfect 

idj  ttwrbe  loben  nwrbe  gelobt  fyaben 

bu  nwrbeft  loben  ttmrbeft  gelobt  fyaben 

er  nwrbe  loben  ttwrbe  gelobt  fyaben 

tt)ir  roiirben  loben  nwrben  gelobt  fyaben 

ifyr  nwrbet  loben  nwrbet  gelobt  fyaben 

fie  nwrben  loben  roiirben  gelobt  fyaben 

225.  Table  of  endings  for  both  weak  and  strong  verbs. 

INDICATIVE      SUBJUNCTIVE  INDICATIVE        SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present  Imperfect 

1.  I. 

2.  ft  2.    ft 

3-  3- 

1.  tt  i.  it 

2.  i  2.    t 

3-  H  3-  tt 

226.  Weak  verbs  in  eltt  or  em  drop  e  before  I  and  r  when  an 
ending  is  added  which  begins  with  e.    Notice  the  following  forms 
of  fycmbeln,  to  act,  and  rubern,  to  row : 

fycmbeln     ^anbelte  gefyanbelt  rubern     ruberte  gerubert 

fyanbelnb  gefyanbelt  fyaben  rubernb  gerubert  Ijaben 

fyanble      Ejanbelt    ^anbeln  @ie        rubre      rubert    rubern  <Sie 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE  INDICATIVE       SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present  Present 

id)  fyanble  Ejanble  id^  rubre  rubre 

bu  fyanbelft  ^anbleft  bu  ruberft  rubreft 

er  Ejanbelt  ^anble  er  rubert  rubre 

tmr  l)anbeln  ^anblen  nrir  rubern  rubren 

il)r  ^anbelt  fyanblet  il)r  rubert  rubret 

fie  fyanbeln  l)anblen  fie  rubern  rubren 


I. 

e 

i. 

e 

2. 

ft 

2. 

eft 

3- 

t 

3- 

e 

i. 

en 

i. 

en 

2. 

t 

2. 

et 

3- 

en 

3- 

en 

66  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

227.  Connective  C  in  weak  verbs.    Weak  verbs  which  have  the 
connecting  vowel  e  before  the  regular  endings  ft,  t,  and  te  are  those 
whose  stem  ends : 

1.  In  a  dental  b  or  t,  as  reben  and  beten. 

2.  In  a  single  m  or  n  (except  lernen  and  roarnen),  as  atmen  and 
tegnen ;  but  llemmfl,  fount,  etc.,  with  double  m  or  n. 

228.  Weak  verbs  with  sibilant  stems.   Weak  verbs  whose  stems 
end  in  the  sibilants  f,  fp,  fj,  f;,  fd),  £,  and  3  generally  add  t  instead 
of  eft  in  the  present  indicative  second  singular,  and  they  always 
omit  the  connecting  vowel  before  t  and  te. 

229.  Examples  of  verbs  having  connective  e  and  of  verbs  with 
sibilant  stems  :   reben,  to  speak  ;  atmen,  to  breathe ;  rafen,  to  rave ; 
griiften,  to  greet-,  ttwnfdfyen,  to  wish ;  reigen,  to  excite,  charm. 

reben       rebete       gerebet  rafen  rafte  geraft 

atmen      atmete      geatmet  grii^en  gruftte  gegrufst 

txwnfdfyen  nwnfd)te  gettmnfd)t 

rei^en  rei§te  gereigt 
PRESENT  INDICATIVE 

id)  rebe  atme  rafe  grille  nwnfcfye  rei^e 

bu  rebeft  atmeft  raf(ef)t  gtu^(ef)t  n)Unfd)(e)ft  rcij(cf)t 

er  rebet  atmet  raft  grii^t  raunjc^t  reijt 

n)ir  reben  atmen  rafen  grii^en  n>unfc^en  rei^en 

ifyr  rebet  atmet  raft  grii^t  roiinfdjt  rei^t 

fie  reben  atmen  rafen  gruften  n)iinfd^en  ret^en 

2lKer  Slnfang  ift  fd^roer. 

SBer  21  fagt,  muf$  aud^  S3  fagen. 

^etne  5Kofen  ol)ne  2)ornen. 

(Snbe  gut,  aEe§  gut. 

9Benn  bie  9Jot  am  gro^ten,  ift  ©otte§  §tlfe  am  nad^ften. 

SRorgenftunbe  fyat  ©olb  im  SKunbe. 

Gin  gute§  ©eroiflen  ift  ein  fanfte§  SRufyefifjen. 

SKu^iggang  ift  aEer  Safter  3lnfang. 

2Ber  ben  pfennig  nid^t  efyrt,  ift  be§  Balers  nid^t  roert. 


VERBS 


67 


230.  Irregular  weak  verbs.     Irregular  weak  verbs  have  in  the 
imperfect  stem  and  the  perfect  participle  the  characteristics  of  both 

strong  and  weak  verbs.    They  are  : 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

brennen  brannte  gebrannt  brennte 

brtngen  bracfyte  gebrad)t  bradfjte 

benlen  bad)te  gebadfyt  bad)te 

biinlen  beudfjte  gebeud)t  beucfyte 

lennen  lannte  gefannt  fennte 

nennen  nannte  genannt  nennte 

rennen  rannte  gerannt  rennte 

fenben  fanbte  gefanbt  fenbete 

roenben  roanbte  geroanbt  roenbete 

NOTE.    2)iinfett,  fenben,  and  roenben  are  often  regularly  weak* 

231.  Strong  verbs.    Conjugation  of  fdjlagctt,  to  strike,  hit. 


frf)lagen 


201) 


(197) 

gefcfylagen  l)aben  (199) 
fd)Iagen  <Ste  (240) 


INDICATIVE    SUBJUNCTIVE 
Present 


INDICATIVE 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


Perfect 


i<* 

bu  fd)ldgft  fdjlageft 

er  fd)lagt  fdjlage 

nut  fcfylagen  fd)lagen 

tfyr  fdjlagt  fdjlaget 

fie  fd)lagen  fdjlagen 

Imperfect 


td^  l)abe  gefd^lagen 
bu  fyaft  gefd)lagen 
er  l)at  gefcfylagen 
n>ir  l)aben  gefd^lagen 
t^r  fyabt  gefd^lagen 
fie  l)aben  gefd^lagen 


fyabe  gefd^lagen 
^abeft  gefd^lagen 
l)abe  gefdjlagen 
l)aben  gefd^lagen 
^abet  gefdjlagen 
l)aben  gefdjlagen 


Pluperfect 


bu  fd^lugft  fd^liigeft 

er  fd)lug  fd)liige 

tt)ir  fd^lugen  fdf)liigen 

tE)t  fd^lugt  fd^liiget 

fie  fd^lugen  fd)liigen 


td^  Ijatte  gefdjlagen 
bu  l)atteft  gefdjlagen 
er  ^atte  gefdjlagen 
nnr  fatten  gefdjlagen 
il)t  fyattet  gefdjlagen  . 
fie  fatten  gefdjlagen 


^atte  gefdjlagen 


fyatte  gef^Iagen 
fatten  gefdjlagen 
fyattet  gefdjlagen 
fatten  gefdjlagen 


68  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Future 

idj  roerbe  fdjlagen  n>erbe  fdjlagen 

bu  roirft  fd)lagen  roerbeft  fd)lagen 

er  rwrb  fcfylagen  roerbe  fdjlagen 

twr  roerben  fdjlagen  roerben  fdjlagen 

ifyr  tuerbet  fcfylagen  roerbet  fdjlagen 

fie  roerben  jd)lagen  raerben  fc^lagen 

Future  Perfect 

id)  tDerbe  gefd)Iagen  ^aben  n>erbe  gefdfylagen 

bu  rairft  gefd^lagen  fyaben  raerbeft  gefc^Iagen 

er  twrb  gefdt)lagen  ^aben  tuerbe  gefd^Iagen  fyaben 

tt)ir  raerben  gefd)Iagen  ^aben  roerben  gefd^lagen  ^aben 

t^r  raerbet  gefcfylagen  fjaben  n>erbet  gef($lagen  ^aben 

fie  roerben  gefd^lagen  ^aben  raerben  gefd)lagen  ^aben 

CONDITIONALS 
Present  Perfect 

.  idj  roiirbe  fd^lagen  i($  raiirbe  gefd^lagen  ^aben 

bu  iDiirbeft  fd)lagen  bu  wurbeft  gefd^Iagen  ^abe 

er  ttwrbe  fd)Iagen  er  tourbe  gefcfylagen  ^aben 

tt)ir  tDiirben  fd)lagen  txrir  wiirben  gefd^lagen 

il)r  txwrbet  fd^lagen  il)r  n>urbet  gefd^lagen  fyaben 

fie  raiirben  fd^lagen  fie  ttwrben  gefdjlagen  l)aben 

232.  The  present  indicative  of  strong  verbs.  Examples  of  the 
present  indicative  of  strong  verbs :  fcfylagen,  to  strike,  hit ;  fpred)en, 
to  speak  ;  fefyen,  to  see ;  gefyett,  to  go. 


id)  fdjlage 

id)  fpred^e 

i($  fefye 

id^  ge^e 

bu  fd)lagft 

bu  fpridjft 

bu  flc^p 

bu  geljft 

er  fd)lagt 

er  fprid^t 

er  fieE)t 

er  gefyt 

roir  fd^lagen 

wir  fpred^en 

rair  fe^en 

wir  gel)en 

i^r  fc^Iagt 

ifyr  fpred^t 

i^r  fe^t 

fy  gefjt 

fie  fdjlagen 

fie  fpred^en 

fie  fefyen 

fie  ge^en 

VERBS  69 

233.  Strong  verbs  whose  stem  vowel  is  a  have  vowel  mutation 
in  the  second  and  third  persons  singular  present  indicative.    Also 
Icwfen,  faufen,  and  ftojjen.    Exceptions :  fd)affen  and  flatten. 

234.  Strong  verbs  whose  stem  vowel  is  short  e  have  short  i  in 
the  second  and  third  persons  singular  present  indicative  and  in  the 
bu  form  of  the  imperative.    Three  verbs  whose  stem  vowel  is  long 
e  also  belong  to  this  class.    They  are :  geben,  nefymen,  and  treten. 

NOTE.  The  stem  vowel  e  of  strong  verbs  is  short  when  it  is  followed  by 
two  consonants,  provided  the  first  of  the  two  is  not  fy;  see  also  6  and  7,  2. 
Examples:  effen,  fyelfen,  treffen. 

235.  Seven  strong  verbs  whose  stem  vowel  is  long  e  have  ie  in 
the  second  and  third  persons  singular  present  indicative  and  in  the 
bu  form  of  the  imperative.  They  are:  befefylen,  empfefylen,  gefcfyefyen, 
lefen,  fcfyeren,  fefyen,  and  ftefylen. 

236.  Seven  strong  verbs  whose  stem  vowel  is  long  e  have  no 
vowel  change.    They  are :  beroegen,  gefjen,  genefen,  fyeben,  pflegen, 
ftefyen,  and  roeben. 

237.  Strong  verbs  whose  stems  end  in  b  or  t  take  the  connecting 
vowel  e  before  the  endings  ft  and  t.    They  are :  binben,  finben,  lei= 
ben,  meiben,  frfjeiben,  fd^inben,  fcfynetben,  fcfytDtnben,  fteben,  ttrinben, 
biekn,  bitten,  gleiten,  reiten,  fcfyreiten,  and  ftretten.   The  follo\ving 
use  e  before  t  only  in  the  second  plural  of  the  present  and  imperfect 
and  in  the  second  plural  imperative ;  they  omit  it  before  ft  in  the 
present,  but  may  have  it  in  the  imperfect : 

1.  laben,  braten,  fyalten,  raten. 

2.  treten. 

3.  berften,  fed)ten,  fledjten,  gelten,  fd^elten. 

NOTE.  The  verbs  under  3,  and  all  but  laben  under  i,  omit  the  tense 
sign  t  in  the  third  person  present  indicative,  as  e3  gilt,  er  fycilt. 

238.  Strong  verbs  with  stems  ending  in  a  sibilant,  §,  ff,  fj,  fdj,  £, 
and  g,  often  omit  the  connecting  vowel  e,  and  the  endings  eft  and  et 
then  become  t.    The  third  singular  present  indicative  never  takes 
the  connecting  vowel.    Notice  the  following  examples : 


70  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE 

tdj  effe  id)  fyetfte  id)  ft^e 

bu  ifet  (iffcft)  bu  l)eifct  (l)eifjeft)  bu  fifct  (ftfceft) 

er  tftt  er  fyeijst  er  fi|t 

tt)ir  effen  nut  fyeiften  rair  fi^en 

iljr  efjt  (effet)  tyr  Ijeifct  O&etfeet)  tyr  ftfct  (ftfcet) 

fie  efjen  fie  fyeiften  fie  fi^en 

239.  List  of  strong  verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  a  sibilant : 

1.  genefen,  fiefen,  lefen,  preifen. 

2.  efjen,  frefjen,  mefjen. 

3.  fid)  befleif$en,  bei^en,  flie^en,  geniefcen,  gie^en,  glei^en,  ^ei^en, 
rei^en,  fd^ie^en,  fd)Iei^en,  fdjmei^en,  fprie^en,  fto^en,  Derbrieften. 

4.  brefd^en,  lreifd)en,  lofd^en. 

5.  ft^en,  fd^melgen. 

240.  The  imperative  of  strong  verbs.    Examples  : 

fd)lag(e)  fd)lagt  fd^Iagen  @ie 

fprid)  fpred)t  fprec^en  ©ie 

Iie§  left  lefen  @ie 

gc^(c)  ge^t  gefjen  @ie 

241.  The  bu  form  of  the  imperative  of  strong  verbs  often  omits 
the  ending  e.    It  is  always  omitted  in  those  verbs  which  change  e 
to  t  or  ie,  except  in  fefyen,  which  has  both  fiefy  and  fiefye. 

242.  The  pronoun  @tc,  in  imperative  forms,  is  always  expressed, 
but  bu  and  tfyr  are  expressed  only  in  case  of  emphasis. 

243.  The  ifyr  form  is  always  like  the  second  plural  present  in- 
dicative.   For  the  vowel  in  the  bu  form  see  234-236. 

244.  Vowel  mutation  in  the  imperative  of  strong  verbs  occurs 
only  in  those  verbs  whose  stem  vowel  is  mutated  in  the  infinitive. 

245.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  of  strong  verbs  is  formed  on  the 
imperfect  stem  by  mutating  the  stem  vowel  (a,  o,  u)  and  adding  e. 

246.  Separable  verbs.    A  separable  verb  is  composed  of  a  verb 
and  a  separable  prefix.   The  prefix  of  a  separable  verb  always  bears 
the  accent.    For  the  order  see  304. 


VERBS  71 

247.  Conjugation  of  nnfftcfjcu,  to  stand  up. 

aufftefyen  fianb  .  .  .  auf  aufgeftanben 

aufftefyenb  aufgeftanben  fein 

ftefye  auf  ftefyt  auf  ftefyen  @te  auf 

INDICATIVE 
Present  Imperfect 

id)  ftefye  auf  id)  ftanb  auf 

bu  ftefyft  auf  bu  ftanbeft  auf 

er  ftefyt  auf  er  ftanb  auf 

roir  ftefjen  auf  roir  fianben  auf 

tfyr  fte^t  auf  il)r  ftanbet  auf 

fie  ftefyen  auf  fie  ftanben  auf 

Perfect  Future 

id^  bin  aufgeftanben  id^  n>erbe  auffte^en 

Pluperfect  Future  Perfect 

idl)  war  aufgeftanben  i($  raerbe  aufgeftanben  fein 

CONDITIONALS 
Present  Perfect 

id)  raiirbe  aufftefyen  id^  roiirbe  aufgeftanben  fein 

248.  Inseparable  verbs.    An  inseparable  verb  is  composed  of  a 
verb  and  an  inseparable  prefix  (203,  250). 

249.  Conjugation  of  fcetfteljett,  to  understand. 

flerftefyen  Derfianb  t)erftanben 

t)erftefyenb  uerftanben  !>aben 

en  @ic 


INDICATIVE 
Present  Imperfect  Perfect 

idf)  uerftelje  id^  t>erftanb  id^  l)abe  t)erftanben 

bu  t>erftel)ft  bu  t)erftanbeft  Pluperfect 

er  t)crfte^t  er  uerftanb  id^  ^atte  t)erftanben 

rait  Dcrflc^en  rair  t)erftanben  Future 

ifyr  t)erfie^t  i^r  werftanbet  id)  raerbe 

fie  t)erftel)en  fie  t)erftanben  etc. 


72  HANDBOOK  OF  ^GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

250.  Prefixes.    The  inseparable  prefixes  are  be,  ge,  ent  (etnp  be- 
fore f),  er,  t)er,  ger,  and  nriber. 

251.  The  separable  prefixes  are  generally  prepositions,  adverbs, 
adjectives,  or  nouns.    They  usually  retain  their  regular  meaning. 
Examples:  aufftefyen,  fortgefjen,  loglaffen,  fyauSfyalten. 

252.  The  prefixes  which  may  be  either  separable  or  inseparable 
are  the  prepositions  burd),  iiber,  urn,  imter,  and  the  adverb  ttneber. 
When  separable  the  prefix  bears  the  accent,  when  it  is  inseparable 
the  verb  is  accented. 

253.  Reflexive  verbs.    A  reflexive  verb  is  one  whose  subject  is 
both  the  doer  and  the  recipient  of  an  action. 

254.  The  reflexive  pronoun  is  the  accusative  of  the  correspond- 
ing subject  form,  except  in  the  third  person,  where  it  is  [id).   A  few 
reflexive  verbs  govern  the  dative  and  a  still  smaller  number  the 
genitive,  as :  id)  fd)metd)le  mir,  bu  fd)meid)elft  bit,  er  fdf)meid)elt  fid), 
and  idj  fpotte  meiner,  bu  fpotteft  beiner,  er  fpottet  feiner. 

255.  In  the  simple  tenses  the  reflexive  pronoun  follows  the  verb, 
in  the  compound  tenses  it  follows  the  auxiliary. 

256.  Any  German  verb  may.be  reflexive  if  the  sense  permits. 

257.  Reflexive  verbs  do  not  have  a  passive  voice. 

258.  Conjugation  of  fid)  fdjlngen,  to  strike  one's  self. 

fid)  fd)lagen  fd)lug  fid)  (fid))  gejd)lagen 

fidj  fd)lagenb  fidj  gefd)lagen  fyaben 

fdjlage  bid)  f#)tagt  eud)  fd)lagen  ©ie  fid) 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present 

id)  fd)lage  mid)  id)  fdjlage  midj 

bu  fdjltigft  bid)  bu  fd)lageft  bid) 

er  fd)ldgi  fid)  er  fd)lage  fid) 

nrir  fd^Iagen  un§  tt)ir  f($Iagen  unS 

i^r  fdjlagt  eud^  i^r  fdjlaget  eud^ 

fie  fcfylagen  fid^  fie  fdjlagen  fid() 


VERBS  73 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Imperfect 

id()  fcfylug  mid)  .    id)  fd)luge  mid(j 
bu  fd)lugft  bidl)  bu  fdljlugeft  bid) 

er  fdjjlug  fief)  er  fdjliige  fidf) 

tDtr  fcfylugen  un3  nrir  fd)liigen  un3 

ifyr  fdjlugt  eudfj  tf)t  fd^Iiiget  eudfj 

fie  fd^Iugen  ftd^  fie  fcfyliigen  fic^ 

Perfect 

id^  ^abe  midf)  gefd^lagen  id^  Ijabe  mid^  gefdfjlagen 

bu  l)aft  bid^  gefcf)lagen  bu  fyabeft  bid^)  gefd^lagen 

er  fyat  fid^  gefd^Iagen  er  l)abe  fidf)  gefd^Iagen 

tt)ir  ^aben  un§  gefdfylagen  roir  ^aben  ung  gefd)Iagen 

ifjr  Ijabt  eud^  gefdjlagen  t^r  fyabet  eud^  gefd^Iagen 

fie  l)aben  fidf)  gefc^lagen  fie  E)aben  fid^  gefcfylagen 

Pluperfect 

id^  l)atte  mid^  gefcfylagen  id^  ^dtte  mid^  gefc^Iagen 

Future 

id)  raerbe  mid^  fd^Iagen  id)  raerbe  mi($  fd)Iagen 

Future  Perfect 

itf)  roerbe  mid^  gefd)Iagen  fyaben     id^  raerbe  mid^  gefd^lagen  fyaben 

CONDITIONALS 
Present  Perfect 

id^  nwrbe  mid^  fd)Iagen  id^  tt)Urbe  mid)  gefd^Iagen  ^aben 

259.  Separable  reflexive  verbs.  Reflexive  verbs  may  take  a  sep- 
arable or  an  inseparable  prefix  (250,  251).  The  conjugation  of  fidf) 
umfefyen,  to  look  around,  is  as  follows: 

fid)  umfefyen  fafy  fid)  um  (fid))  umgefefyen 

fid)  umfefyenb  fid)  umgefefjen  fyaben 

fiel)  bid§  um  fefyt  eud^  um  fe{)en  6ie  fid^  um 


74  '  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present 

itf)  fefye  mid)  urn  id)  fefye  mid)  um 

bu  fiefyft  bid()  um  bu  fefyeft  bid()  um 

er  fiefyt  fid)  um  er  fefye  fid)  um 

nrir.  fefyen  un3  um  tt)ir  fefyen  un3  um 

ifyr  fefyt  eudjj  um  tfyr  fefyet  eudfj  um 

fie  fefyen  fid^  um  fie  feEjen  fid)  um 

Imperfect 

idj  fal)  mid)  um  id)  fd^e  mid^  um 

Perfect 

idl)  ^abe  midf)  umgefefyen  id^  ^abe  mid)  umgefe^en 

Pluperfect 

id()  E)atte  mi($  umgefe^en  id(j  E)dtte  midf)  umgefe^en 

Future 

id()  werbe  mid^  umfeE)en  i($  roerbe  mid^  umfe^en 

Futtire  Perfect 

id(j  roerbe  mid^  umgeje^en  ^aben     idjj  roerbe  mid^  umgefe^en  E)aben 

CONDITIONALS 
Present  Perfect 

idi)  roiirbe  mid)  umfefyen  idf)rDurbemid^umgefe^en^aben 

260.  The  passive  voice.    The  German  verb  forms  its  passive 
voice  either  with  fein  or  with  roerben  (196).  The  passive  with  roerbett 
may  be  called  the  actional  passive,  and  the  passive  with  fein  the 
perfective  passive. 

261.  The  actional  passive  denotes  action  in  progress.     It  is 
formed  by  combining  the  past  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  with 
the  conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  verb  roerben.    Notice  the  position 
of  this  participle  in  the  conjugation  (264). 

262.  The  past  participle  geroorben  drops  the  prefix  ge  when  pre- 
ceded by  a  past  participle.    Notice  the  compound  tenses  in  the 
conjugation  (264). 


VERBS  75 

263.  The  perfective  passive  denotes  completed  action.     It  is 
formed  by  combining  the  past  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  with 
the  conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  verb  fein.    Observe  carefully  the 
following  illustrative  sentences  showing  the  difference  between  the 
actional  and  the  perfective  passive : 

au3  rotrb  gebaut,  the  house  is  being  built. 
§au3  ift  gebaut,  the  house  is  built. 
SDte  £ur  rotrb  gefcfyloffen,  the  door  is  being  dosed. 
2)te  £iir  ift  gefdfjloffen,  the  door  is  dosed. 

264.  Conjugation  of  the  actional  passive.  Example:  lobw,  to  praise. 

gelobt  roerben  ttwrbe  gelobt  gelobt  roorben 

gelobt  roerbenb  gelobt  tuorben  fein 

fei  gelobt  feib  gelobt  feien  ©ie  gelobt 

NOTE.    The  passive  imperative  is  formed  with  jein  instead  of  roerbett. 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present 

id)  roerbe  gelobt  idj  roerbe  gelobt 

bu  n)it[t  gelobt  bu  roerbeft  gelobt 

er  tDtrb  gelobt  er  roerbe  gelobt 

tt)ir  roerben  gelobt  tt)ir  roerben  gelobt 

ifyr  roerbet  gelobt  t^r  raerbet  gelobt 

fie  roerben  gelobt  fie  roerben  gelobt 

NOTE.    3^  tt)erbe  gelobt  means  I  am  being  praised  (263,  sentences). 
Imperfect 

idj  ttwrbe  gelobt  idj  raiirbe  gelobt 

Perfect 

id^  bin  gelobt  roorben  id^  jet  gelobt  roorben 

Pluperfect 

i<^  roar  gelobt  raorben  id^  radre  gelobt  roorben 

Future 

id^  tt)erbe  gelobt  trjerben  id^  rcerbe  gelobt  roerben 

Future  Perfect 

tdfj  roerbe  gelobt  roorben  jein         td^  roerbe  gelobt  roorben  fein 


76  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

CONDITIONALS 
Present  Perfect 

id)  roiirbe  gelobt  roerben        id)  roiirbe  gelobt  roorben  fein 

265.  Conjugation  of  the  perfective  passive.    Example:  tetten, 
to  save. 

gerettet  fein  roar  gerettet  gerettet  geroefen 

gerettet  feienb  gerettet  geroefen  fein 

fei  gerettet  feib  gerettet  feten  @ie  gerettet 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present 

id)  bin  gerettet  id)  fei  gerettet 

bu  bift  gerettet  bu  feieft  gerettet 

er  ift  gerettet  er  fei  gerettet 

roir  finb  gerettet  roir  feten  gerettet 

ifyr  feib  gerettet  ifyr  feiet  gerettet 

fie  finb  gerettet  fie  feien  gerettet 

NOTE.   3d)  bin  gerettet  means  I  am  saved  (263,  sentences). 
Imperfect 

id)  roar  gerettet  id)  roare  gerettet 

Perfect 

id?  bin  gerettet  geroefen  id)  fei  gerettet  geroefen 

Pluperfect 

id)  roar  gerettet  geroefen  id^  roare  gerettet  geroefen 

Future 

id^  roerbe  gerettet  fein  id^  roerbe  gerettet  fein 

Future  Perfect 

i$  roerbe  gerettet  geroefen  fein       id)  roerbe  gerettet  geroefen  fein 

CONDITIONALS 

Present  Perfect 

id)  roiirbe  gerettet  fein  id)  roiirbe  gerettet  geroefen  fein 


VERBS  77 

266.  Substitutes  for  the  passive.    The  passive  voice  occurs  less 
frequently  in  German  than  in  English.    Some  of  the  most  common 
substitutes  are : 

1.  9Kan,  as  subject  of  an  active  verb. 

9Kcm  fagt,  ba£  er  lugt. 
It  is  said  that  he  lies. 

3Jtan  baut  §aufer  au3  §ol§  unb  (Stein. 
People  build  houses  of  wood  and  stone,  or 
Houses  are  built  of  wood  and  stone. 

2.  A  reflexive  verb  (especially  when  the  agent  is  not  important), 
whose  subject  may  be  the  agent  of  the  action  or  the  agent  may  be 
implied  in  the  whole  sentence. 

3)er  <5d)liiffel  txnrb  fid)  finben. 
The  key  will  be  found. 

5Da£  3j)t  bffnete  fid)  bent  Sieger. 
The  gate  was  opened  to  the  victor. 

3.  Saffen  with  a  reflexive  verb. 

£)a3  iaf$t  fid)  Ieid)t  fagen. 
That  is  easily  said. 

@r  f)at  fid)  nidjt  iiberreben  laffen. 

He  did  not  allow  himself  to  be  persuaded. 

267.  The  modal  auxiliaries.    The  modal  auxiliaries  are  : 

IMPERFECT  SUBJ. 

biirfen  burfte  geburft  to  be  permitted  biirfte 

Ibnnen  lonnte  gelonnt  to  be  able  (can)  lonnte 

ntogen  ntod^te  gemoc^t  to  like  (may)  mbdjte 

muffen  ntu^te  gentu^t  to  be  compelled  (must}  mii^te 

foEen  foHte  gefoHt  to  be  obliged  (shall)  f cute 

rooEen  raollte  geraoEt  to  be  willing  (will)  rooftte 

NOTE.  These  six  verbs  and  the  verb  ttriffen  are  often  called  preterit- 
present  verbs,  since  their  present  tense  has  the  form  of  the  imperfect  of 
strong  verbs  (273). 


78  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

268.  280 Hen  is  the  only  modal  auxiliary  which  has  imperative 
forms :  rooUe,  roodt,  rrjoHen  6te. 

269.  Sonnen  sometimes  means  to  know.  $onnen  @ie  2)eutfcf)? 
Do  you  know  German  ? 

270.  ©often  sometimes  means  to  be  said:  @r  foft  reidj  fein,  he  is 
said  to  be  rich. 

271.  The  present  indicative  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  and  roiffen. 

id)  barf  farm  mag  mu£  foil  roift  trjeif; 

bit  barffi  fannft  magft  muftf  foftft  rrjiftft  roeifct 

er  barf  farm  mag  muj$  foft  roill  roeift 

rmr  burfen  fonnen  mogen  miiffen  foHen  rrjoHen  rrjiffen 

i^r  biirft  fonnt  mogt  miifet  foflt  rooUt  roiffet  (rrji^t) 

fie  biirfen  fonnen  mogen  miiffen  foHen  rooCien  nriffen 

NOTE.   The  principal  parts  of  rotflen  are  rotffen,  WU^te,  geroufjt,  and  the 
imperfect  subjunctive  is  roiijjte. 

272.  The  vowel  in  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative,  except 
in  foUen,  is  different  from  that  of  the  plural,  and  the  tense  sign  1 
is  omitted  in  the  third  person  singular  (267,  note).    The  remaining 
tenses  are  formed  regularly. 

273.  The  modal  auxiliaries  were  originally  strong  verbs,  whose 
imperfect  assumed  a  present  meaning,  and  in  its  place  a  new  weak 
imperfect  was  formed. 

274.  Infinitives  depending  on  the  modal  auxiliaries  omit  the 
preposition  §u.    Infinitives  depending  on  fufylen,  fybren,  lafjen,  and 
fefyen  always,  and  on  bleiben,  fyet^en,  fyelfen,  lefyren,  and  lernen  often 
take  the  same  construction.   The  verb  fpagieren  also  omits  gu  when 
it  depends  on  gefyen,  fasten,  and  tetten. 

@r  ttritt  fommen,  he  wants  to  come. 
28ir  fonnen  Sfynen  fyelfen,  we  can  help  you. 
$d)  fybre  jemanb  tufen,  I  hear  some  one  calling. 
$cf)  gefje  fpagieren,  I  am  taking  a  walk. 


VERBS  79 

275.  The  past  participle  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  occurs  in  its 
old  form,  that  is,  without  the  prefix  ge  and  with  the  ending  en,  if  it 
is  preceded  by  an  infinitive  (203).    §eif$en,  fyelfen,  laffen,  fefyen,  and 
sometimes  fyoren,  lefyren  and  lernen,  take  the  same  form  of  participle 
when  an  infinitive  precedes. 

(Sr  fyatte  bag  33udj  gerooflt,  he  had  wanted  the  book. 

Gr  fyatte  bag  33ud)  fefyen  rooKen,  he  had  wanted  to  see  the  book. 

3$  roerbe  eg  gerooEt  fyaben,  I  shall  have  wanted  to  do  it. 

$dj  roerbe  eg  fyaben  tun  rooHen  (277),  I  shall  have  wanted  to  do  it. 

Qdj  fyabe  i^n  tufen  fyoren,  I  heard  him  calling. 

$<$)  ^abe  fie  tangen  fel)en,  I  saw  her  dance. 

®u  ^atteft  ba  bleiben  follen,  you  should  have  remained  there. 

276.  Saffen  and  fetn,  and  sometimes  bleiben,  fyeifcett,  ^oren,  fe^en, 
and  fiefjen,  are  followed  by  an  active  infinitive  with  passive  meaning. 

@r  Itifct  ein  §aug  bauen: 
He  is  having  a  house  built. 

@3  ift  nid)tg  gu  fefyen. 
There  is  nothing  to  be  seen. 

2Ba§  ift  gu  tun  ? 
What  is  to  be  done  ? 

277.  A  modal  auxiliary  may  take  an  infinitive  as  complement. 
Such  an  infinitive  immediately  precedes  the  modal  auxiliary  in  the 
compound  tenses.   In  the  future  perfect  fyaben  is  removed  from  its 
position  at  the  end  and  is  placed  before  the  complementary  infini- 
tive:  id)  roerbe  gefonnt  fjctben.  but  id)  roerbe  fyaben  fdjlagen  fonnen. 
Notice  the  following  synopsis  in  the  indicative : 

id)  lann  fdjlagen 

id)  lonnte  fdjlagen 

id^  E)abe  fd)lagen  fonnen 

id)  Ejatte  fd^lagen  fbnnen 

id^  roerbe  fd^Iagen  lonnen 

id^  raerbe  fyaben  fd)(agen  lonnen 


80  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

278.  The  forms  id)  farm  gefdjlagen  fyaben  (/  may  have  struck) 
and  id)  lonnte  gefdjlagen  fyaben  (I  might  have  struck)  date  from  an 
earlier  period  of  the  language,  when  the  modal  auxiliaries  did  not 
yet  have  a  past  participle,  and,  instead  of  using  the  perfect  and 
pluperfect  tenses  of  the  modal  auxiliary  with  a  dependent  present 
infinitive  (277),  it  was  necessary  to  add  a  perfect  infinitive  to  the 
present  and  imperfect  of  the  modal  auxiliary.    Compare  the  Eng- 
lish translation  of  these  expressions. 

279.  Impersonal  verbs.    The  impersonal  form  of  verbs  occurs : 

1 .  In  expressions  denoting  the  phenomena  of  nature. 

@§  fd&neit.  @3  blifct.  @3  ift  warm. 

@§  regnet.  @3  fyagelt.  @3  ift  fdjnwl. 

@S  borinert.  @3  friert.  @3  ift  fityl. 

2.  In  expressions  denoting  states  of  body  or  of  mind. 

@3  friert  mid). 
@3  fdjnrinbelt  mir. 

3.  In  expressions  of  time. 

@§  ift  jroolf  U^r. 

4.  In  certain  idioms. 

@3  tut  mir  leib. 
@3  gel)t  mir  gut. 
@3  fe^lt  mir  etnwS. 

5.  In  phrases  with  geben  and  fetn,  as  e§  gibt,  e§  ift. 

6^  gibt  bie3  3a^  ™l  Dbft,  there  is  much  fruit  this  year. 

@3  ift  Dbft  in  bem  Sorbe,  there  is  fruit  in  the  basket. 

@3  gibt  aHerlei  Seute  in  ber  2BeIt,  there  are  all  kinds  of  people  in  the 

world. 
63  finb  gnwngig  <5tubenten  in  biefem  3t8*ttt$*/  there  are  twenty 

students  in  this  room. 

NOTE.    The  impersonal  form  of  geben  is  used  in  broad  general  state- 
ments, while  that  of'fein  is  used  in  speaking  of  specific  persons  and  things. 


VERBS  8 I 

280.  The  subjunctive.  The  indicative  in  general  may  be  regarded 
as  the  mood  of  the  actual,  the  subjunctive  as  the  mood  of  the  ideal 
and  unreal.    The  indicative  deals  with  facts,  .the  subjunctive  with 
what  is  desirable,  possible,  probable,  or  represented  as  a  matter  of 
hearsay.    The  use  of  the  subjunctive,  therefore,  depends  upon  the 
question  of  reality  or  unreality.    It  occurs   in  direct  and  indirect 
discourse,  and  in  both  principal  and  dependent  clauses,  but  its  use 
in  dependent  clauses  is  rare  except  in  indirect  discourse. 

NOTE.    The  subjunctive  may  occur  in  noun,  adjective,  and  adverbial 
clauses. 

281.  The  present  and  imperfect  subjunctive  are  alike  in  tem- 
poral meaning,  both  denoting  present  or  future  time,  except  in 
indirect  discourse,  where  they  are  used  in  place  of  the  present  only 
(never  the  future)  of  direct  discourse  (288).    A  statement  in  the 
present  subjunctive,  however,  is  felt  as  more  probable  than  one  in 
the  imperfect.    The  pluperfect  always  denotes  past  time. 

The  rule,  therefore,  for  tense  in  the  subjunctive,  except  in  in- 
direct discourse,  is : 

1 .  Present  or  future  time  is  expressed  by  either  the  present  or 
the  imperfect. 

2.  Past  time  by  the  pluperfect. 

282.  The  hortatory  subjunctive    supplies    missing   imperative 
forms. 

©efye  er  nad)  §aufe. 
Let  him  go  home. 

©ingen  tmr  ein  Sieb. 
Let  us  sing  a  song. 

@bel  fei  bet  9ftenfrf). 
Let  man  be  noble. 

283.  The  optative  subjunctive  is  used  in  wishes.    The  words 
bod)  and  nut  are  frequently  used  with  the  verb.    Periphrastic  forms 
with  mogen,  lonnen,  and  rootten  are  usually  possible.   Notice  the 
following  subdivisions : 


82  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

1.  The  more  probable  optative  (present). 

®ein  3Retrf)  lomme ! 
May  thy  kingdom  come ! 

Sang  lebe  bet  $onig ! 
Long  live  the  king  ! 

SKoge  er  balb  lomtnen ! 
May  he  soon  come  ! 

2.  The  less  probable  optative  (imperfect). 

Same  er  bod)  fyeute,  morgen,  narfjfte  2Bod(je,  etc.! 

Would  that  he  would  come  to-day,  to-morrow,  next  week,  etc. ! 

©turbe  er  borf) ! 

O  that  he  would  die  ! 

A  wish  may  be  impossible  of  realization. 

Sebte  er  borf)  norf) ! 

Would  that  he  were  still  alive  ! 

3.  The  optative  subjunctive  in  past  time  (pluperfect). 

•ZBtire  er  nur  geftern  gefommen ! 
O  that  he  had  come  yesterday ! 

284.  The  concessive  subjunctive  occurs  in  principal  and  depend- 
ent clauses.  The  concession  made  in  the  dependent  clause  in  no 
way  affects  the  assertion  of  the  principal  clause.  Periphrastic  forms 
with  mogen  or  lonnen  are  often  used. 

i.  The  more  probable  concessive  subjunctive  (present). 

@3  fet  fo,  rote  bu  gefagt  fyaft. 
Let  it  be  as  you  have  said. 

©ei  ber  Serg  aurf)  norf)  fo  fyorf),,  id)  befteige  tfyn  (297). 
•IRbge  ber  Serg  aud^  norf)  fo  l)od^  fein,  td^  befteige  ifyn. 
Let  the  mountain  be  ever  so  high,  I  shall  ascend  it. 

NOTE.  Even  the  indicative  is  possible  here :  3ft  ber  23erg  CMCf)  nod)  fo 
tyorf),  ic^  befteige  i^n,  or  3Jtag  ber  Serj  auc^  nodi)  fo  fjorf)  fein,  id^  befteige  ifjn. 


VERBS  83 

2.  The  less  probable  concessive  subjunctive  (imperfect). 
SBdre  ber  33erg  and)  nod)  fo  fyod),  id)  beftetge  tfyn. 
2Jtbd()te  ber  33erg  audi)  nodi)  fo  fyodf)  fetn,  id)  befteige  ifyn. 
Were  the  mountain  ever  so  high,  I  shall  ascend  it. 

285.  The  potential  subjunctive  denotes  possibility,  and  is  closely 
related  to  the  subjunctive  of  unreality.  Periphrastic  forms  with 
mbgen,  fbnnen,  foflen,  and  bitrfen  are  often  used. 

1 .  In  doubting  inquiries  and  exclamations. 

2Bare  eg  n)of)l  mbglidf)  ?   Would  it  perhaps  be  possible? 
$bnnte  eg  roofyl  tnbglid)  fetn  ?   Could  it  be  possible? 
2Ber  txwj$te  bag  nid)t !    Who  wouldn't  know  that ! 

2.  In  modest  assertions. 

rotire  raohl  moqlidb,^  J 

.  ..  c          r ,  P  .          }•  ^^  miM/  be  possible. 

burfte  roofyl  fetn,     J 

©te  biirften  fid)  getrrt  fyaben,  ^«  w^y  ^^^  tow  mistaken. 

@3  Ite^e  ftd^  nod^  tneleS  bariiber  fagen,  w^r//  w/^/  still  be  said  in 

regard  to  that. 
$d)  bad)te,  bag  nwfjte  bod^  ein  jeber,  I  should  think  everybody  would 

know  that. 

3.  In  unreal  conditions. 

The  potential  subjunctive  in  unreal  conditions  has  two  tenses  — 
the  imperfect,  which  denotes  present  time,  and  the  pluperfect, 
which  denotes  past  time.  In  the  principal  clause  (the  conclusion) 
the  present  and  perfect  conditionals  may  be  used  instead  of  the 
imperfect  and  pluperfect.  This  is  also  possible  in  the  subordinate 
clause  (the  condition),  but  it  occurs  much  less  frequently. 

SBenn  id)  3ett  ptte,  fo  fdjrtebe  td^  ttytn  etnen  33rtef,  or  fo  nwrbe  tdj 

i^m  etnen  93rtef  fd^retben, 
If  I  had  time,  I  should  write  him  a  letter. 

2Benn  id&  3«tt  ge^abt  l)dtte,  fo  ^atte  i^  t^m  einen  Srtef  gefc^rteben, 

or  fo  roiitbe  tdfj  i{)m  etnen  93rtef  gefd^rteben  fyaben. 
If  I  had  had  time,  I  should  have  written  him  a  letter. 


84  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

Occasionally  the  imperfect  indicative  occurs  in  either  clause  of 
unreal  conditions,  thus  making  the  statement  more  real. 

•JRit  biefem  groeiten  $feil  burd()fd)of$  idj  @ud),  roenn  id)  mein  liebeg 

$inb  getroffen  fettle. 
With  this  second  arrow  I  should  have  pierced  your  body  if  I  had  hit 

my  child. 

4.  In  clauses  after  al3  ob  and  al3  roenn.    If  ob  or  roenn  is 
omitted,  the  clause  has  inverted  order. 

6r  fiefyt  au3,  al3  ob  (al£  roenn)  er  Iranf  rodre. 
@r  fiefyt  au3,  al3  nwre  er  fran!. 
He  looks  as  if  he  were  sick. 

5.  In  clauses  after  a  question  or  a  negative. 

The  subjunctive  is  used  in  a  subordinate  clause  after  a  question,  a 
comparative,  the  adverb  gu  plus  an  adjective  or  adverb,  a  negative, 
a  negative  conjunction  (bafc  nicfyt,  ofyne  ba£,  al£  bajs),  or  a  negative 
relative  (bet  ntd^t,  roelcfyer  ni($t).  If,  however,  the  statements  are 
regarded  as  facts,  the  indicative  must  be  used. 

(a)  More  probable  (present). 

2B.O  tft  bet  Sefyerjte,  bet  taud^e  in  biefe  Siefe  nieber  ?  Where  is  the 
courageous  man  who  wotild  dare  to  dive  down  into  these  depths  ? 

9Jid)t3  ift,  bag  bte  ©eraaltigen  l)emme,  there  is  nothing  that  would 
deter  the  mighty. 

$3)  nwnfdje  mdjt3  33effere3,  al§  ba^  e§  Q^nen  rootyl  ge^e,  I  wish  noth- 
ing better  than  that  you  may  fare  well. 

Reiner  ifi,  ber  no$  aufred^t  ftefye,  a(g  id^  gang  aEein,  there  is  no  one 
still  standing  erect  save  me  alone. 

(fr)  Less  probable  (imperfect  and  pluperfect). 

2Bo  ift  ein  Serg  im  gangen  Sanb,  ben  er  nicfyt  beftiege  ?  Where  is  there 
a  mountain  in  the  whole  country  which  he  would  not  ascend  ? 

3$re  33erfbf)nung  ift  §u  plo^lid^,  al^  ba^  fie  bauerfyaft  fein  fonnte, 
your  reconciliation  is  too  sudden  to  be  able  to  last. 


VERBS  -85 

2Bo  tfi  ein  33erg  im  gan§en  Sanb,  ben  er  nidjt  beftiegen  fycitte  ?  Where 
is  there  a  mountain  in  the  whole  country  which  he  has  not  climbed? 

3$re  SSerfbfynung  roar  511  plotjlici),  al3  baj$  fie  fyatte  bauerfyaft  fein 
f  i)ttnen  (296),  your  reconciliation  was  too  sudden  to  be-able  to  last. 

286.  Indirect  discourse.     In  indirect  discourse  the  speaker  or 
writer  reproduces  in  his  own  words  what  has  previously  been  said, 
thought,  or  felt.    If  he  wishes  definitely  to  represent  as  uncertain 
the  statements  which  he  is  reporting,  or  if  he  does  not  wish  to 
assume  any  responsibility  in  regard  to  them,  he  always  uses  the 
subjunctive.    If  he  positively  wishes  to  indorse  what  he  is  report- 
ing, or  to  lend  greater  vividness  and  directness  to  it,  he  uses  the  in- 
dicative.   Accordingly  the  question  of  mood  in  indirect  discourse 
depends  on  the  speaker's  or  writer's  attitude  toward  that  which  he 
is  reporting. 

287.  In  changing  from  direct  to  indirect  discourse  the -present 
and  future  may  remain,  and  the  imperfect,  perfect,  and  pluperfect 
are  put  into  the  perfect.   When  the  present,  the  perfect,  the  future, 
and  the  future  perfect  subjunctive  are  like  the  corresponding  forms 
of  the  indicative  the  imperfect  is  substituted  for  the  present,  the 
pluperfect  for  the  perfect,  the  present  conditional  for  the  future,  and 
the  perfect  conditional  for  the  future  perfect.  The  present  with  future 
meaning  is  generally  changed  to  the  future  in  indirect  discourse. 

288.  The  following  table  of  tenses  may  serve  to  illustrate  the 
rules  given  above  (287)  : 

DIRECT  DISCOURSE  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 

Present  Present  or  Imperfect 

Imperfect  "1 

,  f  Perfect  or 

Perfect        \ 

,  I  Pluperfect 

Pluperfect  J 

f  Future  or 
Future  \  _ 

I  Present  Conditional 

f  Future  Perfect  or 
Future  Perfect  \  ^    . 

I  Perfect  Conditional 


86 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


289.  The  more  common  changes  from  direct  to  indirect 
course  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  sentences  : 


DIRECT 

3d)  bin  Irani. 
/  am  sick. 

$d)  roar  Irani.  " 

3>d)  bin  Irani  geroefen. 
%tf)  roar  Irani  geroefen. 
/  was  sick. 

SDer  Sefyrer  roirb  nid)t 

men. 
The  teacher  will  not  come. 

@ie  roe^ben  lommen. 
They  will  come. 

3ft  e3  roa^r? 
Is  it  true  ? 


fyaben  @ie  getan  ? 
What  did  you  do  ? 

6r  roar  frufyer  Sefyrer. 


INDIRECT 

@r  fagt  (fagte),  bafc  er  Irani  feu 
He  says  (said)  that  he  is  (was)  sick. 

Gr  fagt  (fagte),  baf;  er  Irani  geroefen  fei. 

He  says  (said)  that  he  has  (had)  been  sick. 

®er  ©filler  fjofft  (fyoffte),  ba£  ber  Sefyrer 

nidjt  lommen  roerbe. 
The  pupil  hopes  (hoped]  that  the  teacher 

will  (would)  not  come. 

6r  meint  (meinte),  bafe  fie  lommen  roiir- 

ben  (not  roerben). 
He  thinks  (thought)  that  they  will  (would) 

come. 

@r  fragt  (fragte),  ob  e3  roa^r  fei. 

He  asks  (asked)  whether  it  is  (was)  true. 

(Sr  fragt  (fragte),  roa§  id)  getan  ^atte. 
He  asks  (asked)  what  I  have  (had)  done. 

9Jf  an  fagt  (fagte),  baft  erfrii^er2el)rer  roar. 


He  was  formerly  a  teacher.    They  say  (said)  he  used  to  be  a  teacher. 

2Bir  lommen  au3  Sfyuringen.  @ie  fagten,  ba^  fie  au£  X^itringen  lamen. 
We  come  from  Thuringia.      They  said  that  they  came  from  Thuringia. 

NOTE.    Statements  .of  certainty  may  be  followed  by  either  the  subjunc- 
tive or  the  indicative. 

®r  rouf$te,  ba£  id)  Irani  roar,  he  knew  that  I  was  sick. 
6r  rou^te,  baf$  fie  nic^t  lommen  roerbe,  he  knew  that  she  would  not  come. 
$d)  roar  geroi^,  bafs  er  unrest  ^atte,  I  was  certain  that  he  was  wrong. 
Gr  beroie3,  ba^  er  unfd^ulbig  fei,  he  proved  that  he  was  innocent. 


ORDER  OF  WORDS  8/ 

ORDER  OF  WORDS 

290.  The  position  of  words  in  a  German  sentence  is  largely 
determined  by  emphasis.    The  most  important  position  is  the  be- 
ginning of  the  sentence,  the  next  important  the  end,  and  the  least 
important  the  middle  of  the  sentence.    Euphony  and  logical  im- 
portance are  also  taken  into  consideration.    A  general  impression 
as  to  the  arrangement  of  words  may  be  gained  from  the  following 
scheme : 

1.  Subject  7.  Predicate  adjective  or  noun 

2.  Inflected  part  of  verb  8.  Negative 

3.  Pronoun  object  9.  Separable  prefix 

4.  Adverb  of  time  10.  Past  participle 

5.  Noun  object  n.  Infinitive 

6.  Other  adverbs 

291.  The  position  of  the  inflected  part  of  the  verb  is  not  deter- 
mined by  emphasis  or  logical  importance.    According  as  it  stands 
after  the  subject,  before  the  subject,  or  at  the  end  of  a  clause,  three 
fixed  types  of  order  —  the  normal,  the  inverted,  and  the  transposed 
—  are  distinguished. 

292.  The  normal  order,  in  which  the  inflected  part  of  the  verb 
follows  the  subject,  occurs : 

1.  In  independent  declarative  clauses,  unless  some  element  other 
than  the  subject  begins  the  clause. 

2.  In  independent  interrogative  sentences  whose  subject  is  an 
interrogative   pronoun  or  a  noun   modified  by  an   interrogative 
adjective. 

$inb  fyat  eine  9tofe,  the  child  has  a  rose. 

$inb  fyat  mir  je£t  feine  9Rofe  gegeben,  the  child  has  now  given 

me  its  rose. 

2Ber  fyat  bie  3Rofe  gdjabt  ?    Who  had  the  rose  ? 
SBeldjer  3lpfel  ift  bet  grbfcte  ?    Which  apple  is  the  largest! 
2Btr  tDerben  ifyn  begleiten,  we  shall  accompany  him. 


88  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

293.  The  inverted  order,  in  which  the  inflected  part  of  the  verb 
precedes  the  subject,  occurs: 

1.  In  independent  declarative  clauses  beginning  with  some  ele- 
ment other  than  the  subject. 

2.  In  independent  interrogative  sentences  beginning  with  some 
element  other  than  the  subject. 

3.  In  imperative  sentences. 

4.  In  principal  clauses,  for  emphasis,  in  connection  with  bod). 

5.  In  sentences  in  which  a  participle  or  an  infinitive  is  put  first 
for  the  sake  of  emphasis. 

©eftern  lam  $ri|  §u  fpat,  yesterday  Fred  was  tardy. 

•JRorgen  roerben  roir  nadl)  §aufe  gefyen,  to-morrow  we  shall  go  home. 

2Bem  gefyort  biefe  $eber  ?    To  whom  does  this  pen  belong •? 

2Beld)en  2lpfe(  rooflen  @ie?    Which  apple  do  you  wish  ? 

$m  3U™  fwfc  bit  Xage  am  langften,  in  June  the  days  are  the  longest. 

§aben  6ie  fid)  gefiird)tet?    Were  you  afraid? 

Sen  9ftann  fenne  id)  nidjt,  that  man  I  do  not  know. 

ruir  an  f  am  en,  roar  e3  fdf)on  ^ag,  when  we  arrived  it  was  day. 
3,  bente  id),  ift  meine  $flidf)t,  that,  I  think,  is  my  duty. 
,,golge  mir",  fagte  er,  "follow  me"  said  he. 
3ft  bet  Snabe  fleij$ig  ?    Is  the  boy  industrious  ? 
©eben  @ie  mir  bag  S3ud),  bitte,  give  me  the  book,  please. 
©efyen  rair  nad)  §aufe,  let  us  go  home. 
§ab  id)  ben  SJJarlt  unb  bie  ©tra^en  bod^  nie  fo  einfam  gefefyen  !  Why, 

I  never  saw  the  market  and  the  streets  so  deserted ! 
©eflofyen  roar  allcS,  all  had  fled. 

©rmorben  lafjen  fann  er  mic^,  nid^t  rid^ten,  he  may  have  me  murdered, 
but  he  cannot  judge  me. 

294.  In  the  transposed  order  the  inflected  part  of  the  verb  stands 
at  the  end  of  the  clause.    This  is  also  called  the  dependent  order, 
since  it  occurs  only  in  dependent  clauses : 

ift  ber  3Jknn,  ber  geftern  fyier  roar,  that  is  the  man  who  was 
here  yesterday. 


ORDER  OF  WORDS  89 

3$  fyabe  ba3  $ud(),  ba3  idfj  Berloren  fyatte,  I  have  the  book  which  I 

had  lost. 

3>d)  roetjs,  baf$  er  nidf)t  lontmen  roirb,  I  know  that  he  will  not  come. 
2)er  Sebtente  fagte,  baj$  fein  §err  je£t  nidf)t  gu  §aufe  fei,  M<?  servant 

said  that  his  master  was  not  at  home  now. 
9Zad)bem  id)  ben  Srief  gefdfjrieben  fyatte,  bin  idf)  fpajteren  gegangen, 

after  I  had  written  the  letter  I  took  a  walk. 
SSer  roeifj,  nw3  bie  3u^unf^  un^  bringen  rairb  ^    Who  knows  what 

the  future  has  in  store  for  us  ? 
©r^tifyle  mir,  raa§  gefcfyefyen  ift,  tell  me  what  has  happened. 

295.  The  conjunctions  baj$  and  roenn  are  sometimes  omitted.    If 
baj$  is  dropped,  the  order  is  normal,  or,  if  some  word  other  than 
the  subject  introduces  the  subordinate  clause,  inverted.    If  roenn 
is  omitted,  the  order  is  inverted. 

$d)  tt>eij$,  er  rturb  nirf)t  fommen. 
I  know  he  will  not  come. 

3)er  Sebtente  fagte,  je£t  fei  fein  §err  nid^t  ju  §aufe. 
The  servant  said  his  master  was  not  at  home  now. 

2Bdren  €>ie  gefiern  gefommen,  fo  fatten  @te  un§  §u  §aufe  getroffen. 
If  you  had  come  yesterday,  you  would  have  found  us  at  home. 

NOTE.    See  294,  third  and  fourth  sentences,  and  181. 

296.  A  dependent  clause  containing  an  infinitive  followed  by 
another  infinitive  or  by  the  old  form  of  the  past  participle  (275)  has 
the  normal  order.    In  the  future  perfect  not  only  the  inflected  form 
of  roerben  is  removed  from  the  end  of  the  clause  but  also  the 
infinitive  fyaben. 

3d)  roetft,  ba£  tdf)  e3  nid^t  roerbe  tun  lonnen^ 
I  know  that  I  shall  not  be  able  to  do  it. 

(£r  tnetnte,  ba£  tdf)  e3  ntd^t  fyabe  tun  tonnen. 
He  thought  that  I  could  not  have  done  it. 

%tf)  glaube,  ba£  er  bt§  jetjt  bie  (Sd^ulb  rairb  l)aben  be^afylen  muffen. 
I  believe  that  by  this  time  he  will  have  been  obliged  to  pay  the  debt. 


90  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

297.  In  concessive  clauses  the  order  may  be  either  inverteu  or 
normal ;    but  if  a   conjunction,  relative  pronoun,  or  conjunctive 
adverb  is  expressed,  the  transposed  order  occurs.    The  principal 
clause  may  take  either  the  normal  or  the  inverted  order. 

6ei  ber  93erg  aud()  nod)  fo  fyodfj,     "i 

®er  33erg  fei  audf)  nod)  fo  fyod),       Ud)beftetgetl)n,orbeftetgetd)t£)n. 

SBenn  ber  33erg  aud)  nod)  f  o  fyod)  fet,  J 

Though  the  mountain  be  ever  so  high,  I  shall  ascend  it. 

SBo  ber  33erg  audf)  liege,  i$  befteige  ifyn,  or  befteige  id)  ifyn. 
Wherever  the  mountain  may  be  situated,  I  shall  ascend  it. 

2Beid)e  3Sorurtei(e  man  audfj  gegen  tfyn  Ijege,  rairb  er  bodj  fein  3^^ 

erreid^en. 
Whatever  prejudices  people  may  foster  against  him,  nevertheless  he 

will  accomplish  his  purpose. 

298.  The  conjunctions  unb,  aber,  allein,  fonbern,  benn,  and  ober 
do  not  affect  the  order. 

299.  A  relative  pronoun  is  generally  not  separated  from  its 
antecedent. 

300.  The  indirect  object  usually  precedes  the  direct  object  if 
both  are  nouns,  unless  the  former  is  modified  by  a  relative  clause 
or  it  is  desired  to  emphasize  the  latter. 

3d)  gab  bem  Sefyrer  ba£  33ud(j. 

I  gave  the  teacher  the  book. 

3>dj  gab  bag  Sudf)  bem  Setter,  ber  in  biefem  Banter  roar. 

I  gave  the  book  to  the  teacher  who  was  in  this  room. 

301.  If  both  objects  are  personal  pronouns,  the  direct  object 
generally  precedes  the  indirect.    The  datives  mir  and  bir  are  often 
followed  by  e§ :  mir'3,  bir'3. 

@ic  fyat  eine  5tofe.   $<$  fyabe  fie  tfyr  gegeben. 
She  has  a  rose.    I  gave  it  to  her, 
Sie  twrb  fie  ^fynen  geben. 
She  will  give  it  to  you. 


ORDER  OF  WORDS  91 

302.  An  indirect  pronoun  object  precedes  a  direct  noun  object. 

3d)  fyabe  ifyr  bie  ^Rofe  gegeben. 
I  gave  her  the  rose. 

303.  Adverbs  do  not  stand  between  the  subject  and  the  personal 
verb  in  principal  clauses.   Exceptions  :  alfo,  inbefjen,  namlid:),  groat. 

@r  fpricfyt  oft  t)on  $fynen. 
He  often  speaks  of  you. 

(Sie  fingt  nie. 
She  never  sings. 

£)er  33rief  alfo  ift  nidjt  angefommen. 
So  the  letter  was  not  received. 

304.  Separable  prefixes  stand  at  the  end  of  the  clause. 

@r  ftefyt  jeben  5Korgen  urn  fiinf  UE)r  auf. 
He  gets  up  every  morning  at  five  o'clock. 

305.  If  there  are  several  adverbs  in  a  sentence,  the  order  usually 
is  time,  place,  manner,  cause,  purpose. 

(£r  ift  fyeute  fjter. 
He  is  here  to-day. 

@r  ift  geftern  fd)nell  nadj  §aufe  gelommen. 
He  hurried  home  yesterday. 

306.  Adverbial  phrases  follow  simple  adverbs. 

Ste  fyatte  ftdj  t>orn  in  ben  Safyn  gefe^t. 

She  had  seated  herself  in  the  front  of  the  boat. 

307.  Adverbs  of  time  precede  the  direct  object  when  it  is  a  noun, 
and  follow  it  when  it  is  a  pronoun. 

•JBir  fyaben  fyeute  eine  lange  3lufgabe. 
We  have  a  long  lesson  to-day. 

©r  fyat  mid)  fyeute  befud^t. 
He  called  on  me  to-day. 


92  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

308.  The  negative  nid)t  stands  after  a  direct  object.   It  precedes 
predicate  adjectives,  participles,  and  infinitives.    Other  positions  are 
determined  by  meaning. 

$d)  fenne  ben  SUlann  nidljt. 

/  do  not  know  the  man. 

(£r  ift  nicfyt  Irani. 

He  is  not  sick. 

@ie  ift  nicfyt  gefommen. 

She  did  not  come. 

309.  Present  and  perfect  infinitives,  perfect  participles,  and  sep- 
arable prefixes  (251)  stand  at  the  end  of  the  clause. 

@ie  roirb  ein  beutfdfjeS  Sieb  fingen,  she  will  sing  a  German  song. 
<5ie  Ttnrb  ein  beutfcfyeg  2ieb  gefungen  fyaben,  she  will  have  sung  a 

German  song. 

©ie  fyat  ein  beutfcfyeS  Sieb  gefungen,  she  has  sung  a  German  song. 
§aite.fie  ein  beittfdjeS  Sieb  gefungen  ?  Had  she  sung  a  German  song? 
(§r  marf)t  bie  Xiir  auf ,  he  is  opening  the  door. 

NOTE.    In  a  dependent  clause  the  separable  prefix  and  the  present  or 
imperfect  of  the  verb  meet  and  are  joined. 

3<i)  bacfjte,  bafj  er  bie  Xiir  aufmatf)te. 
I  thought  he  was  opening  the  door. 

310.  The  infinitive  with  gu  is  preceded  by  all  of  its  modifiers. 
If  unmodified,  it  may  be  included  within  the  clause  of  which  it 
forms  an  adjunct,  but  usually  it  follows.    When  modified  it  regu- 
larly stands  outside  of  the  clause. 

Siefe  Slufgabe  lernen  ju  miiffen,  mad)t  mir  leine  $reube,  to  be  obliged 
to  learn  this  lesson  does  not  make  me  feel  happy. 

@ie  fjat  fid)  entfdjloffen,  ein  beutfcfyeS  Sieb  §u  fingen,  she  has  decided 
to  sing  a  German  song. 

<5ie  fing  an  gu  fingen,  or  @ie  fing  511  fingen  an,  she  began  to  sing. 

@r  l)at  mir  etroa^  §u  iun  gegeben,  he  gave  me  something  to  do. 

(Sr  ift  an  mir  t)orbeigegangen,  o^ne  mid^  gefefyen  §u  Fjaben,  he  passed 
by  me  without  having  seen  me. 


VOWEL  GRADATION  93 

VOWEL  GRADATION 

311.  Strong  verbs  have  vowel  change  in  their  principal  parts. 
The  vowel  of  the  imperfect  stem  is  never  like  that  of  the  infinitive. 
The  vowel  of  the  past  participle  may  be  like  that  of  the  infinitive 
or  of  the  imperfect  stem,  or  it  may  be  different  from  either.    This 
change  of  vowel  in  the  principal  parts  is  called  vowel  gradation. 

312.  CLASS  I.    i.  Gradation  ei —  i  —  i. 

beifsen,  bifc,  gebifjen 
reiten,  ritt,  geritten 

Membership :  All  strong  verbs  with  ei  plus  d),  f,  £,  and  t,  and 
leiben  and  fcfyneiben.    Exception  :  fyeif$en. 
2.  Gradation  ei  —  ie  —  ie. 

bleiben,  blieb,  geblieben 

Membership :  All  strong  verbs  with  ei  except  those  belonging  to 
Class  I,  i  and  fyeiften. 

313.  CLASS  II.    Gradation  ie  —  o  —  o. 

fliegen,  flog,  geflogen 
fltefcen,  flojj,  geflo|en 

Membership :  All  strong  verbs  with  ie  (except  liegen),  besides  a 
few  that  do  not  have  ie  in  the  infinitive  and  which  are  given  in 
the  following  list.  The  o  is  short  in  the  imperfect  and  past  parti- 
ciple when  it  is  followed  by  two  or  more  consonants  (6),  otherwise 
it  is  long. 


beroegen 

brefdjen 

fd)mel§en 

fdjaKen 

gciren 

liiren 

fyeben 

fedjten 

fd)tx>eflett 

jaufen 

fd(jtt)tiren 

liigen 

pflegen 

flecfyten 

glimmen 

faugen 

tt)dgen 

iriigen 

fd^eren 

ntelten 

flimmen 

fd^nauben 

Iofd)en 

roeben 

quetten 

fd^rauben 

f(|n)oren 

SLugenb  befteljt. 
3eber  ift  feine^  ©liicfeS  ©d^mieb. 


94  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

314.  CLASS  III.    i.  Gradation  i  —  a  —  u. 

binben,  banb,  gebunben 

Membership :  All  strong  verbs  with  i  plus  nb,  ng,  and  nl. 

2 .  Gradation  i  —  a  —  o . 

begtnnen,  begann,  begonnen 

Membership:  The  following  verbs  with  i  plus  nn,  and  fdfyrotmnten : 
begtnnen,  getmnnen,  rinnen,  finnen,  fptnnen. 

3.  Gradation  e  —  a  —  o. 

fyelfen,  fyalf,  gefyolfen 

Membership:  bergen,  berften,  gelten,  fyelfen,  fdjelten,  fterben,  t)er* 
berben,  roerben,  roerfen. 

315.  CLASS  IV.    Gradation  e  —  a  —  o. 

fpredfjen,  fpracfy,  gefprocfyen 

Membership:  befefylen,  bredfjen,  empfetylen,  nefymen,  fd^redten,  jpre- 
d^en,  fted^en,  ftefylen,  treffen,  treten. 

316.  CLASS  V.    Gradation  e  —  a  —  e. 

fel)en,  faf),  gefe^en 

Membership :  All  strong  verbs  with  e  except  those  belonging  to 
Class  III,  3  and  to  Class  IV.  The  verbs  bitten,  bat,  gebeten ;  Itegen, 
lag,  gelegen ;  and  fi|en,  faj$,  gefeffen,  also  belong  here. 

317.  CLASS  VI.    Gradation  a  —  u  —  a. 

fasten,  fufyr,  gefafyren 

Membership :  badten,  fasten,  graben,  laben,  fd^aff en,  frf)Iagen,  tragen, 
wad^fen,  raafd^en,  and  ftefyen,  ftanb,  geftanben. 

318.  CLASS  VII.    Gradation  a  —  te  —  a. 

fyalten,  Ijielt,  ge^alten 

Membership:  blafen,  braten,  fatten,  Ejalten,  lafjen,  raten,  fd)lafen, 
and  l)auen,  ^ieb,  gefyauen;  laufen,  lief,  gelaufen;  rufen,  tief,  gerufen; 
^ei^en,  ^ie^,  ge^ei^en ;  ftofcen,  ftie^,  gefio^en ;  fangen,  fing,  gefangen ; 
^angen,  tying,  getyangen ;  and  getyen,  ging,  gegangen. 


LIST  OF  STRONG  VERBS 


LIST  OF  STRONG  VERBS 


95 


319.  The  following  list  of  strong  verbs  is  meant  to  contain  those 
which  are  regularly  strong,  and  also  such  as  have  weak  forms.  The 
imperfect  subjunctive,  when  irregular,  is  given  below  the  imperfect 
indicative.  A  number  of  strong  verbs  are  omitted  in  this  list,  but 
they  may  be  found  under  320. 

NOTE.    For  the  vowel  of  the  present  indicative  see  232-236. 


befefylen 

befall 

befo^Ien 

command 

before 

fidj  befleifjen 

beflifc  fu$ 

ftdj  beflifjen 

apply  one's  self 

beginnen 

begann 

begonnen 

begin 

begimne 

beifsen 

bife 

gebiffen 

bite 

bergen 

barg 

geborgen 

hide 

biirge  or  barge 

berften  x 

barft 

geborften 

burst 

betriigen 

betrog 

betrogen 

cheat 

biegen 

bog 

gebogen 

bend 

bieten 

bot 

geboten 

offer 

btnben 

banb 

gebunben 

bind 

bitten 

bat 

gebeten 

ask 

blafen 

blie§ 

geblafen 

blow 

bletben 

blieb 

geblieben 

remain 

braten  2 

bratete  (briet) 

gebraten 

roast 

bred)en 

brad) 

gebrod^en 

break 

bingen  8 

(bang) 

gebungen 

hire 

brefdjen 

brof^  (brafd^) 

gebrofdjen 

thresh 

brtngen 

brang 

gebrungen 

press 

empfefylen 

empfafyl 

empfo^Ien 

recommend 

empfbt)le 

erlbfcfyen 

etlofd^ 

erlofdjen 

go  out  (of  a  light 

1  Sometimes  weak.        2  Present  sometimes  weak.        8  Generally  weak. 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


erfdjreden 

erfd^raf 

erjd^rodten 

be  afraid 

efjen 

^ 

gegefjen 

eat 

fasten 

fu^r 

gefa^ren 

go,  drive 

fallen 

fiel 

gefallen 

fall 

fangen 

ffo§ 

gefangen 

catch 

f  ed)ten  l 

fod|t 

gefod^ten 

fight 

finben 

fanb 

gefunben 

find 

fled&ten  * 

Pod|t 

geflodfjten 

braid 

*-  _    —  ik 

fliegen 

flog 

geflogen 

fly 

flieljen 

fto| 

geflo^en 

flee 

fliefsen 

W 

geflofjen 

fiow 

freffen 

fra^ 

gefrefjen 

devour 

frieren 

fror 

gefroren 

freeze 

gebaren  2 

gebar 

geboren 

bear 

geben 

gab 

gegeben 

give 

gebetfyen 

gebieJ) 

gebieE)en 

thrive 

gefjen 

9^9 

gegangen 

go 

gelmgen 

gelang 

gelungen 

succeed 

geiten 

gait 

gegolten 

be  worth 

golte 

genefen 

genaS 

genefen 

recover 

genie^en 

geno^ 

genoffen 

enjoy 

gefcfyefjen 

gefd^a^ 

gefdje^en 

happen 

getDtnnen 

geroann 

geroonnen 

win 

gerobnne 

giefeen 

90^ 

gegoflen 

pour 

gleid^en 

glid^ 

gegli($en 

be  like 

gleiten  l 

glitt 

geglitten 

glide 

glimmen  l 

glomm 

geglommen 

glimmer 

graben 

grub 

gegraben 

dig 

gteifen 

8«ff 

gegriffen 

seize 

Ijalten 

E)ielt 

geJ)aIten 

hold 

1  Sometimes  weak. 

2  3$  gefctire,  bu  geMerft  (gebcirft),  fie  gebiert  (gebcirt). 


LIST  OF  STRONG  VERBS 


97 


^hauen 

l)ieb 

ge^auen 

hew 

VT^eben 

^ob 

gefyoben 

raise 

Ijeiften 

l)ie^ 

gel)ei^en 

be  called 

fjelfen 

^alf 

ge^olfen 

help 

Jiefen  *  | 
^liiren   J 

lor 

geloren 

choose 

f  limtnen  l 

llomm 

gellommen 

climb 

Ilingen  l 

Hang 

gellungen 

sound 

Ineifen 

Iniff 

gelniffen 

pinch 

lommen 

lam 

gelommen 

come 

Ireifd^en  l 

(Irifrf)) 

gelrifd^en 

scream 

v'friecljen 

Irod^ 

gelrod^en 

creep 

laben  2 

lub 

gelaben 

load,  invite 

lafjen 

lie^ 

gelaffen 

let 

laufen  8 

lief 

gelaufen 

run 

leiben 

litt 

gelitten 

suffer 

leifyen 

lid) 

geliefjen 

lend 

lefen 

Ia§ 

gelefen 

read 

liegen 

lag 

gelegen 

lie 

Ibfdjen1'4 

loft 

gelofd^en 

(go  out,  put  out, 
\  quench  (thirst) 

liigen 

log 

gelogen 

lie 

.  mafylen  5 

ma^lte 

gema^len 

grind 

meiben 

ntieb 

gemieben 

shun 

mellen  l 

moll 

gemollen 

milk 

meffen 

ma£ 

gemefjen 

measure 

mij^lingen 

mi^lang 

mi^lungen 

fail 

nefymen 

na^m 

genommen 

take 

pfeifen 

Pfiff 

gepfiffen 

whistle 

preifen  l 

prie§ 

gepriefen 

praise 

raten 

riet 

geraten 

advise 

teiben 

rieb 

gerieben 

rub 

1  Sometimes 

weak.           2 

Sometimes  weak  in  present, 

3  See  233. 

4  bu  lifd^eft,  er  lifd&t.       6 

Now  always  weak  except  in 

participle. 

98 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


reifcen 

ti^ 

gerifjen 

tear 

tetien 

ritt 

gerttten 

ride 

tied^en 

rod^ 

gerod^en 

smell 

ringen 

tang 

gerungen 

wrestle 

tinnen 

tann 

geronnen 

run 

tufen 

rtef 

gerufen 

call 

jalgen  l 

fatye 

gefalgen 

salt 

faufen2'5 

foff 

gefoffen 

drink 

faugen 

fog 

gefogen 

suck 

jdjallen8 

(f^oB) 

(gefd^oUen) 

sound 

fdfyeiben 

j^ieb 

gefc^ieben 

part 

jcfyetnen 

fd&ten 

gefd^ienen 

shine 

fcfyelten 

Walt 

gefd^olten 

scold 

polite  ornate 

fcfyieben 

fd)ob 

gefd^oben 

shove 

fcfyiefcen 

fd^o| 

gefdjofjen 

shoot 

fdfjinben 

fdfjanb 

gefd^unben 

flay 

fdfylafen 

fd^Iief 

gefd)lafen 

sleep 

fdf)lagen 

Wlug 

gefd^lagen 

strike 

^letd^en 

f  Cult  CD 

gefd^Iid)en 

creep 

fcpefcen 

fdnlo  B 

gef^Iofjen 

shut 

jd^lingen 

Wang 

gefd^Iungen 

sling 

fd^mei^en 

frf)mtj$ 

gefd^miffen 

dash 

fdfjnauben  4 

fd^nob 

gefdjnoben 

snort 

jdfjneiben 

fd^nitt 

gefd^nttten 

cut 

jd^tauben  4 

fd^rob 

gefcfyroben 

screw 

fd^reiben 

fcfyrieb 

gefd^rieben 

write 

fd^reien 

jd^rie 

gefd)tten 

cry 

fcfyretten 

f^rttt 

gefd^ritten 

stride 

fdjroten  l 

fd^rotete 

gefd^roten 

grind 

fd)tt)dren 

fd^roor  (fcfyrtwr) 

gefdfyrooren 

fester 

1  Now  always  weak  except  in  participle.  2  Sometimes  weak  in  present. 
8  Present  now  always  weak,  and  other  forms  generally  weak.  4  Usually 
weak.  &  See  233. 


fdjtDetgen 
fdfjnnmmen 

fcfyttnnben 

fcfyromgen 

fdfjrooren 

fe&en 

fein 

fieben 1 

fingen 

finlen 

finnen 

fi^en 

fpalten2 

fpeien  8 

fpinnen 

fpredjen 

fprtefjen 

jpringen 

ftedjen 

ftecf  en l 

ftefyen 

[tel)Ien 

fteigen 

fterben 

ftteben 

fttnfen 

fio^en4 

ftreid)en 

ftteiten 

tragen 

treffen 


fd^roamm 

fdjroomme 

fd)tDanb 


LIST  OF  STRONG  VERBS  99 

gefd)ttnegen  be  silent 

gefd)tt>ommen  swim 

gefd^rounben  vanish 

gejd^tDungen  swing 

gefd^rt)oren  swear 

gefefyen  see 

geroefen  be 

gefotten  boil 

gefungen  sing 

gefunlen  sink 

gefonnen  think 

gefefjen  sit 

gefp  alien  split 

gefpien  spit 

gefponnen  spin 

gefprocfyen  speak 

gefprofjen  sprout 

gefprungen  '  spring 

gefiodjen  prick 

(geftodten)  stick 

gefianben  stand 

gefio^len  steal 

gefttegen  climb 

gefiorben  die 

geftoben  scatter 

geftunfen  stink 

geftoben  push 

geftrtdjen  stroke 

geftritten  contejid 

getragen  carry 

getroffen  hit 

Some- 


fd^raur 

fa| 

roar 

(fott) 

fang 

fanl 

fann 

fa* 

fpaltete 

jpie 

fpann 


fprofe 

fprang 

[tad) 

ftaf 

ftanb 


ftteg 
ftarb 
ftob 
ftan! 


ftrtc^ 
ftritt 
trug 
traf 


1  Usually  weak.         2  Now  always  weak  except  in  participle, 
times  weak.        4  See  233. 


IOO 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


tretben 

trieb 

getrieben 

drive 

treten 

ttat 

getreten 

tread 

triefen  l 

(troff) 

getroffen 

drip 

trinlen 

tranf 

getrunlen 

drink 

trugen 

trog 

getrogen 

deceive 

tun 

tat 

getan 

do 

nerberben 

Derbarb 

t)erborben 

spoil 

t>erburbe 

nerbrtejsen 

t>erbro^ 

t>erbrofjen 

vex 

nergeffen 

Derga^ 

t)ergefjen 

forget 

t>erlieren 

Derlor 

t)erloren 

lose 

raad)fen 

rauc^S 

geraad^fen 

grow 

raagen2 

n>og 

geraogen 

f  weigh  (with 
\  the  mind} 

raafd)en 

raufd^ 

geraafd^en 

wash 

raeben1 

raob 

geraoben 

weave 

raeidjen 

nridf) 

geraidfjen 

yield 

raeifen 

rates 

geraiefen 

show 

raerben 

raarb 

geraorben 

sue 

raerben 

raurbe  (raarb) 

geraorben 

become 

raerfen 

raarf 

geraorfen 

throw 

nriegen3 

raog 

geraogen 

weigh 

nrinben 

raanb 

geraunben 

wind 

gei^en 

gie^ 

ge^te^en 

accuse 

gieljen 

gog 

ge^ogen 

draw 

graingen 

graang 

ge§tpungen 

force 

(Exprtcfyrobrter.  §unget  ift  ber  befte 

SReben  ift  ©ilber,  ©d^raeigen  ift  ©olb. 
S3er  anbern  eine  ©rube  grabt,  fatlt  felbft 
2^ue  5ted()t  unb  fd)eue  ntemanb. 
2Ber  ©ott  t)ertraut,  ^at  tt)ol)l  gebaut. 


1  Usually  weak.     2  SBagen  is  transitive  and  is  used  figuratively  ;  nriegett 
is  both  transitive  and  intransitive,  and  has  a  literal  meaning.     3  "See 


LIST  OF  STRONG  VERBS 

DIFFERENTIATION  OF  CERTAIN  VERBS 
320.  List  I. 


101 


badfen 

barfte  (buf) 

gebadten 

bake 

bacfen 

badtie 

gebadtt 

stick\  take. 

erbletdfjen 

erbltd^ 

erbltd^en 

die'  '    ; 

erbletdfjen 

erbletd^te 

erblei($t 

tur,i  pale 

erfrfjrecfen 

erfd^raf 

erfdjrorfen 

be  terrified 

erfdjjredEen 

erfdjredfte 

erfd^rerft 

terrify 

gdren 

gor 

gegoren  (lit.) 

ferment 

gdren 

gdrte 

gegdrt  (fig.) 

ferment 

fyangen  "1 
pngen  / 

^ing 

gefjangen  (intr.)1 

hang 

fjdngen 

^dngte  (E)ing) 

gef)dngt  (geljangen)  hang 

(trans.) 

pflegen 

pfbg  (pflag) 

gepflogen 

carry  on,  manage 

pflegen 

pflegie 

gepflegt 

nurse,  be  accustomed 

f($affen2 

fd^uf 

gefd^affen 

create,  produce 

fdjaffen 

Wafftc 

gefcfjafft 

remove,  work,  procure 

fdfjeren 

fc^or 

gefd^oren 

shear 

fcfjeren  3 

fd>erte 

gefdjert 

r  concern,  bother  (impv. 
i     ^  off} 

fdfyletfen 

»Bff 

gef^liffen 

grind 

fdjleifen 

f^Ieifte 

gef^Ieift 

drag 

fdfjtnel^en  3 

Wmolj4 

gefdfjmolgen  (intr.) 

melt 

fd^mel§en 

fd^melgte 

gefd^mel^t  (trans.) 

melt 

fd)tt)eEen 

fd^n)oQ 

gefd^raoEen  (intr.) 

swell 

fdf)tt)eEen 

fd^rueEte 

gejrf)tt)eEt  (trans.) 

swell 

t)ern)irren 

t)errairrte 

Derraorren 

be  confused 

flerroirren 

Dertwrrte 

t)ern)irrt  (trans.) 

confuse 

radgen  5 

raog 

geroogen 

weigh  (with  the  mind] 

rategen5 

raog 

geraogen 

weigh 

raiegen 

raiegte 

gerategt 

rock 

1  Sometimes  also  transitive 

.    2  See  233.    3  Present  both  strong  and  weak. 

4  Sometimes 

transitive.         5  See  p.  100,  note  2. 

102              HAN] 

DBOOK  ( 

321.  List  II. 

beten 

betete 

bieten 

bot 

bitten 

\  bat 

bredjen 

brad) 

brings 

.    btad^te 

banfen 

banfte 

benlen 

bad^te 

fliegen 

flog 

fliefyen 

w 

genefen 

genag 

geniejjen 

aenoR 

fyauen 

nieb 

fyeben 

l)ob 

fennen 

fannte 

fonnen 

lonnte 

ieiben 

litt 

leiten 

leitete 

legen 

legte 

liegen 

lag 

lugen 

log 

madden 

madfjte 

mogen 

ntodfjte 

fe^en 

fc^tc 

gebetet 

geboten 

gebeten 

gebrod^en 

gebrad^t 

gebanlt 


geflogen 

gcflo^cn 

genefen 

genofjen 

ge^auen 

ge^oben 

gelannt 

gefonnt 

gelitten 

geleitet 

gelegt 

gelegen 

gelogen 

gemad^t 

gemod^t 

gefe^t 

gefefjen 

genwdfjfen 

geraafd^en 


pray 

offer 
ask 

break 
bring 
thank 
think 

fly 

flee 

recover 

enjoy 

hew 

raise 

know 

be  able 

suffer 

lead 

lay 

lie 

lie 

make 

like,  may 

place,  set 

sit 

grow 

wash 


SRedjjt  unb  Siebe 


fagt:  ,,3ebem  ba3  ©eine! 
SDie  Siebe:  ,,3ebem  ba§  5Deine!" 


STRONG  NOUNS  —  WITH  VOWEL  MUTATION      103 


in  ber  2Belt  Itifct  fid)  ertragen, 
nicf)t  eine  Seifye  t>on  fd)5rten  £agen. 


STRONG  NOUNS  —  WITH  VOWEL  MUTATION1 

MONOSYLLABLES 


322.  Masculines  with  plural  in  C+ 


ber  Slbt 
ber  3lrgt 
ber  21ft 
ber  Sad) 
ber  Satt 
ber  Sart 
ber  Saum  tree 


abbot 
physician 


ball 


ber  33otf     he-goat 
ber  Sraud)  custom 
ber  33rud)  fracture 
ber  Sunb   alliance 
ber  Sufd) 
ber  SDamm  < 
ber 


ber  ®uft 
ber  ®unft 
ber  gall 
ber  glofy 
ber  glud) 
ber  glug 
ber  glujs 
ber  grofd) 
ber 
ber 


fragrance 


rver 


ber  ©ang    walk 
ber  ©aft     guest 
ber  ©aul    horse 
ber  ©runb  mww 
ber  ©rujj    greeting 
bet  ©U^      casting 

ber 

ber 

ber, 

ber 

ber 

ber  Samm  comb 

ber  Sampf  combat 

ber  Sauf     purchase 

ber  Sau§     brown  owl 

ber  Slang  sound 

ber  SI  of;     dumpling 

ber  Slo$ 

ber  Snauf 

ber  Snopf  button 

ber  Snuft 

ber  Sod) 

ber  Sopf 

ber  Sorb     basket 

ber  Srampf  <mzw/ 


ber  Sran 
ber  Sran§ 
ber  Sropf 
ber  Srug 
ber  Su£ 
ber  £a£ 
ber  Sauf 
ber  So^n 
ber  Sfarft 
ber  9J?arfd^ 
ber  9ftop3 
ber  3Japf 
ber  ^5apft 
ber  $af$ 
ber  $fa^l 
ber  ^flocf 
ber  Spflug 
ber  ^fropf 
ber 
ber 
ber 
ber  $uff 
ber  9Rang 
ber  Sat 
ber  3Raud) 


wreath 


pitcher 

kiss 

corset,  bib 

course 

reward 

market 


pope 


cork 


place 


thump 
rank 
councilor 
smoke 


1  Nouns  of  infrequent  occurrence  have  been  omitted  in  these  lists. 


104              HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

bet  3Raum      space       bet  ©d()0f$      lap            foi&imm^  stocking 

(intoxi-      bet  ©d)tant    case           bet  ©ttunl  stump 
bet  $iau|db  \               .      ~~      .     ,  -           ,      ~.  r/          . 
L  <r<2/z0/2      bet  ©dtjtunb  deft          bet  ©tufyi    flfe«r 

bet  Sodf         #?#/         bet  ©dfyitb      /^^         bet  ©tutrtpf  stump 
(trunk       bet  ©d)UJ3       shot            bet  ©tutm  ^rw 

bet  SRumpf  J  (<?///^ 

bet©d^n)amm  sponge 

bet  ©turg    /«// 

Uttfy) 

bet  ©rf)ttmnt  prank 

bet  ©umpf  swamp 

bet  ©aal        room 

bet  ©d^raang  to'/ 

bet  Sanj      dance 

bet  ©act        sack 

bet  ©dfjrcwtm  swarm 

bet  S£on      /^^^ 

bet  ©aft        /#/<# 

bet  ©d)TX)u(ft  swelling 

bet  Sopf     /<?/ 

bet  ©atg       coffin 

bet  ©d^tDung  swing 

bet  Sotf     /^^/" 

bet  ©a£          sentence 

bet  ©d^rout    ^M 

bet  S£tanf    drink 

bet  ©aum      ^<?/ra 

bet  ©of)n      jtf« 

bet  Xtaum  dream 

bet  ©cfyaft      shaft 

bet  ©pan        shaving 

bet  ^tog     trough 

bet  ©dj)a£       treasure 

bet  ©pa^      y'<?^ 

bet  Ztopf     simpleton 

bet  ©djaimt    /^w 

bet  ©ptud^     saying 

bet  Xutm    /^w<fr 

r  /^w//^ 

bet  ©ptung   y>/w/ 

bet  33ogt      governor 

bet  ©d)Iaf   \  (of  the 

bet  ©punb     bung 

bet  2BaH      rampart 

[head} 

bet  ©tab       j/^ 

bet  SBanft    paunch 

ber  ©djlag     blow 

bet  ©tall        stable 

bet  SBoIf     w^ 

tf  (leather 
bet©dblaudb-l     . 
L   ^^ 

bet  ©tamm    /r/^«^ 
bet  ©tanb      rank 

bet  2Bud^§  growth 

bet  ©d)Iunb   chasm 

bet  ©totf        stick,  cane 

bet  SButf     throw 

bet  ©d^Iutf    ^-^ 

bet  ©totdf)     ^r>§ 

bet  3a^n     ^^ 

bet  ©d)iuj$     close 

bet  ©td£        push,  pile 

bet  3^m    M'^ 

bet  ©d^mau§  y^^^/ 

bet  ©ttang    r^ 

bet  Sftun     y^^r^ 

bet  ©djnapio  whisky 

bet  ©ttaudj    bush 

bet  ,3°^      /^// 

bet  ©d^opf     tuft 

bet  ©ttom      stream 

bet  S°pf      cue 

bet  3^Q        train 

323.  Masculines  with  plural  in  et. 

bet  ©ott     ^-^ 

"bet  Dtt         //^r^v? 

bet2Balb    forest 

bet  SRann    man 

bet  Stanb       ^^ 

bet  2Butm  worm 

NOTE.   Only  two  nonmutatable  masculine  monosyllables,  bet  ©eift,  spirit, 
and  bet  Seifc,  body,  take  et  in  the  plural. 


STRONG  NOUNS  — WITH  VOWEL  MUTATION       105 
324.  Feminines  with  plural  in  e. 


bie  3lngft 
bie  Slri 
bie  33anf 
bie  33runft 
bie  SBruft 
bie  gauft 

anxiety 
ax 
bench 
fire,  lust 

fist 

bie  Sluft    deft 
bie  $taft    strength 
bie  $ufy     cow 
bie  Sunft   art 
bie  Saug    louse 
bie  Suft      air 

bie  3Jal)t 
bie  3lot 
bie  5tu^ 
bie  @au 
bie  Scfylucljt 
bie  ©d^nur 

nut 
sow 
cleft 

bie  grud)t 

fruit 

bie  Suft      pleasure 

bie  ©tabt 

city 

bie  ©ang 

goose 

bie  3Jlad^t  might 

bie  ©ud^t 

malady 

bie  ©tuft 

vault 

bie  3Jlagb   servant  girl 

bie  2Banb 

wall 

bie  §anb 

hand 

bie  3ftaug  mouse 

bie  2Burft 

sausage 

bie  §aut 

skin 

bie5Ra$t    «*#/ 

bie  3«^ft 

guild 

325.  Neuters  with 

plural  in  Cf  * 

bag  3lag 

carcass 

bag  ©rag   ^T^JJ 

bag  Sod) 

hole 

bag  2lmt 

office 

bag  ©ut      property 

bag  3Waul 

mouth 

bag  Sab 

bath 

bag  §aupt  head 

bag  ^Pfanb 

pledge 

bag  Slatt 

leaf 

bag  §aug    /^w^ 

bag  5Rab 

wheel 

bag  33ud) 

book 

bag  §olj     a/^// 

bag  ©d^lo^ 

castle 

bag  3)ad) 

roof 

bag  §orn    ^<?^^ 

bag  Sal 

valley 

bag  SDorf 

village 

bag  £llE)tt    chicken 

bag  Sud) 

cloth 

bag  $&$) 

compartment  bag  Salb     calf 

bag  Soil 

people 

bag  $a$ 

barrel 

bag  ®orn     grain 

bag  2Bamg 

waistcoa 

bag  ©lag 

glass 

bag  $raitt  ^^ 

bag  ©tab 

grave 

bag  Samm  /0aw£ 

326.  Neuters  with  plural  in  C. 

bag  6^ or    <r^<?/r  {part  of  a  church) 


bag 


raft 


gern  nod^  Idnger  beg  Setters  Siirben, 
SBenn  ©driller  nur  nid)t  gleic^  Secret  raurben. 


©oetlje 


106  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

POLYSYLLABLES 

327.  Masculines  in  el,  Ctt,  er,  with  no  additional  ending  in  the 
plural. 

bet  3ldt  er     field     ber  §afen  harbor  bet  Dfen        stove 

bet  2lpfel    apple    ber  §ammer  hammer  ber  ©attel      saddle 

ber  33oben  ^/7       ber  ^anbel  quarrel  ber  ©djaben  damage 

ber  33ruber  brother  ber  Saben  j/0r<?  ber  ©djjnabel  fo0£ 

ber  gaben  thread  ber  SKangel  w^^/  ber  ©d^raager  brother-in-law 

ber  ©arten  garden  ber  SRantel  ^?«^  ber  SSater       father 

ber  ©raben  /#&/*     ber  ^Jtagel  ««//  ber  3SogeI 


328.  The  two  masculines  in  tum  with  plural  in  Ct  (74,  5). 
ber  Srrtum    error  ber  Steid^tum    wealth 

329.  Nine  foreign  masculines  with  plural  in  C* 

ber  3lltar     altar       ber  ©eneral  general     ber  ^arbtnal  cardinal 
ber  33ifd^of  to/^^/      ber  $anal      canal        ber  ^Ulorafi      morass 
ber  (Sfyoral   ^w«      ber  Saplan    chaplain    ber  ^alafi      /a/«^ 


330.  Two  feminines  with  no  additional  ending  in  the  plural. 
bte  -JRutter     mother  bie  5tod^ter     daughter 

331.  Neuters  with  plural  in  er  (52,  53). 

ba§  ©efyalt     salary  bag  ©erocmb    garment 

ba§  ©emad^    room  (of  a  house)       bag  §ofpital    hospital 

NOTE.    Without  vowel  mutation  :  bag  ®eftt)lett)t,  race,  sex  ;  bag 
ghost  ;  bag  SfJegiment,  regiment  ;  and  bag  ©emitt  (pi.  ©emitter),  w/'»< 
sition. 

332.  One  neuter  with  no  additional  ending  in  the  plural. 

bag  Softer     monastery 


STRONG  NOUNS—  WITHOUT  VOWEL  MUTATION     io/ 
2)er  redjte  Sefyrmeifter 


g'  alg  ^unger  nidjjt  bem  Secret,  befjen  ©aal  ift  immer  t>oH, 
SBeil  im  <5piel  er  aHe  6rf)iiler  §u  Soltoren  madden  foH  ; 
SDer  mit  9JUil)'  bem  2)oltor  lefyret,  bafc  er  nut  ein  <5$uler  ift, 
SDefjen  fleine  ^Pforte  jud^e,  e^  §u  gro^  bu  worben  bifl» 


STRONG  NOUNS  —  WITHOUT  VOWEL  MUTATION 

MONOSYLLABLES 
333.  Nonmutatable  neuters  with  plural  in  er* 

ba§  33ilb  picture 

ba§  33rett  board 

bag  6i  ^* 

bag  $elb  field 

bag  ©elb  money 
bag  ©Ueb 


bag  $tnb   child 

bag  3Reig        shoot 

bag  $leib  dress 

bag  9Rinb       £<?£/" 

bag  £trf)t    light 
bag  2ib      eyelid 
bag  Sieb    song 

bag  ©dfyroert  sword 
bag  <5ttft         institution 
bag  -JBeib       woman 

bag  9Zeft     nest 

334.  Nonmutatable  neuters  with  plural  in 


bag  Seet  - 

{bfgarfen} 

bag  §eer 
bag  §cft 

army 
notebook 

bag  6$iff 

bag  ©dfyroeii 

ship 
fthog 

bag  Scil 

ax 

bag  Snie 

knee 

bag  ©eil 

rope 

bag  Sein 

leg 

bag  Sreug 

cross 

bag  ©ieb 

sieve 

bag  Sier 

beer 

bag  SJleer 

sea 

bag  6piel 

play 

bag  ®edt 

deck 

bag  9te^ 

net 

bag  ©ttidf 

piece 

bag  @r§ 

ore 

bag  fifyr 

(eye  of  a 
\    needle 

bag  Scil 
bag  ^ier 

share 
animal 

bag  gefl 

hide 

bag  DI 

oil 

bag  2Ber! 

work 

bag  geft 

festival 

bag  $ferb 

horse 

bag  3^H 

tent 

bag  ©ift 

poison 

bag  SRe^ 

doe 

bag  3iel 

goal 

bag  ©leig 

track 

bag  Seid^ 

empire 

io8 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


335.  Mutatable  neuters  without  vowel  mutation  with  plural  in 


bag  S3oot      boat       bag  $al)r  year               bag  ^funb    pound 
bag  33rot      bread     bag  $od£)  yoke               bag  ^Sult       desk 
bag  33unb     bundle    bag  Sog    /#/                  bag  Quart     quart 
bag  ©arn     j0ra      bag  Sot    plumb            bag  ©cfyaf     sheep 
bag  ©rag     #ra.$vr     bag  -JJlal  #V«*              bag  ©rfjrtmb  ja/«M 
bag  ©ramm  #ra*8      bag  9JJug  stewed  fruit    bag  Sau        heavy  rope 
bag  §aar      //0*V       bag  ^$aar  /0/r              bag  Sor        ^a/* 

336.  Mutatable  masculines  without  vowel  mutation  with  plural 
in  e» 

ber 

aai 

eel 

ber 

ra     J 

t  grain  (a 

ber 

$unft 

point 

ber 

aar 

eagle 

L  weight) 

ber 

Qualm 

vapor 

ber 

ait 

act 

ber 

©urt 

girth 

ber 

Quarg 

quartz 

ber 

arm 

arm 

ber 

©aft 

clasp 

ber 

9tuf 

call 

ber 

Sannj 

proscrip- 
tion 

ber 
ber 

§uf 

hoof 

ber 
ber 

©d>alf 

shaft 
rogue 

ber 

SSorn 

fount 

ber 

§unb 

dog 

ber 

©d)uft 

scamp 

ber 

Sorft 

crack 

ber 

Ro^l 

cabbage 

ber 

©cfyul) 

shoe 

ber 

<3udng 

box  tree 

ber 

Sulm 

peak 

ber 

©tar 

starling 

ber 

^Dacbg 

badger 

ber 

Siirg 

course 

ber 

©toff 

stuff 

ber 

Sod)t 

wick 

ber 

Sa^g 

salmon 

ber 

©trold^ 

vagabond 

ber 

®old) 

dagger 

ber 

2aut 

sound 

ber 

©unb 

strait,  sound 

ber 

®om 

cathedral 

ber 

Sud^g 

lynx 

ber 

Sag 

day 

ber 

3*k 

groove 

ber  9JZof)r 

nightmare 

ber 

Salt    -1 

\time  (in 

ber 

garn 

fern 

V^PV 

^T?nTrh- 

(sold- 

t  music) 

ber 

gaun 

faun 

v\,\ 

JLUUIUJ 

\  mander 

ber 

Sfyron 

throne 

ber 

gl(Kl)g 

flax 

ber 

gjlunb 

mouth 

ber 

Soaft 

toast 

ber 

gunb 

find 

ber 

$aft 

agreement 

ber 

Sro^ 

crowd 

ber 

©olf 

gulf 

ber 

$fab 

path 

ber 

Suf*| 

flourish 

of 

ber 

©rab 

degree 

ber 

$ulg 

pulse 

\  trumpets 

©prid)tt)brter.  ®ie  2iebe  ift  blinb. 

2Bte  ber  SS.ogel,  fo  bag  (Si. 


WEAK  NOUNS 


109 


WEAK  NOUNS 

337.  Masculine  nouns  denoting  living  beings  which  do  not  end 
in  C  in  the  nominative  singular. 


ber 

33dr 

bear 

ber 

fierr 

f  gentle- 

ber  $fau 

peacock 

ber 

33aper 

Bavarian 

C 

\rnan 

ber  $ritt5 

prince 

berS«rWe){-75 

'  I  fellow 

ber 
e.  rt%>( 

§irt 

rtY)/iv»f^ 

shepherd 
(human 

ber  ©dfjenf 

(  cup- 
-bearer 

ber 

G&rift 

Christian 

t>er 

yJiettiu) 

\  being 

ber@d^ultl)e^ 

R  ma  vor 

ber 

ginl 

finch 

ber 

9Jio^r 

Moor 

ber  ©tetnttiet 

(stone- 

ber 

gran! 

franc 

ber 

5Rarr 

fool 

-    -cutter 

ber 

Siirft 

prince 

ber 

Dberft 

colonel 

ber  Zoic 

fool 

ber 

©raf 

count 

ber 

Dcfyg 

ox 

ber  SSorfafyr 

ancestor 

ber 

©reif 

griffin 

ber 

s^arb 

panther 

ber  3<u 

Czar 

ber 

§elb 

hero 

ber 

^Pfaff 

priest 

MIXED  NOUNS 
338.  Some  of  the  more  common  masculines. 

ber  Sauer     peasant 
ber  2)orn      thorn 
ber  ©et)atter  godfather 
ber  Sorbeer  laurel 
ber  3JJa[t       w^^/ 
ber  9Jlugfel   muscle 


ber 

ber 

ber 

ber  SHeif 

ber 

ber 


pain 


ber  9iacpar  neighbor       ber 


sparrow 


339.  Some  of  the  more  common  neuters. 

bag  2luge  eye 
bag  S3ett  ^<?^/ 
bag  (Snbe  ^^/ 


bag 

bag  ^letnob  jewel 

bag  3Kbbel    furniture 


ber  ©taat 
ber  ©tacfyel 
ber  ©tra^l  ^7 
ber  Setter   cousin 
ber  Sing      interest 


bag  Dfyr 


APPENDIX 

THE  NOUN1 

1.  Declension  of  nouns.    There  are  three  noun  declensions,  the 
strong,  the  weak,  and  the  mixed. 

2.  Strong  nouns,  except  feminines,  take  §  or  e3  in  the  genitive 
singular  and  usually  e  in  the  plural.    Feminines  take  no  endings  in 
the  singular,  but  are  inflected  regularly  in  the  plural. 

3.  Weak  nouns,  if  masculine,  take  n  or  en  in  all  cases  singular 
and  plural,  except  in  the  nominative  singular.   Weak  feminines  take 
n  or  en  in  the  plural. 

4.  Mixed  nouns  add  3  or  e§  in  the  genitive  singular  and  n  or  en 
in  the  plural. 

5.  The  declension,  vowel  mutation,  and  gender  of  nouns  can  best 
be  learned  by  constant  drill  in  giving  their  principal  parts.    These 
are  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular  and  the  nominative  plural. 
In  learning  these  forms  the  definite  article  must  always  accompany 
the  noun.    Examples: 

NOM.  bet  Stag         GEN.  beg  £ageg        NOM.  PL.  bie  £age 
bag  §aug  beg  §aufeg  bie  §aufer 

6.  The  last  member  of  a  compound  noun  determines  its  gender 
and  declension,  as  bag  §aug,  bet  6cfylufjel,  ber  ^augfdjlufjeL 

7.  Feminine  nouns  do  not  change  their  form  in  the  singular. 

8.  All  nouns  end  in  n  in  the  dative  plural. 

1  The  treatment  of  nouns  as  given  in  the  Appendix  was  suggested  by 
Professor  George  O.  Curme  of  Northwestern  University.  It  is  a  departure 
from  the  customary  way  in  which  the  noun  in  German  has  been  treated, 
but  its  simplicity  and  compactness  will,  no  doubt,  appeal  to  many  teachers. 

in 


112  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

9.  The  inflectional  ending  e  is  never  used  after  el,  en,  er,  d^en, 
and  iein. 

10.  The  strong  declension.  To  the  strong  declension  belong  the 
great  body  of  German  masculine  and  neuter  nouns,  a  few  fem- 
inines,  and  the  great  majority  of  foreign  words  accented  on  the  last 
syllable  if  they  represent  lifeless  things. 

.  11.  This  declension  takes  g  or  eg  in  the  genitive  singular  and 
usually  e  in  the  plural  forms,  sometimes  with,  but  more  commonly 
without,  vowel  mutation. 

12.  The  ending  eg  of  the  genitive  singular  is  usually  confined  to 
monosyllables ;  and  even  there  it  is  used  only  when  g  is  difficult  to 
pronounce,  or  to  avoid  a  clash  of  accents  when  an  accented  syllable 
follows  in  the  next  word,  as  beg  $uf;eg,  be%  Stfdjeg,  beg  §aufeg,  beg 
SDorfeg  or  SDorfg ;  but  beg  9Jtanneg  SJhit,  not  beg  SKanng  3Kut. 

13.  Usage  varies  in  regard  to  adding  e  in  the  dative  singular. 
It  is  in  general  confined  to  monosyllables,  and  is  often  omitted  even 
there,  as  bem  Sage  or  Sag;  bem  §aufe  or  §aug;  bem  ^bnige  or 
$bnig;  but  always  bem  Sefyrer,  bem  Sogel,  bem  ©paten. 

14.  The  strong  declension.    Examples:   ber  Sag,  day,  bag  $afyr, 
year-,  ber  9JJonat,  month-,  bag  Monument,  monument. 

SINGULAR 

ber  Sag  bag  $afyr  ber  3Konat  bag  Monument 

beg  Sageg  beg  ^afyreg  beg  SJlonatg  beg  SJIonumentg 

bem  Sage  bem  ^afyw  bem  9Konat  bem  SRonument 

ben  Sag  bag  $af)r  ben  -Jftonat  bag  Monument 

PLURAL 

bie  Sage  bie  3a^^  bit  donate  bie  SJtonumente 

ber  Sage  ber  3al)re  ber  DJJonate  ber  3Utonumente 

ben  Sagen  ben  S^m*  ben  SJlonaten  ben  SRonumenten 

bie  Sage  bie  3>al)re  bie  SRonate  bie  -Jftonumente 

©prid^tDort.  @g  fytlft  nid)tg,  fid)  iiber  gefd^e^ene  SDtnge  gu  argern. 


APPENDIX  113 

15.  Exceptions  to  the  strong  declension.    The  following  classes 
of  strong  nouns  form  their  plural  irregularly.   The  first  class  omits 
the  plural  ending  e,  and  the  second  takes  er  instead  of  e  in  the  plural. 

16.  Class  I.    To  this  class  belong  all  masculine  and  neuter  nouns 
in  e,  el,  en,  er,  cf)en,  and  lein.    Nouns  in  rf)en  and  lein  are  neuter  and 
usually  have  the  stem  vowel  mutated. 

17.  Examples  of  class  I :  bet  ©paten,  spade;  ber  Secret,  teacher •• 
ba3  ©ebaube,  building ••  bag  $raulein,  young  lady,  Miss. 

SINGULAR 

ber  ©paten  ber  Sefyrer  bag  ©ebaube  bag  graulein 

beg  Spateng  beg  Sefyrerg  beg  ©ebaubeg  beg  grauleing 

bem  ©paten  bem  Sefyrer  bem  ©ebaube  bem  graulein 

ben  ©paten  ben  Sefyrer  bag  ©ebaube  bag  graulein 

PLURAL 

bte  ©paten  bie  Sefyrer  bie  ©ebaube  bie  ^rauletn 

ber  ©paten  ber  Sefyrer  ber  ©ebaube  ber  gtauletn 

ben  ©paten  ben  Severn  ben  ©ebduben  ben  graulein 

bie  ©paten  bie  Sefyrer  bte  ©ebaube  bie  $rauletn 

18.  The  following  nouns  of  class  I  often  omit  n  in  the  nomina- 
tive singular :  ber  grtebe,  ber  gunle,  ber  ©ebanfe,  ber  ©laube,  ber 
£aufe,  ber  9lame,  ber  ©ante,  ber  ©dfjabe,  and  ber  2Bttte.   3)er  $elfen 
often  drops  en  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular. 

19.  Class  II.    To  this  class  belong  the  following  groups  : 

1.  Eight  masculine  monosyllables,  as  ber  ©eift  (323). 

2.  About  50  neuter  monosyllables,  as  bag  $inb  (325,  333). 

3.  Eight  neuter  polysyllables,  as  bag  ©efd)led)t  (331). 

4.  All  nouns  ending  in  turn,  as  bag  SUtertum  (74,  5). 

©pridjroorter.  §eute  rot  —  morgen  tot. 

Sg  i[t  nicfytg  jo  fetn  gefponnen, 

@g  fomtnt  bod^  enblid)  an  bie  ©onnen. 


114  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

20.  Examples  of  class  II:    ber  ©eift,  spirit-,  bag  $inb,  child \ 
bag  ©efd)lerf)t,  race,  sex. 

SINGULAR 

bet  ©eift  bag  $inb  bag  ©efdjlecf)t 

beg  ©eifteg  beg  $inbeg  beg  ©efrf)led)tg 

bem  ©eifte  betn  $inbe  bem  ©efd)led()t 

ben  ©eift  bag  $inb  bag  ©efcf)led)t 

PLURAL 

bie  ©eifter  bie  Sinber  bie  ©efdfjledfjter 

ber  ©eifter  ber  ^tnber  ber  ©efdjlerfjter 

ben  ©eiftern  ben  $inbern  ben  ©efd)led)tern 

bie  ©eifter  bie  $inber  bie  ©efdf)le$ter 

21.  2)er  ©eift  and  ber  Seib  are  the  only  nonmutatable  masculine 
monosyllables  which  take  er  in  the  plural. 

22.  ®ag  ©efd)Ied^t,  bag  ©efpenft,  and  bag  9te<riment  are  the  only 
nonmutatable  neuter  polysyllables  which  take  er  in  the  plural.   ®ag 
©emilt,  which  has  the  vowel  mutated  both  in  the  singular  and  the 
plural,  also  belongs  in  this,,  class. 

23.  Vowel  mutation  in  strong  nouns.    The  majority  of  strong 
nouns  do  not  have  vowel  mutation.    The  group  which  mutates, 
however,  is  composed  of  many  monosyllables  and  a  small  number 
of  polysyllables  of  frequent  occurrence. 

24.  Monosyllables  with  vowel  mutation.    This  group  contains : 

1.  About  200  masculines.    Six  of  these  take  er  in  the  plural 
and  the  rest  take  e  (322,  323). 

2.  33  feminines  (324). 

3.  About  35  neuters; 

(a)  33  with  plural  in  er  (325). 

(b\  Two  with  plural  in  «e :  bag  glofc,  //.  bie  glofte ;  bag  Sfyor, 
//.  bie  @f)ore  or  (Sfyore  (326). 

©pridjroort.  SBer  bie  Seiter  fyinauf  roill,  ntujs  bei  ber  unterften 
(Sproffe  anfangen. 


APPENDIX 


25.  Examples  of  monosyllables  with  vowel  mutation  :  ber 

tree;  bte  ©tabt,  city;  bag  Slid),  book;  bet  2lr§t,  physician  ;  bet 


SINGULAR 

ber  33aum 

bte  ©tabt 

bag  Surf) 

ber  2lr§t 

ber  ^Iu^ 

beg  Saumeg 

ber  ©tabt 

beg  33urfjeg 

beg  airgleg 

beg  ^lufjeg 

bem  Saume 

ber  ©tab! 

bem  Surfje 

bem  3lr5te 

bem  glufic 

ben  Saum 

bte  ©tabt 

bag  33ud^ 

ben  2lrgt 

ben  glu^ 

PLURAL 

bte  33aume 

bte  ©table 

bte  Siirfjer 

bte  Sir^te 

bte  gliiffe 

ber  Saume 

ber  ©table 

ber  33itd(jer 

ber  3tr§te 

ber  gluffe 

ben  Saumen 

ben  ©labten 

ben  Sud^ern 

ben  Srglen 

ben  glitfjen 

bie  Saume 

bte  ©table 

bte  S3itrf)er 

bte  Srjtc 

bte  glilffc 

26.  The  group  of  nonmutating  monosyllables  is  very  large,  and 
includes  about  265  masculines  and  all  neuters  except  about  35.   For 
a  list  of  the  more  common  nonmutating  monosyllables  see  333-336. 

27.  Polysyllables  with  vowel  mutation.   Only  a  very  small  num- 
ber of  polysyllabic  strong  nouns  have  vowel  mutation.    To  this 
group  belong  : 

i  .  The  following  masculines  : 

(a)  2  1  in  el,  en,  er  (327). 

(b)  Two  in  turn  :  ber  SHetdfjtum  and  ber  3frrtum  (74>  5)- 
(V)  Nine  foreign  nouns,  as  ber  Slltar  (329). 

2.  The  following  feminines  : 

(a)  ®te  gjJutier,  bte  2ocf)ter,  bte  2lrmbruft,  and  bte  ©efd)nwlft. 
(£)  Compounds  in  funft  and  flud)t. 

3.  The  following  neuters  : 
(a)  ®ag  filofter. 

(fr)  All  neuters  in  turn. 

(c)  2)a3  ©emac^,  bag  ©e^alt,  bag  ©eroanb,  and  bag  §ofptta(,  which 
take  er  in  the  plural. 

28.  All  mutatable  nouns  which  take  er  in  the  plural  mutate  the 
vowel  (a,  o,  u)  in  the  plural. 


n6 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


29.  Nouns  in  turn  mutate  the  vowel  of  this  suffix  and  take  er  in 
the  plural.    For  the  gender  of  nouns  in  turn  see  74, 5. 

30.  Examples  of  polysyllables  with  vowel  mutation  :  bet  Slpfel, 
apple  \  ber  ©arten,  garden ;  bie  9Jtutter,  mother-,  bag  2lltertum,  an- 


SINGULAR 

ber  2lpfel 

ber  ©arten 

bie  Gutter 

bag  2lltertum 

beg  2lpfelg 

beg  ©arteng 

ber  Gutter 

beg  2lltertumg 

bem  2lpfel 

bem  ©arten 

ber  Gutter 

bem  2lltertum 

ben  2lpfel 

ben  ©arten 

bie  Gutter 

bag  2Utertum 

PLURAL 

bie  Spfel 

bie  ©arten 

bie  Gutter 

bie  3lltertiimer 

ber  tpfel 

ber  ©arten 

ber  flitter 

ber  2lltertiimer 

ben  2(pfeln 

ben  ©arten 

ben  5UZuttern 

ben  2lltertumern 

bie  tpfel 

bie  ©arten 

bie  Gutter 

bie  2tltertiimer 

31.  The  weak  declension.    Nouns  of  the  weak  declension  end 
in  n  or  en  except  in  the  nominative  singular  masculine.    Feminine 
nouns  are  not  inflected  in  the  singular.    There  are  no  neuters. 

32.  Weak  nouns  do  not  have  vowel  mutation. 

33.  Examples  of  the  weak  declension  :  ber  Snabe,  boy,  bie  $rau, 
lady;  ber  ©tubent,  student-,  bie  Sefyrerin,  lady  teacher;  ber  §err, 

gentleman,  Mr. 

SINGULAR 

ber  ©tubent  bie  Sefyrerin  ber  §err 

beg  Stubenten  ber  Sefyrerin  beg  §errn 

bemStubenten  ber  2efyrerin  bem  §errn 

ben  Stubenten  bie  2efyrerin  ben  §errn 

PLURAL 

bie  ^naben   bie  gtauen   bie  Stubenten  bie  Se^rerinnen  bie  §erren 

ber  ^naben   ber  grauen  ber  ©tubenten  ber  Se^rerinnen  ber  §erren 

ben  ^naben  ben  $rauen  ben  Stubenten  ben  Se^rerinnen  ben  §erren 

bie  Snaben  bie  grauen   bie  Stubenten  bie  Se^rerinnen  bie  §erren 

NOTE.   The  noun  <Qerr  omits  the  inflectional  e  in  the  singular. 


ber  Snabe  bie  $rau 
beg  ^naben  ber  $rau 
bem^naben  ber^rau 
ben  ^naben  bie  $rau 


APPENDIX  II/ 

34.  Feminines  formed  from  masculines  by  adding  in  double  the 
n  before  adding  the  plural  ending  en. 

35.  Membership. 

1 .  All  feminine  nouns  except  the  following,  which  are  strong : 

(a)  The  mutating  feminines  5Rutter  and  2orf)ter. 

(b)  About  33  mutating  monosyllables  (324). 
(V)  Those  ending  in  nig  and  fal. 

(d)  Mutating  compounds  in  lunft  and  flud)t. 

2.  Masculines  in  e  representing  living  beings,  as  ber  Snabe,  bet 
Sbroe,  bet  2lffe ;  and  two  representing  things :  bet  33ud)ftabe  and 
ber  gefynte. 

3.  Foreign  words : 

(a)  Masculines  accented  on  the  last  syllable  and  representing 
living  beings,  as  ber  Segat.  Exceptions :  nouns  ending  in  accented 
al,  an,  tin,  ar,  at,  eitr,  ier,  or,  belong  to  the  strong  declension  whether 
they  represent  living  beings  or  lifeless  things,  as  ber  ©eneral,  ber 
$umpan,  ber  ©ouueran,  ber  ^ommentar,  ber  ©efretar,  ber  Gfyaffeur, 
ber  Officer,  ber  -JRajor. 

(li)  Masculines  in  accented  anb,  enb,  ant,  ent,  and  grapfy,  repre- 
senting persons  or  things,  and  also  ber  Cornet  and  ber  planet. 
Examples :  ber  SJtuliipIifanb,  ber  SJlinuenb,  ber  gabrifant,  ber  <5tu= 
bent,  ber  ^aragrapfy. 

36.  The  mixed  declension.    The  mixed  declension  uses  strong 
endings  in  the  singular  and  weak  in  the  plural.    The  genitive  sin- 
gular adds  g  or  eg  and  the  plural  n  or  en.     Nouns  taken  from 
French,  English,  and  other  modern  languages  add  g  in  the  plural. 

37.  Examples  of  the  mixed  declension  :  bag  2Iuge,  eye;  ber  5Dof- 
lor,  doctor;  bag  ©tubium,  study;  ba§  %Q\\\\,  fossil*. 

SINGULAR 

bag  2luge  ber  Softor  bag  6tubium  bag  $offtl  bag  £erj 

beg  2lugeg  beg  Sottorg  beg  6tubiumg  beg  gofftlg  beg  §er$eng 

bem  2luge  bem  SDoftor  bem  ©tubium  bem  ^\\\\  bem 

bag  3lugc  ben  SDoftor  bag  ©tubium  bag  goffil  bag 


Il8  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

PLURAL 

bie  Slugen  bie  Softoren  bie  ©tubien  bie  $ojfilien  bie  Bergen 

ber  2lugen  bet  SDoftoren  bet  6tubien  ber  gofftlien  bet 

ben  2lugen  ben  SDoItoren  ben  ©tubien  ben  goffilien  ben 

bie  2lugen  bte  SDoftoren  bie  ©tubien  bie  $offilien  bie  §er§en 

NOTE.    The  noun  Jperj  is  irregular  in  declension. 

38.  Membership. 

A.  Native  German  words  : 

1.  About  50  masculines,  a  few  of  which  are  monosyllabic  (338). 

2.  About  15  neuters,  mostly  monosyllabic  (339). 

B.  Many  foreign  words  : 

i.  Masculine  nouns  in  on,  or,  ug,  and  tug  from  Latin  and  Greek. 

NOTE  i.  Both  on  and  or  are  short  and  unaccented  in  the  singular  but 
long  and  accented  in  the  plural,  as  ber  2)ottor,  pi.  bie  2)o!toren  ;  ber  2)timon, 
pi.  bie  2)timonen.  Words  in  accented  on,  or,  belong  to  the  strong  declen- 
sion, as  ber  Sftajor,  pi.  bie  3ftajore  ;  ber  £)ia!on,  pi.  bie  2)ia!one. 

NOTE  2.  Foreign  masculines  in  u£  and  iu£  usually  remain  unchanged  in 
the  singular,  as  ber  hunting,  beg  -ftuntiuS,  pi.  bie  -ftuntien.  Those  in  u3  are 
inclined  to  become  strong,  as  ber  $rotilg,  beg  $roflt3,  bie 


2.  Neuter  nouns  from  Latin  and  Greek  : 
(a)  Those  ending  in  a,  as  bag  SDrama. 

(fr)  Those  ending  in  eum,  ium,  uum,  on  (unaccented),  which  be- 
come in  the  plural  een,  ten,  uen,  en,  as  bag  -JJtufeum,  pi.  bie  3Jhtfeen  ; 
bag  ©tubium,  pi.  bie  ©tubien  ;  bag  3)iftirf)on,  pi.  bie  SDiftidjen. 

(c)  Those  ending  in  il,  al,  with  plural  in  ten.   These  nouns,  how- 
ever, are  inclined  to  become  strong,  as  bag  $offil,  pi.  bie  $0ffile  or 
$ojftlien;  bag  Mineral,  pi.  bie  3Kinerale  or  SKineralien. 

(d)  ®ag  gnfctt  and  bag  ^ntereffe. 

3.  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  and  a  few  feminines  from  French, 
English,  and  other  modern  languages.    These  words  add  g  in  the 
plural.  Examples  :  bag  3Re[taurant,  beg  Seftaurantg,  bie  SHeftaurantg  ; 
ber  Sorb,  beg  Sorbg,  bie  Sorbg  ;  bie  Sabt),  ber  Sabp,  bie  Sabpg  or 
Sabieg  ;  bie  SSitta,  ber  SSiHa,  bte  SSiUag  or  SStHen  ;  ber  5Don,  beS 
S>ong,  bie  ®ong  ;  ber  $afdf)a,  beg  ^Jafc^ag,  bie  $afdjag. 


EXERCISES 

THE  DEFINITE  ARTICLE 

i.  Poverty  is  no  disgrace.  2.  Work  strengthens  the  body. 
3.  February  is  the  shortest  month.  4.  The  peasants  have  horses 
and  cows.  5.  We  (9Kan,  161)  see  soldiers  everywhere  in  Germany. 
6.  Do  you  drink  tea  or  coffee  ?  7.  I  prefer  pears  to  apples. 
8.  Wolves  are  enemies  of  sheep.  9.  Switzerland  is  a  republic. 
10.  In  autumn  the  leaves  fall  from  the  trees,  n.  Where  is  little 
Anna?  12.  In  (SBeim)  writing  we  use  our  arm  and  our  fingers. 
13.  Winter  brings  snow  and  ice.  14.  Birds  have  beaks.  15.  Meat 
is  dearer  than  bread.  16.  When  pride  rises  fortune  sinks.  17.  It 
was  in  the  month  (of)  June.  18.  We  go  to  church  on  Sunday. 
19.  Love  hopeth  all  things.  20.  Death  knocks  at  the  door  of  huts 
and  palaces.  21.  Dogs  like  to  eat  meat.  22.  Water  is  colorless. 
23.  Sorrow  (//.)  has  killed  him.  24.  I  haven't  seen  him  since 
Monday.  25.  Hawks  are  birds.  26.  Our  hotel  is  in  Ring  Street. 
27.  The  mother  had  her  child  in  her  arms.  28.  The  student  has 
a  book  in  his  hand.  29.  The  students  were  singing  songs. 
30.  Since  the  year  1871  the  kings  of  Prussia  have  also  been  the 
emperors  of  Germany. 

THE   INDEFINITE  ARTICLE,  THE  POSSESSIVE 
ADJECTIVES,  AND  letn 

i.  My  friend  is  very  successful  as  a  lawyer.  2.  A  king  lives  in 
a  castle.  3.  He  is  expecting  his  father  at  the  station.  4.  The 
yard  before  our  house  is  very  small.  5.  My  son  is  a  tailor.  6.  Her 
nephew  lives  in  a  village  in  the  Black  Forest.  7.  The  spade  belongs 
to  our  gardener.  8.  Birds  are  distinguished  from  other  animals 

119 


120  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

by  (burdf))  their  feathers.  9.  Your  letter  was  lying  on  my  table. 
10.  His  brother  wishes  to  become  a  physician,  n.  Have  your 
friends  gone  to  (auf)  the  country?  12.  Their  teacher  likes  music. 
13.  We  do  not  like  him  as  a  neighbor.  14.  His  father  will  be 
ninety  years  old  in  January.  15.  They  have  our  table  and  your 
chair.  16.  The  eye  is  a  mirror.  17.  Edward,  write  your  letter 
now.  1 8.  I  can't  understand  a  word  of  French.  19.  The  man 
has  a  book  and  a  cane ;  he  is  a  professor.  20.  We  always  write 
our  exercises  with  pen  and  ink. 

DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS 

i.  The  basket  is  in  the  garden.  2.  She  has  her  pen  and  your 
book.  3.  The  apples  of  this  tree  will  soon  be  ripe.  4.  My  teeth 
are  good,  but  my  eyes  have  always  been  weak.  5.  The  maid  is 
making  the  beds.  6.  Our  neighbors  have  two  horses  and  a  cow. 
7^  His  head  is  large,  but  his  feet  are  small.  8.  The  farmers  of 
(in)  this  state  are  rich.  9.  My  cousin  has  two  sons,  but  they  do 
not  live  in  this  city.  10.  The  faith  of  the  heart  is  strong,  n.  A 
year  has  twelve  months,  a  month  four  weeks,  a  week  seven  days, 
and  a  day  twenty-four  hours.  12.  The  churches  in  this  city  are 
beautiful.  13.  She  took  your  comb  and  my  brush.  14.  In  the 
box  we  found  plates,  cups,  knives,  forks,  and  glasses.  15.  I  laid 
the  key  on  the  table  beside  the  watch.  16.  This  forest  belongs  to 
the  king.  17.  Joseph  had  written  a  letter  to  (an)  his  uncle. 
18.  There  (@3)  are  seven  boys  and  ten  girls  in  this  class.  19.  The 
teacher  did  not  know  the  names  of  all  his  pupils.  20.  The  count 
and  the  countess  rewarded  the  shepherd.  21.  The  sons  of  kings 
are  princes.  22.  We  can  see  five  villages  in  the  valley  below. 
23.  The  rooms  of  this  cloister  are  very  small  and  gloomy.  24.  Mother 
put  my  shoes  under  the  bed.  25.  The  king's  castle  stood  among 
the  trees  near  the  lake.  26.  Have  you  seen  this  picture  of  my 
nephew  ?  27.  His  coat  is  hanging  behind  the  door.  28.  The  lion 
is  the  king  of  beasts.  29.  In  olden  times  (antiquity)  people 


EXERCISES  121 

believed  in  (an)  many  gods.  30.  In  the  banks  there  are  generally 
neither  chairs  nor  benches.  31.  The  cook  (fern.)  is  cooking  soup 
and  vegetables  on  the  stove.  32.  This  afternoon  she  will  bake 
bread  and  cake.  33.  The  fish  are  lying  in  the  bucket  behind  the 
stove.  34.  You  will  find  the  tub,  the  broom,  and  the  brush  in  the 
kitchen.  35.  The  old  woman  with  the  gray  horse  sells  peas,  beans, 
turnips,  and  potatoes.  36.  My  daughter  brought  me  a  glass  of 
water.  37.  Here  is  a  bottle  of  vinegar.  Do  you  also  want  a 
pound  of  butter?  38.  This  ticket  costs  six  marks.  39.  At  ($u) 
Easter  we  have  a  week's  vacation.  40.  These  ashes  are  still 
warm.  41.  Our  horse  is  fourteen  hands  high  and  weighs  eleven 
hundred  pounds.  42.  Father  drank  two  cups  of  hot  coffee  for 
(§um)  breakfast.  43.  My  parents  were  both  born  in  Germany. 
44.  In  this  region  the  peasants  raise  oats. 

PROPER  NOUNS 

i .  The  people  called  Emperor  Frederick,  the  father  of  Emperor 
William  II,  ,,Unfern  $ri£".  2«  Frieda's  mother's  name  was  Mar- 
garet. 3.  The  houses  of  (t)0n)  Paris  are  very  beautiful.  4.  Fred's 
parents  have  moved  to  New  York.  5.  Professor  Meyer's  oldest 
daughter  will  be  married  next  month.  6.  I  am  committing  some 
of  Schiller's  and  Heine's  poems  to  memory.  7.  We  did  not  see 
Herman  and  Agnes.  8.  Mother  gave  Marie  a  new  dress  and  Max 
a  pair  of  skates.  9.  This  flower  is  for  little  Bertha.  10.  Have 
you  ever  read  Voss's  ,,£uije"  ?  n.  The  universities  of  Germany 
are  very  famous. 

THE  ADJECTIVE 

i.  Good  children  obey  their  parents.  2.  Old  friends  are  like 
(rate)  old  wine;  their  worth  increases  with  their  age.  3.  The 
young  man  with  a  basket  in  his  right  hand  brings  us  a  dozen 
fresh  eggs  every  week.  4.  Her  little  brothers  are  very  obedient 
and  lovable  boys.  5.  The  pretty  girl  on  the  brown  horse  was  the 


122  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

sister  of  my  friend  Christopher.  6.  My  son  wrote  me  a  long  letter 
yesterday.  7.  The  fresh  green  of  the  leaves  is  changing  into  a 
reddish  brown.  8.  Many  poor  people  live  in  small,  dark  rooms. 
9.  One  day  a  little  yellow  bird  came  to  (urn)  drink  out  of  the  large 
bucket  which  hung  over  the  deep  well.  10.  My  daughter  has  a 
large  head,  a  well-formed  nose,  and  large  blue  eyes.  n.  We 
never  had  such  a  good  president.  12.  The  noble  knight  was  a 
very  good  and  brave  man,  always  ready  to  help  the  poor  and  the 
weak.  13.  Our  German  teacher  has  a  new  house  and  a  beautiful 
flower-garden.  14.  I  read  several  good  books  this  summer.  15.  My 
little  brother  will  be  eight  years  old  next  month.  16.  Our  faithful 
old  servant  died  last  night.  17.  A  sleeping  fox  catches  no  chickens. 
18.  Children  who-have-been-burned  fear  the  fire.  19.  No  one 
greeted  the  stranger.  20.  This  coming  week  we  intend  to  depart. 
21.  The  gain  which-is-to-be-hoped-for  will  not  be  large.  22.  All 
the  bread  in  this  box  was  baked  yesterday.  23.  The  lesson  to  be- 
learned  is  too  long.  24.  All  my  relatives  live  in  Germany. 

THE  INDEFINITE  NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES 

i .  Our  neighbors  have  all  kinds  of  flowers.  2 .  We  picked  a 
few  red  roses.  3.  There  was  only  a  little  oil  in  the  bottle.  4.  All 
Germany  helped  the  count.  5.  We  have  enough  butter  but  not 
enough  potatoes.  6.  These  presents  cost  little  money  but  much 
work.  7.  That  happened  several  years  later.  8.  You  have  n't  any 
meat.  Oh  yes,  I  have  some.  9.  The  English  duke  remained  only 
a  few  days  in  Berlin.  10.  That  is  sheer  nonsense,  n.  He  has 
bought  Goethe's  entire  works.  12.  This  young  man  has  too  much 
money  and  too  many  friends. 

DEMONSTRATIVE  AND    INTERROGATIVE  ADJECTIVES 

i.  This  picture  belongs  in  that  room.  2.  What  kind  of  watch 
have  you  ?  3.  Have  we  the  same  lesson  to-day  that  we  had  yester- 
day ?  4.  It  was  that  man  whose  house  burned  down.  5.  To 


EXERCISES  123 

which  child  do  you  wish  to  give  this  doll  ?     6.  Such  a  man  is  wel- 
come everywhere.     7.  In  what  kind  of  factory  are  you  working  ? 

8.  I  do  not  know  which  sentence  you  mean.     9.  Which  horse  do 
you  wish  to  sell,  this  one  or  that  one  ?     10.  For  what  kind  of 
room  do  you  want  this  carpet  ? 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 

i .  Did  you  ever  see  a  larger  apple  ?  2 .  Have  you  still  younger 
sons  ?  3.  John  is  the  biggest  of  the  boys.  4.  A  diamond  is  harder 
than  the  hardest  metal.  5.  I  have  never  read  a  more  interesting 
book.  6.  Paul  has  always  been  one  of  my  most  faithful  friends. 
7.  That  was  an  exceedingly  agreeable  surprise.  8.  Here  the  ice 
is  strongest.  9.  My  grandmother  is  the  oldest  woman  in  this 
village.  10.  These  cherries  are  riper  than  those,  n.  My  uncle 
is  older  than  my  father.  12.  This  plum  is  the  largest.  13.  This 
pupil  is  less  talented  than  industrious.  14.  The  tree  is  higher  than 
our  house.  15.  The  coldest  water  is  in  the  deepest  well.  16.  Marie 
is  just  as  clever  as  her  sister.  17.  Anna  has  a  large  apple,  Eliza- 
beth a  larger  one,  but  George  has  the  largest.  18.  Carl  is  most 
diligent  when  he  goes  to  school.  19.  This  is  the  shortest  day  of 
the  year.  20.  That  is  very  disagreeable  to  me. 

COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS 

i .  John  ran  the  fastest.  2 .  (The)  Jupiter  is  comparatively  near 
the  earth,  (the)  Mars  is  still  nearer,  and  the  moon  is  the  nearest. 
3.  We  were  in  Leipzig  longer  than  in  Dresden,  but  we  remained 
longest  in  Berlin.  4.  The  older  my  father  gets,  the  less  he  reads. 
5.  It  will  be  twelve  o'clock  at  least  before  I  shall  have  finished  these 
sentences.  6.  Bertha  told  her  story  the  best.  7.  That  occurs  very 
rarely.  8.  The  airship  is  traveling  (fasten)  faster  than  the  train. 

9.  The  fire  in  this  stove  burns  better  when  the  wind  is  in  (comes 
from)  the  north. 


124      HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

NUMERALS 

i.  I  have  three  brothers;  the  first  is  twenty-five  years  old,  the 
second  twenty-two,  and  the  third  is  in  his  fifteenth  year.  2.  Give 
me  half  of  your  apple.  3.  He  has  been  here  three  times.  4.  There 
are  all  kinds  of  people  in  the  world.  5.  To-day  is  the  twenty-second 
of  February.  6.  Here  are  two  kinds  of  pears.  7.  Write  the  first 
sentence  and  the  sixth.  8.  Three  is  a  fifth  of  fifteen.  9.  We  have 
read  the  first  twenty  pages.  10.  A  fourfold  cord  will  hold  all  the 
(befto)  better. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS 

i .  I  thank  you  very  much  for  the  stamps  which  you  sent  me  for 
my  collection.  2.  He  will  help  me.  3.  You  learn  quickly,  but  you 
also  forget  quickly.  4.  Here  is  a  brush;  lay  it  on  the  table. 

5.  That  girl  is  very  industrious.    Do  you  know  what  her  name  is  ? 

6.  Henry,  stop  beating  your  dog.     7.  The  birds  are  singing  in  the 
trees.     8.  This  hat  is  too  small  for  me ;  I  can't  wear  it.    9.  What 
do  we  do  with  our  eyes  ?    We  see  with  them.     10.  I  sat  behind  you 
in  church  last  Sunday,     n.  Mother  said  to  me,  "  Helen,  what  are 
you  doing?"     12.  Here  is  a  gold  watch;  what  will  you  give  me 
for  it  ?     13.  Did  you  ever  read  this  story  ?     14.  Give  us  this  day 
our  daily  bread.     15.  Child,  you  must  not  take  off  your  mittens. 
16.  I  saw  you,  but  I  know  you  didn't  see  me.     17.  She  will  not 
disturb  you,  father.      18.  Mr.   Schmidt,  have  you  seen  our  new 
house  ?     19.   My  sister's  children  never  obey  her,  although   she 
punishes  them  quite  often.     20.  We  hope  to  see  you  and  your 
husband  in  Prague  next  year. 

REFLEXIVE  PRONOUNS 

i.  He  is  rejoicing  at  his  success.  2.  She  is  washing  her  hands. 
3.  Are  you  afraid  to  stay  here  alone  ?  4.  They  always  flatter  each 
other.  5.  My  parents  will  be  surprised  at  my  progress.  6.  Fred 
looked  around  at  me.  7.  They  had  lost  their  way  in  the  forest. 


EXERCISES  125 

8.  I  sat  down  in  order  to  rest  myself.  9.  We  both  hurt  ourselves 
on  that  nail.  10.  The  poor  child  is  not  feeling  well  to-day,  n.  You 
contradict  yourself  in  everything  that  you  say.  12.  He  imagines 
that  he  is  especially  talented. 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS 

i.  The  fault  is  ours.     2.  Whose  book  is   this?    It  is  mine. 

3.  He  was  thinking  of  my  brother  and  yours.     4.  I  have  lost  all 
my  possessions.     5.  Is  this  your  umbrella  ?    No,  it  is  his  ;  that  one 
is  mine.     6.  Do  not  forget  to  distinguish  between  what-is-mine  and 
what-is-yours.     7.  Our  table  is  larger  than  theirs.     8.  Their  piano 
cost  more  than  ours.     9.  I  have  not  seen  my  people  for  five  years. 
10.  This  room  is  hers  ;  but,  as  you  see,  it  is  not  as  pretty  as  yours. 
n.  I  have  his  pen  and  he  has  mine.     12.  My  father  was  a  physi- 
cian and  hers  was  a  merchant. 

INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS 

i.  Who  loaned  me  this  lead  pencil  ?  2.  What  have  you  in  your 
hand  ?  3.  He  showed  me  two  umbrellas  and  asked  me  which  one 
I  wanted.  4.  For  whom  are  you  making  this  beautiful  present  ? 
5.  What  were  you  laughing  about?  6.  Whose  picture  is  that? 
7.  What  were  you  standing  on  ?  8.  Whom  do  you  mean  ?  Which 
one  did  he  mean  ?  9.  Fred  has  a  gold  watch.  What  kind  of  one 
have  you  ?  10.  What  did  the  child  hurt  itself  with  ?  n.  I  do  not 
know  whose  dog  bit  my  little  niece.  12.  What  did  his  mother  say? 

RELATIVE   PRONOUNS 

i.  There  were  many  people  there  whom  I  did  n't  know.  2.  Have 
you  a  key  with  which  I  can  open  this  door  ?  3.  The  donkey  which 
had  been  carrying  the  sacks  to  the  mill  became  old  and  lame. 

4.  Whatever  is  beautiful  is  not  always  good.     5.  This  is  the  moun- 
tain at  the  top  of  which  is  a  hotel.     6.  The  man  whom  we  met  is 


126  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

my  English  teacher.  7.  The  lady  whose  watch  I  found  yesterday 
on  the  stairway  is  one  of  my  students.  8.  He  does  not  understand 
all  the  teacher  says.  9.  This  is  the  plant  of  which  I  was  speaking. 
10.  Do  you  know  the  famous  doctor  whose  daughter  is  going  to 
marry  the  count  ?  n.  I  have  found  the  knife  which  you  had  lost. 
12.  Whoever  says  that  doesn't  know  anything  about  (t)0tt)  music. 

DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS 

i.  These  pears  are  larger  than  those.  2.  Is  that  enough  bread 
for  you  ?  3.  Those  who  help  us  in  misfortune  are  our  true  friends. 
4.  This  is  my  brother  and  those  are  my  sisters.  5.  This  is  her 
watch ;  it  was  lying  on  that  book.  6.  I  do  not  believe  that.  7.  He 
has  my  book  and  also  my  sister's.  8.  Those  are  plums,  but  these 
are  cherries.  9.  What  do  you  think  of  that?  10.  Herman  gave 
Walter  and  his  brother  a  new  sled.  n.  He  says  that  that  is 
impossible.  12.  I  know  there  are  such.  13.  The  elephant  and 
the  whale  are  the  largest  animals ;  the  former  lives  on  land,  the 
latter  in  the  water.  14.  He  is  one  of  those  whom  you  (man)  can- 
not trust. 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS 

I.  Offend  no  one,  but  help  every  one.  2.  Somebody  has  stolen 
my  overcoat.  3.  He  knows  something  about  it.  4.  Some  people 
have  much  money  and  spend  very  little.  5.  No  one  knew  how  the 
fire  had  started.  6.  Many  were  invited,  but  only  a  few  came. 
7.  Both  of  your  children  are  very  talented.  8.  Everybody's 
business  is  nobody's  business.  9.  Many  of  the  best  students  are 
poor.  10.  I  do  not  know  any  of  your  friends  in  Berlin. 

PREPOSITIONS 

i.  The  glasses  are  standing  on  the  table.  2.  We  are  going 
without  him.  3.  According  to  my  opinion  he  should  not  have 
done  it.  4.  The  earth  revolves  about  the  sun  with  great  rapidity. 


EXERCISES  127 

5.  He  could  not  come  on  account  of  the  illness  of  his  mother.  6.  I 
shall  go  to  church  with  my  father.  7.  The  painting  (picture) 
hangs  above  the  altar.  8.  She  laid  the  cloak  on  the  bed.  9.  Her 
hat  was  lying  on  the  chair  beside  the  bed.  10.  We  sat  around  the 
fire  on  the  beach  and  told  stories,  n.  My  parents  will  not  return 
from  their  trip  to  Germany  before  next  week.  12.  When  both 
objects  are  nouns  the  dative  stands  before  the  accusative.  13.  The 
book  had  been  lying  under  the  bench.  14.  We  generally  get  up 
at  six  o'clock.  15.  He  came  to  my  house  this  morning.  16.  She 
sat  opposite  me  at  the  table.  17.  We  were  swimming  against  the 
stream.  18.  When  are  you  going  home  ?  19.  We  have  been 
good  friends  for  many  years.  20.  I  saw  him  a  week  ago  when  he 
was  at  home.  21.  The  enemy's  camp  is  above  the  city.  22.  The 
roofs  of  the  houses  were  covered  with  snow.  23.  The  parson 
laughed  at  (iibet)  the  peasant's  stupidity.  24.  Both  armies  fought 
bravely  until  sundown.  25.  Carl  came  instead  of  his  brother. 
26.  The  students  wrote  the  sentences  on  the  board,  and  the  teacher 
corrected  them.  27.  He  made  the  trip  at  (auf)  my  expense. 
28.  The  sun  stood  high  above  the  village.  29.  The  general  praised 
the  colonel  on  account  of  his  bravery.  30.  Last  year  I  lived  at 
(bet)  my  grandmother's.  31.  A  month  ago  to-day  we  were  in  Paris. 

32.  No  one  came  to  see  us  on  New  Year's  day  except  my  aunt. 

33.  It  has  n't  rained  here  for  a  month.     34.  She  had  to  stay  in  the 
house  last  week  on  account  of  the  cold.     35.  Do  you  know  the 
difference  between  strong  and  weak  verbs  ? 

CONJUNCTIONS 

i .  The  children  ran  into  the  house  and  asked  their  mother  for 
some  bread.  2.  We  are  going  home,  for  it  will  soon  be  dark. 
3.  Here  is  a  bird's  nest,  but  there  are  no  eggs  in  it.  4.  He  is 
very  poor,  otherwise  he  would  dress  better.  5.  I  don't  drink  wine, 
but  I  like  to  eat  grapes.  6.  Either  you  must  make  up  your  mind 
now  or  I  must  set  out  alone.  7.  Man  is  often  abandoned  by  his 


128  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

best  friends,  yet  God  never  abandons  us.  8.  She  is  small  but 
pretty.  9.  Nature  has  peculiar  beauties  both  in  autumn  and  in 
spring.  10.  Our  servant  is  not  only  very  diligent  but  he  is  also 
very  faithful  and  honest,  n.  Even  that  did  not  satisfy  him. 
12.  He  is  poor  because  he  is  lazy.  13.  If  I  were  in  your  place,  I 
would  do  it.  14.  He  asked  me  whether  I  knew  him.  15.  It  was 
not  his  sister  but  his  niece  who  sang  before  the  emperor.  16.  Every 
mother  knows  that  a  good  book  is  an  acceptable  present  for  a 
diligent  boy.  17.  I  shall  come  as  often  as  I  can.  18.  He  does 
not  know  where  his  teacher  lives.  19.  We  shall  remain  here  until 
they  return.  20.  If  you  see  him,  ask  him  when  the  concert  begins. 
21.  We  shall  depart  as  soon  as  the  train  arrives.  22.  When  the 
wind  is  in  the  north  it  is  always  too  cold  in  this  room.  23.  The 
child  slept  while  I  was  writing  a  letter.  24.  I  have  no  time,  other- 
wise I  would  help  you.  25.  Carl  will  receive  his  inheritance  when 
he  is  (will  be)  twenty-one  years  old.  26.  We  don't  know  when  they 
will  come.  27.  The  struggle  was  hard,  but  the  victory  was  glorious. 

VERBS 

i .  Do  you  always  speak  German  at  home  ?  2 .  The  teamster  is 
beating  the  horse.  3.  My  mother  often  combs  and  braids  my  hair. 
4.  The  fire  had  gone  out.  It  will  have  gone  out.  5.  Frederick 
the  Great  offered  the  miller  a  large  sum  for  his  mill,  but  he 
didn't  wish  to  sell  it.  6.  The  workman  fell  from  the  roof  of 
the  church-tower.  7.  Both  armies  fought  bravely  until  sundown. 
8.  The  snow  is  melting  on  the  roofs.  9.  In  the  fall  the  swallows 
fly  to  the  south.  10.  We  wanted  to  put  the  matter  off.  n.  The 
mother  has  rocked  her  child  to  (in)  sleep.  12.  The  child  has  gone 
to  sleep.  The  child  is  sleeping.  13.  The  thief  hid  in  the  forest. 
He  had  hidden  the  money  in  a  dry  tree.  14.  Mr.  Black  died  from 
(cm)  the  effects  of  the  operation.  15.  It  is  getting  late,  we  must 
hasten.  16.  The  king's  carriage  was  drawn  by  six  white  horses. 
17.  Bad  company  corrupts  good  morals.  18.  This  dog  does  not 


EXERCISES  129 

chase  the  sheep.  He  follows  me  wherever  I  go.  19.  Eat,  drink, 
and  be  merry.  20.  The  old  man  sat  down  in  his  armchair. 
21.  Shakespeare's  dramas  have  been  translated  into  many  lan- 
guages. 22.  They  will  move  into  their  new  house  next  month. 
23.  He  rode  at  full  speed  through  the  village.  24.  Diligence 
overcomes  many  difficulties.  25.  When  I  get  up  in  the  morning 
I  drink  a  glass  of  cold  water.  26.  The  storm  frightened  the 
people.  The  people  are  frightened.  27.  My  friend  induced  me 
to  go  hunting  with  him.  28.  A  mother  prays  for  her  children. 
29.  It  has  been  raining  for  several  hours.  30.  Mother,  are  you  bak- 
ing bread  ?  This  cake  was  not  baked  enough.  31.  Whoever  does 
not  know  (fbnnen)  a  foreign  language  knows  nothing  of  his  own. 
32.  This  river  flows  through  a  beautiful  valley.  33.  In  the  begin- 
ning God  created  heaven  and  earth.  34.  Do  you  like  (eat  gladly) 
fried  potatoes  ?  35.  I  do  not  think  that  the  teacher  will  come  to- 
day. 36.  During  the  summer  four  new  houses  were  built  on  (in) 
this  street.  37.  The  coat  was  not  hanging  in  the  closet.  38.  I 
often  have  to  loan  my  brother  some  money.  39.  We  expect  to 
remain  here  until  the  first  of  June.  40.  Henry  did  not  act  accord- 
ing to  the  advice  of  his  friends.  41.  The  rain  has  laid  the  dust. 
42.  Are  you  the  lady  who  lost  her  watch?  43.  They  blasted  all 
the  rocks  in  the  harbor.  44.  The  enemy  has  fled  and  the  victory 
is  ours.  45.  We  got  up  early  in  order  to  see  the  sun  rise.  46.  The 
coachman  was  watering  his  horses.  47.  Carl  fell  on  the  ice  and 
broke  (re/I.)  his  arm.  48.  I  must  stay  at  home  to-day  and  help 
my  mother.  49.  He  had  grown  much  older  since  I  last  saw  him. 
50.  Are  you  acquainted  with  the  president  of  the  bank  ?  51.  The 
clerk  is  measuring  the  cloth.  52.  The  poor  widow  and  her  little 
children  seemed  to v  have  suffered  very  much  during  the  winter. 
53.  Not  more  than  a  quarter  of  an  hour  before  the  storm  not  a 
leaf  was  stirring.  54.  My  aunt,  who  lives  in  Denver,  has  invited 
me  to  visit  her  next  summer  during  my  vacation.  55.  Last  week 
we  had  to  water  the  plants  every  day  on  account  of  the  heat. 
56.  More  railroad  accidents  occur  in  America  than  in  Europe. 


130  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

57.  If  the  patient  can  partake  of  (enjoy)  food  he  will  surely  re- 
cover soon.  58.  My  wife  is  taking  a  drive  in  the  park  this  after- 
noon. 59.  Cats  catch  rats  and  mice.  Our  cat  doesn't  catch  birds. 
60.  That  arrangement  does  not  suit  me  at  all.  61.  I  hope  that 
you  will  succeed.  He  will  never  succeed.  62.  How  many  pounds 
can  you  lift?  He  lifted  the  child  out  of  the  carriage.  63.  That 
region  will  be  laid  waste  by  the  enemy.  64.  This  plant  flourishes 
only  in  the  south.  65.  Many  people  are  called  Smith.  66.  My 
cousin  was  bitten  by  his  little  black  dog.  67.  The  child  will  soon 
be  bathed  by  its  aunt.  68.  A  good  workman  is  usually  well  paid. 
69.  The  doors  opened  at  seven  o'clock.  70.  These  apple  trees 
were  planted  two  years  ago.  71.  Not  many  soldiers  were  killed, 
but  a  large  number  were  wounded.  72.  The  English  were  de- 
feated by  the  French.  73.  I  have  been  told  that  your  son  wishes 
to  become  a  physician.  74.  Those  apples  are  ripe  and  must  be 
picked.  75.  Harry  is  throwing  the  ball  against  the  house.  76.  The 
little  boy  was  very  much  ashamed  because  he  was  blamed  by  his 
mother.  77.  A  friend  brought  that  picture  along  for  me  from  Eng- 
land. 78.  By  that  time  the  debt  will  have  been  paid.  79.  This  bell 
is  rung  only  when  fire  breaks  out.  80.  Goethe's  "  Faust "  is  read 
not  only  in  Germany  but  also  in  many  other  countries.  81.  Thou 
shalt  not  steal.  82.  The  door  should  remain  closed.  83.  You 
must  not  exert  yourself  too  much  (fefjr).  84.  People  ought  to  love 
their  enemies  but  they  generally  do  not.  85.  In  our  town  children 
are  not  allowed  to  be  outside  after  nine  o'clock.  86.  He  had  to 
go  home  early  because  he  had  some  letters  to  write.  87.  May  I 
pick  one  of  these  flowers  ?  88.  My  friend  cannot  speak  German. 
89.  I  do  not  know  him,  but  I  know  where  he  lives.  90.  She  was 
obliged  to  stay  at  home  last  week.  91.  He  does  not  know  the 
multiplication  table.  92.  That  may  be  true,  but  I  cannot  believe 
it.  93.  The  little  girl  said,  "  My  papa  does  not  like  me  in  blue." 
94.  We  are  to  write  these  sentences  and  bring  them  to  class  to- 
morrow. 95.  Every  one  ought  to  tell  the  truth.  96.  That  family 
wouldn't  need  to  endure  want  if  it  had  not  been  extravagant. 


EXERCISES  131 

97.  Carl  can't  go  to  school  to-day,  he  will  have  to  stay  at  home. 

98.  I  think  he  will  be  able  to  go  to-morrow.    99.  The  lecture  is 
to  begin  at  eight  o'clock.     100.  I  should  think  we  could  read  ten 
pages  a  day.     101.  He  is  said  to  be  an  excellent  teacher.     102.  We 
wish  to  go  to  (in)  the  concert  this  evening.     103.  Do  you  know 
this  book  ?    No,  I  have  never  read  it.     104.  That  must  be  done 
immediately.     105.  He  is  having  a  new  suit  made.     106.  I  shall 
not  be  at  home  next  week.     107.  He  had  to  learn  German,  for 
he  lived  in  Berlin  several  years.     108.  If  you  wish  to  write  a  let- 
ter, I  will  bring  you  a  pen  and  some  paper.     109. 'Will  you  please 
lend  me  your  pencil  ?    I  would  do  so  gladly,  but  I  wish  to  use  it 
myself,     no.  Mr.  Freund  is  said  to  have  gone  to  Florida  with  his 
uncle,     in.  The  soldiers  will  be  permitted  to  go  home  to  visit 
their  parents.     112.    Mother,  may  I  stay  at  home  to-day?    No, 
my  son,  you  must  go  to  school.     113.  It  is  better  to  lose  one's 
life  than  one's  honor.     114.  Two  regiments  marched  through  our 
village  this  morning.     115.  Do  you  recognize  the  goodness  and 
wisdom  of  God  in  nature?     116.  I  generally  wake  up  at  five 
o'clock.     117.  The  fox  called  the  wolf  a  stupid  animal.     118.  The 
teacher  did  not  have  me  recite  to-day.     119.  I  think  you  are  mis- 
taken. 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

i.  Long  live  the  king!  2.  May  God  grant  you  a  long  and  use- 
ful life.  3.  She  said  that  she  did  not  know  it.  4.  If  that  were 
only  true!  5.  I  do  not  believe  that  all  he  says  is  true.  6.  They 
asked  me  if  you  knew  him.  7.  He  said  he  no  longer  lived  in 
Dresden.  8.  That  might  easily  be  the  case.  9.  The  teacher  asked 
the  boy  how  old  he  was.  10.  He  looks  as  if  he  were  sick.  n.  If 
I  had  only  done  that  yesterday !  12.  Even  if  the  physician  should 
come,  he  would  not  be  able  to  help.  13.  Even  if  the  physician 
had  come,  he  would  not  have  been  able  to  help.  14.  I  wish  I  were 
at  home  with  my  mother!  15.  She  dresses  as  if  she  were  rich. 
16.  If  I  had  enough  money,  I  should  travel  a  great  deal.  17.  If  I 


132  HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

had  had  enough  money,  I  should  have  paid  you  sooner.  18.  My 
mother  would  be  glad  to  see  you.  19.  I  have  just  heard  that  he 
died  this  morning.  20.  He  knew  of  a  certainty  that  I  would  not 
disappoint  him.  21.  He  admitted  that  he  had  not  yet  read  the 
book.  22.  I  do  not  know  whether  he  is  at  home.  23.  When  I 
asked  him  what  time  it  was  he  replied  he  did  not  know,  since  he 
did  not  have  his  watch.  24.  The  students  would  like  to  have  two 
weeks'  vacation  during  the  holidays,  but  the  teachers  think  one 
week  is  enough.  25.  He  spoke  loud  enough  so  that  every  one 
could  hear  what  he  said.  26.  Let  him  be  silent  if  he  cannot 
explain  what  he  wants.  27.  I  should  have  been  allowed  to  go  if  I 
had  not  been  obliged  to  help  mother.  28.  He  says  that  he  should 
have  been  permitted  to  go  to  New  York  if  he  had  been  well.  29.  I 
should  like  to  stay  longer  but  I  must  not  for  it  is  already  getting 
dark.  30.  I  hope  she  will  soon  be  well  again.  31.  It  vexes  me  to 
think  that  much  could  have  been  saved  if  the  firemen  had  done 
their  duty.  32.  Dr.  Bauer  thinks  that  one  can  work  best  in  the 
morning.  33.  The  teacher  asked  me  whether  I  had  my  book. 
34.  Daniel  must  be  sick,  for  he  has  been  absent  all  the  week.  35.  A 
German  proverb  says  that  idleness  is  the  beginning  of  all  vice. 
36.  Anna  says  she  is  going  to  study  Latin  next  year.  37.  He 
asked  me  whether  I  saw  the  palace  near  the  cloister.  38.  Let  us 
not  think  of  (an)  ourselves  alone.  39.  The  laborer  asked  himself 
what  would  become  of  his  wife  and  children  if  he  should  die.  40.  I 
have  told  him  nothing  which  could  influence  him.  41.  These 
pears  look  as  if  they  were  ripe.  42 .  Had  I  only  known  that  the 
train  was  late!  43.  We  could  have  read  another  book  if  we  had 
wanted  to.  44.  If  I  were  a  European  count,  I  should  marry  an 
American  heiress.  45.  I  had  to  tell  him  that  Germany's  flag  is 
red,  white,  and  black. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


r,  but,  however 
bie  2(Btet,  abbey 
adj,  ah,  alas 
ber  5(ffe,  ape,,  monkey 
ber  2HJ0W,  maple  tree 
aU,  all 
al§f  when,  than 

art,  old 
anber,  other 

ber  9lnfang,  beginning 

anfangen,  to  begin 
ber  9tyfef,  apple 
arg,  bad 

ftcf)  argent,  to  be  angry 

arm,  poor 

bie  SlrmBrnft,  crossbow  \/' 

bie  5lrt,  kind 

bte  9lfrf)e,  ashes   y 

ber  SWffet,  athlete 

atmen  (weak),  to  breathe 
and),  also 

anfftefjen,  to  stand  up 

bte  9ln3lnnft,  information 
nujklt,  outside 


(atfen,  to  bake 

fcalb,  soon 
ber  SBattb,  volume 
ba3  ^Banb,  ribbon 
Bang,  afraid 
Batten,  to  build 


133 


ber  S3anm,  tree 

bie  23ebingnng,  condition 

Betbe,  both 

Berften,  to  burst 

bie  SBeforgmS,  care  j/ 

Befte^ett,  to  endure 
Betett  (weak),  to  pray 

Bteten,  to  offer 
Btnben,  to  bind 
bie  S3trtte,  pear 

Bitten,  to  beg,  ask  (um  with  ace.,  for) 

BfetBett,  to  remain 

Bftnb,  blind 

Bltttarm,  as  poor  as  a  church  mouse 

bie  Sraneret,  brewery 
Brennen,  to  burn 

bie  SBre^eJ,  cracknel 

Brtngen,  to  bring 

t,  bread 

ty,  book 
ber  S3ndjftaBe,  letter 
bie  SBnrbe,  burden 


ber  dljaffettr,  light  infantry  soldier 

ber  <£fjef,  head,  chief 

ber  (£I)or,  choir 

bag  Gfjor,  choir  (part  of  a  church) 

ber  <£f)rtft,  Christian 

bag  (£0ntO,  account 

ba,  there 

bag  $adj,  roof 


134 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


ber  $arf)3,  badger 

ber  $>am0tt,  demon    \J 

bimt&er,  over  it,  over  that,  about  it, 

about  that 

battmt,  about  it,  about  that 
bettt,  thy,  your 
bCttfeit,  to  think 
betttt,  for  (conj.) 

bergleirfjen,  of  that  sort 

bcrjemtJC,  that  one,  he  (who) 
betfd&e,  the  same 

be^gleirfjeu,  of  that  sort 

beiltfd),  German 
ber  $>te&,  thief 
ber  Wiener,  servant 
btefer,  this,  this  one 

bag  $>utg,  thing 

bag  $)ifttd)0tt,  distich 
bod),  yet,  however 
ber  ^Oltt/  cathedral 
bag  $>0rf,  village 

ber  $)ortt,  thorn 
bort,  there,  yonder 
bretetlet,  three  kinds  of 

brefrfjen,  to  thresh 

bag  irtttd,  third  part 
bltmm,  stupid 
bitltfcu,  to  seem 
bure^,  through 
bitfter,  dark 


Ct^t,  genuine 
Cbel,  noble 
bag  (£i,  egg 
bte  (Sit^C,  oak 
CUtfarf),  simple 
Ctltmal/  once 
ba^  (Jifctt,  iron 
bag  (Slfag,  Alsace 


bte  ©(tent,  parents 
eittj)fei)fett,  to  recommend 
bag  (Sttbe,  end 
cnbltd),  finally 
Cttteljrett,  to  dishonor 
crgcbcttft,  respectfully 

erft,  first 
crften^,  first 
ertragen,  to  endure 
Cffett,  to  eat 
some 


^,  some 
eiier,  your 
curctttJiKcu,  on  your  account 


ber  gfabrifattt,  manufacturer 
fasten,  to  drive 

fatten,  to  fall 
fangen,  to  catch 
ferfjten,  to  fight 
bie  gfeber,  pen 

fe^lCtt  (weak),  to  fail,  lack 

fein,  fine 

bie  g-erieit  (//.),  vacation 

ftnben,  to  find 

ber  finger,  finger 

flerfjteit,  to  braid 

ftiegeit,  to  flow 
bag  $foff,  raft   V 
fortgeljen,  to  leave 
bag  fjfofftt,  fossil 

bie  JJtait,  lady,  woman,  Mrs. 
bag  ^rauletlt,  young  lady,  Miss 

freffett,  to  eat 

firf)  freuett,  to  rejoice 
bie  gfreuttbttt,  lady  friend 
frcuubltrf),  friendly 
bie  ^reUttbftf)aft,  friendship 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


135 


ber  Sfriebe,  peace 

friilj,  early 

ber  gfrityUttg,  spring 

fitl)(eu  (weak),  to  feel 

ber  gunfe,  spark 

fitr,  for 

bag  gurftCtttttttt,  principality 

ber  gfuft,  foot 


^  whole,  entire 
ber  (Garten,  garden 
geben,  to  give 
ber  (SJebanfe,  thought 

gefalltg,  agreeable 

bag  ®ef|alt,  salary    }/ 

gef)cn,  to  go 

gelefjrt,  learned 

ber  ®def>rte,  scholar 

gcfingcn,  to  succeed 

bag  Qkmarf),  room  (of  a  house) 

bag  ©Cttte,  genius 

geiuefcen,  to  enjoy 
gent,  willingly 
ber  QkfaubtC,  ambassador 
gefrfjefjen,  to  happen         / 
bie  ^efrf|Wttift,  swelling  J 
bag  QkttWttb,  garment 
bag  ^CWiffcn,  conscience 
glaferu,  of  glass 
ber  ®toit&e,  faith 
g(cttl).  immediately 
bag  ®Hirf,  fortune 
graben/  to  dig 
ber  ®raf,  count 
b,  coarse 


n,  to  have 
e,  hoe 

ber  ^afer,  oats  ' 
5a(b,  half 
Ijafteit,  to  hold 
bie  Ajanb,  hand 

l^art,  hard 

ber  ^aufe,  heap,  crowd 
bag  ^Ott^,  house 
^attSijaftett,  to  keep  house 
ber  $au3frf)luffei,  door  key 
bag  jpeim/  home 

^Clfcit,  to  help 
Ijcrauf  ,  up 
ber  $)crbft,  autumn 
r,  across 


ft,  large 
bie  @rubc,  pit 
gut,  good 
giitig,  kind 


Itd)/  hearty,  cordial 
Ijettte,  to-day 
bie  ^pcjc,  witch 
tyter,  here 
bie  $i(fc,  help 
tytttab,  down 

^inauf,  up 

bag  ^tttbcrni^,  hindrance 

t)tttCtn,  inside 

^ittten,  behind 

l)tttttber,  across 

bie  ^>i^c,  heat 

l)0dj,  high 

^offCtt  (weak),  to  hope 

IjbtCU  (weak),  to  hear 

bag  ^of^ital,  hospital 
ber  £wtger,  hunger 

^ttftcn,  to  cough 

ber  £ut,  hat 


n,  him 


136 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


tljr,  her 

immer,  always 

ber  $ttf)alt,  contents 

tttttett,  within 

bag  ^Itfelt,  insect 

bag  ^tttereffe,  interest 

ber  3rrtltm,  mistake 


commentary 


ber 

ber  ^iittig,  king 
foftcn  (weak),  to  cost 
frattf,  ill,  sick 

Ira^en,  to  scratch 
ber  ^rteg,  war 
ber  ftumpait,  companion 
Ittrj,  short 


i*/  yes 
jeber, 

jebtuebet,    r  every  one 

leglike*, 

jcittrtltb,  somebody,  anybody 

jetter,  that  one 

jeijt,  now 

ber  3'0uriut(ift,  journalist 

Jung,  young 

ber  Bungling,  young  man 


lalt,  cold 
bie  ®alte,  cold 
ber  ®arpfen,  carp 
ber  $afe,  cheese 
fatfjoltfrf),  catholic 
few,  not  a,  no  (adj.) 
lettttett,  to  know 
bag  SHttb,  child 

bag  Stiffen,  pillow 

Keitt,  little 

bie  SHetttigfett,  trifle 

bag  ^loftcr,  monastery 
Hug,  clever 
ber  ^italic,  boy 
bag  ^nic,  knee 
ber  $orf),  cook 
^ij(n,  Cologne 
ber  ftomct,  comet 


(ad)Cn  (weak),  to  laugh 
bag  £amm/  lamb 
(ang,  long 
laffeit,  to  leave 
bag  Saftcr,  vice 
laufen,  to  run 

laufdjCU  (weak),  to  listen 
lebett  (weak),  to  live 

(efccnbtg,  alive 
(c^ren,  to  teach 
ber  Sefjrer,  teacher 
bie  Setter,  ladder 
lenfen,  to  guide 
lernen,  to  learn 

lefett,  to  read 

le#,  last 

bie  fitefce,  love 

lieBen,  to  love 

bag  Steb,  song 

loden  (weak),  to  praise 

bag  Solicit,  praise 

ber  fior&eer,  laurel 
lo^laffen,  to  let  loose 
ber  Sotoe,  lion 

m 

bag  $labrf)ett,  girl 
bie  9Jlagb,  maid 
ber  SPiat,  May 
ber  $lajor,  major 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


137 


for  my  sake 


matt,  one,  they,  people 
mattd),  many  a 

ber  Sftamt,  man 
bcifo  WlttVf  sea 
mefyr,  more 
mcfjrere,  several 
meibett,  to  avoid 

mettt,  my 
metuctiucflcit, 
mciiiettutUcH, 
ber  3fteifter,  master 
meffen,  to  measure 
ba3  SJlettum,  meter 
mtt^,  me 

ttttfiglitrfett   (weak),  to  turn   out  a 
failure 

mtgHitgen,  ; 

.J  '  y  to  turn  out  a  failure 

mtgratett,   J 

tltogltcf),  possible 
motgett,  to-morrow 
ber  ^Otgett,  morning 
ber  9Jhutb,  mouth 
miiffett,  to  be  obliged  to,  must 
ber  3)^it^tggattg,  idleness 
ber  9JJltt,  courage 
bie  Butter,  mother 
C,  myrtle 


)r  to,  after 
ttdef)ften3,  next 

Italj,  near 

ber  Stfame,  name 

ber  utimltdje,  the  same 

neftmcu,  to  take 

ttCntten,  to  name 

nit^t,  not 

tttrfjtg,  nothing 
tttemnub,  nobody 
itimmer,  never 


ttO(^,  yet,  still 

ber  -Worben,  north 

bie  $lot,  need,  distress 

tttttt,  now 

ber  9httttitt3,  nuncio 

nur,  only 

o 

ubcr/  or 

ber  Dfcn,  stove 

ber  Offset,  officer 

liffncn  (weak),  to  open 

Uljtte,  without 

ber  Often,  east 

bie  Dftent  (//.),  Easter 


pair 
,  page 

,  the  Palatinate 
ftrf),  peach 
(weak),  to  care  for 
(weak),  to  praise 

,  public 
,  desk 


ber 


ber 


o 

bie  Cucflc,  spring 


tafctt  (weak),  to  rave 
bie  Ofaft,  rest 
raftcn,  to  rest 
ratett,  to  advise 
retf|t,  right 

rebctt  (weak),  to  speak 
rebltrf),  honest 
regttett  (weak),  to  rain 
ber  fftetdjtitm,  riches 


138 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


bie  deifje,  row 
rein,  clean 
reigen,  to  tear 
reiten,  to  ride 
reisen,  to  excite 
rennen,  to  run 
bie  9lofe,  rose 
tot,  red 
tttfctt,  to  call 
bie  $nf)e,  rest 


ber  (Same,  seed 
fanft,  gentle,  soft 
ber  Sanger,  singer 

faufcit,  to  drink 


ber  Sdjabe,  loss,  harm 
frfjaffen,  to  create,  produce 
flatten,  to  sound 

bie  3rf)am,  shame,  modesty 
frfjarf,  sharp 
frfjenen,  to  fear 
bag  ©djicffaf,  fate 
frfjlngen,  to  strike 

fdjliefeen,  to  close 

ber  9rf)(uf;,  conclusion 
ber  (Scfyliiffef,  key 
fdjmctcfjdn  (weak),  to  flatter 
ber  3rf)micb,  smith,  forger 
ber  Scfjneiber,  tailor 

ftf)UH,  beautiful 

bie  (Scfjonfyeit,  beauty 

ber  Settler,  pupil 

frfjttwrs,  black 
fdjlDCtgen,  to  be  silent 
bie  8rf)U)Ct5,  Switzerland 
fattier,  heavy 

bag  (Begcl,  sail 
fe^en,  to  see 
feljr,  very 


fcitt,  to  be 

fcin,  his 

ber  6efrctat,  secretary 

fcttbeu,  to  send 

ftC,  she 

bag  SU&er,  silver 

fold),  such 

fatten,  shall 

ber  (Summer,  summer 

f  unbent/  but 

bie  Sonne,  sun 

ber  3uuuertitt,  sovereign 

tyfit,  late 

ber  Spatcn,  spade 

fJW-$ieren  (weak),  to  take  a  walk 

fptnncn,  to  spin 

f  gotten  (weak),  to  deride 

f^rec^en,  to  speak 

bie  S^Jroffe,  round  of  (a  ladder) 

ber  Staljl,  steel 

ftarf,  strong 

fteljCtt,  to  stand 

ber  (Stein,  stone 

ftoften,  to  push 

ftnbieren  (weak),  to  study 

ber  Stttljl,  chair 
fnd^en  (weak),  seek 
ber  Siiben,  south 


X 


,  day 


,  carpet 


ber 

ber 

ttef,  deep 

ber  Xift^i,  table 

bie  Sorfjter,  daughter 

tot,  dead 

bie  XtanBe,  bunch  of  grapes 

treten,  to  tread 

tren,  faithful 

bie  Xfii&fal,  affliction      ^ 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


139 


bie  £ugenb,  virtue 

tun,  to  do 

bie  Xiirfei,  Turkey 

U 

iiber,  over 

bie  Ubnng,  practice 

Ultt,  about,  around 

urn  ar  bet  ten  (weak),  to  remodel 

1Mb,  and 

ber  Unban!/  ingratitude 

nnfer,  our 

ttnter,  under 


ber  $ater,  father 
toeretnigt,  united 

to  pass  away 
,  to  understand 

toertranen,  to  trust 

Did,  much 

trierfdltig,  fourfold 
ber  2$0ge(,  bird 


ttJCnbett,  to  turn 

ttenig,  little 
njcnn,  if 
mer,  who 

tticrbcn,  to  become 
merfen,  to  throw 

ttlCrt,  worth 

ber  28eften,  west 
ttltber,  against 
iweber,  again 
ber  SSiUc,  will 
toinben,  to  wind 
ber  Winter,  winter 

ttliffCtt,  to  know 

tt)0,  where 

UJO&Ct,  at  which,  at  what  place 

,  by  which,  by  what 
r,  for  which,  for  what 
tt)0l)f,  well 

ttWtnit,  with  which,  with  what 
lumtad),  according  to  which,  accord- 
ing to  what 

nioranSf  out  of  which,  out  of  what 
ttJODOit,  about  which,  about  what 
n,  for  which,  for  what 


nwrfjfcn,  to  grow 

uiarm,  warm 

to  aw  en  (weak),  to  warn 

war  urn,  why 

toa3,  what 

bag  SBaffer,  water 
toebett,  to  weave 
ber  2Beg,  way 

toe!),  woe 

bag  SBctb,  woman 

bie  233et3l)eit,  wisdom 
ber  SSctsen,  wheat 
bie  %8tlt,  world 


$ent0n,  epigram 


3 

$e!jn,  ten 

ber  3e!jnte,  tenth 

bie  geit,  time 


bie  3nflttrf|tr  refuge 
t,  last 

f,  twice 
5tt>etten3,  secondly 


L/ 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


The  principal  parts  of  nouns  are  given  except  in  -weak  polysyllabic  feminine  nouns 
and  in  proper  names 


abandon,  serlafjen 

able,  to  be,  fonnen 

above,  oberfyalb 

absent,  to  be,  abroefenb  fein 

acceptable,  angenefym 

according  to,  nac§ 

accusative,  ber  2lf!ufatit>  -g  -e 

acquainted,  to  be,tennen,be!anntfein 

across,  iiber 

act,  tun,  fyanbeln 

admit,  geftefyen 

Adolph,  Slbolf 

advice,  ber  3tat  -eg  *e 

afraid,  to  be,  fidj)  fiirrf)ten 

after,  nad) 

afternoon,  ber  -ftacfymittag  -g  -e 

again,  roieber 

against,  gegen 

age,  bag  filter  -g  - 

ago,  t)or 

agreeable,  angene^tn 

all,  all,  (entire)  ganj;  all  things,  al= 

leg;  all  kinds  of,  allerlet;  not  at 

all,  gar  nic^t 
allowed,  to  be,  biirfen 
alone,  allein 
already,  fd^on 
also,  aud) 

altar,  ber  2lltar  -3  *e  (-e) 
although,  obgteic^ 


always,  immer 
America,  Slmerifa 
American,  amerifanifdj 
among,  unter 
and,  unb 

animal,  bag  £ier  -eg  -e 
Anna,  2lnna 
another,  ein  anberer 
answer,  bie  Slntraort 
antiquity,  bag  Slltertum  -g  ^er 
any,  etroag ;  not  any,  fein 
anything,  etroag;  not  anything,  nirf)tg 
apple,  ber  2lpfel  -g  * 
apple  tree,  ber  2(pfelbattm  -g  -e 
rarm,  ber  2(rm  -eg  -e 
armchair,  ber  £ef)nfeffel  -g  - 
army,  bie  Slrmee 
arrangement,  bie  ©inridjtung 
arrive,  anfommen 
as,  a(g ;  as  if,  alg  ob 
ashamed,  to  be,  ftdj  fc^a'men 
ashes,  bie  Slfc^e     • 
ask,  fragen;  ask  for,  bitten  urn 
at,  an,  bet 
aunt,  bie  Xante 
autumn,  ber  §erbft  -eg  -e 


bad,  bofe,  fcf)letf)t 

bake,  bacfen 

ball,  ber  Sail  -eg  *e 


140 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


141 


bank,  bie  23cm!  -en 

barrel,  bag  ftafi  -ffeg  *ffer 

basket,  ber  £orb,  -eg  *e 

bathe,  baben 

be,  fein 

beach,  ber  ©tranb  -eg  -e 

beak,  ber  ©djnctbel  -g  JL 

bean,  bie  33ol)ne 

beast,  bag  Xier  -eg  -e 

beat,  fdjlagen 

beautiful,  frf)bn 

beauty,  bie  ©cfyontyeit 

because,  roeil 

become,  roerben 

bed,  bag  S3ett  -eg  -en 

before,  prep.  t)or ;  conj.  ef)e 

begin,  anfangen 

beginning,  ber  Slnfancj  -g  *e 

behind,  fyinter 

believe,  glauben 

bell,  bie  ©locfe 

belong,  gefyoren 

below,  unten 

bench,  bie  33an!  ^e 

Berlin,  Berlin 

Bertha,  Serta 

beside,  neben 

between,  -jurifcfjen 

big,  gro§ 

bird,  ber  SBogel  -g  *\  bird's  nest, 

bag  SSogelneft  -g  -er 
bite,  beifjen 
black,  fd^raarg 
Black  Forest,  ber 
blame,  tabeln 
blast,  jprengen 
blue,  blau 
board,  bie  Xafel 
body,  ber  ^orper  -g  - 
book,  bag  SBiirf)  -eg  ^er 


born,  to  be,  geboren  fein 

both,  beibe 

bottle,  bie  giafdje 

box,  ber  $aften  -g  - 

boy,  ber  $nabe  -n  -n 

braid,  fled)ten 

brave,  tapfer 

bravely,  tapfer 

bravery  bie  Xapferfeit 

bread,  bag  23rot  -eg  -e  (*e) 

break,  brec^en ;  break  out,  augbred^en 

breakfast,  bag  gru^ftutf  -g  -e 

bridge,  bie  SBrurfe 

bring,  bringen;   bring  along,  mit- 

bringen 

broom,  ber  33efen  -g  - 
brother,  ber  Sruber  -g  * 
brown,  braun ;  bag  33raun  -g 
brush,  bie  Surftc 
bucket,  ber  ©inter  -g  -  , 
build,  bauen 
bump,  ftofien 
burn,  brennen;  burn  down,  nieber= 

brennen 
bury,  begraben 

business,  bag^efd^aft-g-e,  bie  <Sad;e 
but,  aber,  fonbern 
butter,  bie  Sutter 
buy,  faufen 
by,  big,  uon 


cake,  ber  ^ucfyen  -g  - 

call,  rufen,  (name)  nennen;  to  be 

called,  fyeijjen 
camp,  bag  Sager  -g  - 
can,  fonnen 
cane,  ber  ©totf  -eg  ^e 
carpet,  ber  Xeppid)  -g  -e 
carriage,  ber  SBagen  -g  - 


142 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


carry,  tragen 

case,  ber  gall  -eg  *e 

castle,  bag  ©d&Iofj  -ffeg  *jfer 

cat,  bie  $a£e 

catch,  fangen 

certainty,  of  a,  genrif; 

chair,  ber  @tul)l  -3  *e 

change,  fid)  ctnbern 

chase,  Derfolgen 

cheat,  betriigen 

cherry,  bie  $irfd(je 

chicken,  bag  £ul)n  -g  ^er 

child,  bag  $inb  -eg  -er 

Christopher,  Gljriftopf) 

church,  bie  $ird)e 

church  tower,  ber  $ircf)turm  -g  *e 

city,  bie  ©tabt  *e 

class,  bie  Piaffe 

clean,  rein 

clerk,  ber  Sabenbiener  -g  -,   ber 


company,  bie  ©ejellfc^aft 

comparatively, 

concert,  bag  ^onjert  -g  -e 

contradict  one's  self,  fidj  nriber= 


clever,  Hug 

climb,  flettern 

cloak,  ber  Mantel  -s  * 

cloister,  bag  Softer  -S  * 

close,  fc^lie^en 

closet,  ber  ©cfyranf  -eg  ^e 

cloth,  bag  3eu9  ~e^  ~e 

coachman,  ber  $utfcf)er  -g  - 

coat,  ber  SHorf  -eg  "e 

coffee,  ber  $affee  -g 

cold,  fait  ;  bie  ^dlte 

collection,  bie  (Sammlung 

colonel,  ber  Dberft  -en  -en 

colorless,  farblog 

comb,  ftimtnen  ;  ber  ^amm  -eg  ^e 

come,  lommen;  come  in,  l)erein= 

!ommen 
commit  to  memory,  augraenbig 

lernen 


convince,  iiberreben 

cook,  focfyen  ;  bie  ^6cl)in 

cord,  bie  ©cfynur  -en  (^e) 

correct,  uerbeffern 

corrupt,  cerberben 

cost,  foften 

count,  ber  ©raf  -en  -en 

countess,  bie  ©rtifin 

country,  bag  Sanb  -eg  ^er  ;  to  go  to 

the  country,  aufg  Sanb  ge^en 
cousin,  ber  better  -g  -n 
covered,  bebecft 
cow,  bie  $uf)  ^e 
crawl,  friectyen 
create,  jrfjaffen 
cry,  fc^reien 
cup,  bie  Xafle 


daily,  tdglid^ 

danger,  bie  ©efatyr 

dark,  finfter 

dative,  ber  2)atit)  -g  -e 

daughter,  bie  Xocfjter  JL 

day,  ber  £ag  -eg  -e ;  this  day,  tyeute 

dead,  tot 

dear,  teuer 

death,  ber  5tob  -eg 

debt,  bie  @tf)ulb  -en 

decide,  fid)  entftf)liej$en 

deed,  bie  Xat  -en 

deep,  tief 

defeat,  befiegen 

depart,  abreifen 

diamond,  ber  £)iamant  -en  -en 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


143 


die,  fterben 

difference,  ber  Unterfd^ieb  -eg  -e 

difficulty,  bag  ^inbernig  -ffeg  -ffe 

diligence,  ber  gleif;  -eg 

diligent,  fleijjig 

disagreeable,  unangeneljm 

disappear,  Derfdjtwnben 

disappoint,  taufd^en 

disgrace,  bie  ©djanbe 

distinctly,  beutlicf) 

distinguish,  unterfdjeiben 

disturb,  ftoren 

do,  tun 

doctor,  ber  Slrjt  -eg  *e 

dog,  ber  §unb  -eg  -e 

doll,  bie  $uppe 

donkey,  ber  (Sfel  -g  - 

door,  bie  £ur  -en 

dozen,  bag  2)ufcenb  -g  -e 

drama,  bag  Xrama  -g  -en 

draw,  jiefjen 

dress,  fid)  an§ie(jen ;  bag  $leib  -eg  -er 

drink,  trinfen 

drive,  treiben ;  to  take  a  drive,  fpa= 

jieren  fa^ren 
dry,  trodfen 
duke,  ber  £ersog  -g  ^e 
during,  rca^renb 
dust,  ber  (Staub  -g 
duty,  bie  ^fltd)t  -en 

E 

each,  jeber 
early,  frii^ 
earth,  bie  @rbe 
easily,  (eid^t 
Easter,  bie  Dftertt 
eat,  effen,  (devour)  freffen 
Edward,  ©buarb 
effects,  bie  golgen 


egg,  bag  @i  -g  -er 
eight,  ad^t 

either  ...  or,  entraeber  .  .  .  ober 
elephant,  ber  ©lefant  -en  -en 
eleven  hundred,  elffyunbert 
Elizabeth,  (glifabct^ 
emperor,  ber  $aifer  -g  - 
endure,  leiben 
enemy,  ber  getnb  -eg  -e 
England,  ©nglanb 
English,  englifrf) 
enough,  genug 
entire,  fa'mmtlid^ 
especially,  befonberg- 
Europe,  (Suropa 
European,  ber  ©uropaer  -g  - 
even,  aurf) ;  even  if,  roenn  aucf) 
evening,  ber  2lbenb  -g  -e;  this  eve- 
ning, fjeute  abenb 
ever,  je 

every,  jeber ;  every  one,  ein  jeber 
everybody,  jebermann 
everything,  atteg 
everywhere,  iiberall 
exceedingly,  a'ufjerft 
excellent,  rortrefflid^ 
exercise,  bie  Slufgabe 
exert  one's  self,  fic§  anftrengen 
expect,  erraarten 
expense,  bie  ^ed^nung 
experience,  bie  (Srfa^rung 
explain,  erJIaren 
extravagant,  t)erjc^raenberifc§ 
eye,  bag  Sluge  -g  -n 


factory,  bie  gabrif 
faith,  ber  ©laube  -ng  -n 
faithful,  treu 
fall,  fallen;  ber  £erbft -eg  -e 


144 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


family,  bie  gamilie 

famous,  beriifytnt 

far,  twit 

farmer,  ber  SBauer  -g  (-n)  -n 

fast,  fdjneil 

father,  ber  SSater  -g  *• 

fault,  bie  <5d)ulb  -en 

fear,  fid)  fiird)ten  (t)or) ;  bie  gurcljt 

feather,  bie  geber 

February,  ber  gebruar 

feel,  fid)  fiifylen 

few,  toenige ;  a  few,  einige,  roenige 

field,  bag  gelb  -eg  -er 

fight,  fed)ten,'!ampfen 

find,  finben 

finger,  ber  ginger  -g  - 

finish,  t)ollenben 

fire,  bag  geuer  -g  - 

fireman,    ber    geuerroetyrmcmn    -g 

-leute 
first,  erft 

fish,  ber  gifd)  -eg  -e 
five,  fiinf 
flag,  bie  gaf)ne 
flatter,  fid)  fc^meid^eln 
flee,  flie^en 
flourish,  gebeiljen 
flow,  flie^en 
flower,  bie  SBlume;  flower  garden, 

ber  Slumengarten  -g  * 
fly,  fliegen 

follow,  folgen  (with  dat.) 
food,  bie  $oft 
foot,  ber  gu^  -eg  ^e 
for,  prep,  fiir,  feit ;  conj.  benn 
foreign,  fremb 
forest,  ber  SBalb  -eg  ^er 
forget,  aergeffen 
fork,  bie  ©abel 
former,  jener 


fortune,  bag  ©liicl  -g 

four,  t)ier 

fourfold,  Dierfaltig 

fourteen,  trierjetyn 

fox,  ber  gud^g  -eg  *e 

Fred,  gri| 

Frederick  the  Great,  griebritf)  ber 


French,  franjofiftf) 
Frenchman,  ber  grangofe  -n  -n 
fresh,  frifd) 

friend,  ber  greunb  -eg  -e 
frighten,   erfcfyrec!en   (weak  trans., 

strong  intr.) 
from,  t)on 
fry,  braten 


gain,  ber  ©enrinn  -g  -e 

garden,  ber  ©arten  -g  "- 

gardener,  ber  ©tirtner  -g  - 

general,  ber  gelb^err  -n  -en 

generally,  geroofjnlirf) 

gentleman,  ber  §err  -n  -en 

George,  ©eorg 

German,  beutfd^ 

Germany,  2)eutfd)lanb 

get  (become),  rcerben ;  get  up,  auf= 

fte^en 

girl,  bag  2fta'bdl)en  -g  - 
give,  geben 
glad,  to  be,  fid)  freuen 
gladly,  gern 
glass,  bag  ©lag  -eg  *er 
gloomy,  triib 
glorious,  glorreid^ 
go,  ge^en ;  go  along,  mitgefyen ;  go 

out,  auggefyen,  E)inaug  ge^en 
God,  ber  ©ott  -eg  ^er 
gold,  golben;  bag  ©olb  -eg 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


-  good,  gut 
goodness,  bie  ©iite 
grandmother,  bie  ©roftmutter  JL 
grant,  geben 
grape,  bie  Xraube 
gray,  grau 
great,  grofc 

green,  grtin ;  bag  ©rim  -eg 
greet,  grujjen,  begriifjen 
grow,  raadjfen ;  grow  old,  alt  raerben 


hair,  bag  £aar  -eg  -e 

half,  fjalb ;  bie  fcalfte 

hand,  bie  §anb  -eg  "e 

hang,  fyangen 

happen,  gefrf)ef)en 

naPP7>  glurflirf) 

harbor,  ber  £afen  -g  - 

hard,  I) art 

Harry,  ^einj 

hasten,  eilen,  firf)  beeilen 

hat,  ber  §ut  -eg  *e 

have,  ^aben ;  have  to,  miifjen 

hawk,  ber  £abicf)t  -g  -e 

head,  ber  £opf  -eg  ^e 

hear,  E)5ren 

heart,  bag  ^erg  -eng  -en 

heat,  bie  £rifce 

heaven,  ber  Spimmel  -g  - 

heavy,  fc^raer 

heiress,  bie  ©rbin 

Helen,  §elene 

help,  (jelfen 

Henry,  §einrid^ 

here,  E)ier 

Herman,  §ermann 

hide,  jic^  oerftetfen 

high,  ^od^ 


hold, 

holiday,  ber  geiertag  -eg  -e ;   the 

holidays,  bie  gerie-n 
home,  nad)  §aufe ;  at  home,  511  §auf e 
honest,  etyrlitf) 
honor,  bie  (Sfjre 

hope,  §offen,  (expect)  erroarten 
horse,  bag  ^Pferb  -eg  -e 
hot,  §ei£ 

hotel,  bag  §otel  -g  -g 
hour,  bie  (Stunbe ;  a  quarter  of  an 

hour,  eine  SSiertelftunbe 
house,  bag  §aug  -eg  ^er 
how,  rate 

hunting,  to  go,  auf  bie  3a9^  QC^en 
hurt  one's  self,  fid)  roel)  tun 
husband,  ber  ©atte  -u  -n,  ber  3ft ann 

-eg  *er 
hut,  bie  Spiitte 


ice,  bag  @ig  -eg 
idleness,  ber  aftiifctg 
if,  raetm 
illness,  bie 
imagine,  fid)  einbilben 
immediately,  fofort,  jogleid) 
impossible,  unmoglic^ 
in,  in ;  in  order  to,  um 
increase,  gunefytnen 
induce,  beraegen 
industrious,  fleifjig 
influence,  beeinfluffen 
inheritance,  bie  @rbfd)aft 
ink,  bie  Xinte 
intend,  beabfttf)tigen 
interesting,  interefjant 
into,  in 
invite,  einlaben 


146 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


January,  ber 

John,  ^o^ann,  §ang 

Joseph, 

June,  ber 

Jupiter,  ber 

just,  eben,  gerabe;  just  as,  ebenfo 

K 

keep,  befjalten 
key,  ber  <5tf)luffel  -g  - 
kill,  toten 

kinds  of,  two,  groeierlei 
king,  ber  $omg  -g  -e 
kitchen,  bie  $itrf)e 
knife,  bag  Sfteffer  -g  - 
knight,  ber  fitter  -8  - 
knock,  flopfen 
know,  roiffen,  fennen 


laborer,  ber  Slrbeiter  -g  - 

lady,  bie  2)ame 

lake,  ber  (See  -g  -n 

lame,  lafym 

land,  bag  Sanb  -eg  -^er 

language,  bie  ©prad^e 

large,  grof; 

last,  le^t ;  last  time,  gum  le^ten  3JJal 

late,  jpa't 

Latin,  bag  Satetn  -3 

latter,  biefer 

laugh,  lad^en  (ilber) 

lawyer,  ber  2lbuo!at  -en  -en 

lay,  legen ;  lay  waste,  uernwften 

lazy,  faul 

lead  pencil,  ber  SBleiftift  -^  -e 

leaf,  bag  Slatt  -eg  ^er 

learn,  (ernen 


least,  raenigft;  at  least,  roenigfteng 
lecture,  ber  SSortrag  -g  ^c,  bie  3Sor= 

lefung 

leg,  bag  23ein  -eg  -e 
lend,  leiljen 
less,  toeniger 
lesson,  bie  2lufgabe 
letter,  ber  Srief  -eg  -e 
lie,  Uegen 
life,  bag  Seben  -g 
lift,  ^eben 
like,  gern  (with  a  verb,  as  gern  fyaben, 

gern  efjen) 

lion,  ber  Soroe  -n  -n 
little,   (of  size)   Hetn,    (of  quantity) 

roentg ;  a  little,  ein  tpenig 
live,  leben,  roo^nen 
loan,  leifyen 

long,  long ;  no  longer,  nidjt  me^r 
look,  augfeE)en;    look  around,  fid) 

umfefyen  (nad^) 
lose,  t)erlieren ;  lose  one's  way,  fidj 

Dertrren 
loud,  Unit 
Louise,  Suife 
lovable,  liebengrourbig 
love,  Iteben ; '  bie  Siebe 

M 

maid,  bie  Sftagb  ^e 

make,  madden 

man,  ber  2J?ann  -eg  -^er,  ber  30?enfd^ 

-en  -en 
many,  mel 
march,  marjd^ieren 
Margaret,  SOtogarete 
mark,  bie  3D^ar! 
marry,  fjeiraten ;  to  get  married,  fidl) 

cer^eiraten 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


147 


Mars,  ber  3J?arg 

Mary,  2ftarte 

matter,  bie  ©adje 

may,  biirfen,  mogen 

meal,  bag  3M)l  -g 

mean,  meinen 

measure,  ntefjen 

meat,  bag  gletfd)  -eg 

meet,  begegneu  (with  dat.),  treffen 

meeting,  bie  23erfantmlung 

melt,  frfjme^en 

members,  (of  the  body]  bie  ©Iteber 

merchant,  ber  $aufmann  -g  -leute 

merry,  guteg  -UJutg 

metal,  bag  detail  -g  -e 

Meyer,  3J2ener 

milk,  bie 

mill,  bie 

miller,  ber  2ftiiller  -g  - 

mind,  ber  ©inn  -eg  -e;   make  up 

one's  mind,  fid)  entfd^Ite^en 
mirror,  ber  (Spiegel  -g  - 
misfortune,  bag  Ungliic!  -g 
mistaken,  to  be,  ftd^  irren 
mitten,  ber  §anbftf)uE)  -g  -e 
modest,  beftfjeiben 
Monday,  ber  aftontag 
money,  bag  ©elb  -eg  -er 
month,  ber  aftonat  -g  -e 
moon,  ber  -JRonb  -eg  -e 
morals,  bie  ©itten 
more,  tnefyr 
morning,  ber  3)2orgen  -g  -  ;  this 

morning,  Ijeute  morgett 
mother,  bie  Gutter  * 
mountain,  ber  33erg  -eg  -e 
mouse,  bie  2ftaug  ^c 
move,  giefyen  (intr.},  fid^   beroegen 

(trans.) 
Mr.,  §err 


much,  mel 

multiplication  table,  bag  @inma(= 

eing  - 

music,  bie  aftufif 
must,  tniiffen 
myself,  jelbft 

N 

nail,  ber  3?agel  -g  *• 

name,  ber  9? ante  -ng  -n;  to  name, 

nennen ;  to  be  called,  f>eif;en 
nature,  bie  -ftatur 
near,  na^,  bet,  neben 
need,  braud^en 
neighbor,  ber  5^ad^bar  -g  -n 
neither  .  .  .  nor,  roeber  .  .  .  ttod) 
nephew,  ber  9teffe  -n  -n 
never,  nte 
new,  neu 
New  Year's  Day,  ber  ^euja^rgtag 

-eg  -e 

New  York,  9?eut)or?  (^ero  5)orf) 
news,  bie  ^ac^rtd^t 
next,  nad^ft 
niece,  bie  -fttcfyte 
night,  bie  S^ad^t  ^e 
ninety,  neunjtg 
no,  adj.  fetn;  adv.  netn;   no  one, 

ntemanb 
noble,  ebel 

nobleman,  ber  ©belmann  -g  -leute 
nonsense,  ber  llnftnn  -g 
north,  ber  -ftorben  -g 
nose,  bie  -ftafe 
not,  ntd^t ;    not  a,  fetn ;    not  only, 

ntrf)t  nur;  not  yet,  nodj  ntrf)t 
nothing,  nid^tg 
noun,  bag  Spaiiptroort  -g  ^er 
now,  je£t 
number,  bie 


148 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


oats,  ber  §afer  -g 

obedient,  gefyorjam 

obey,  gef:)ortf)en 

object,  bag  Dbje!t  -g  -e 

obliged  to,  to  be,  miiffen 

occur,  t)orlommen 

o'  clock,  one,  ein  Ufyr 

of,  Don 

offend,  beleibigen 

offer,  bieten 

often,  oft 

oil,  bag  Dt  -eg  -e 

old,  alt 

on,  auf f  an ;  on  account  of,  roegen 

once,  einmal ;  at  once,  jofort 

one,  man,  einer 

only,  nur 

open,  offnen,  fidj  offnen 

operation,  bie  Operation 

opinion,  bie  9JJeinung 

opposite,  gegenuber 

or,  ober 

other,  anber 

otherwise,  fonft 

ought,  follen 

out  of,  aug 

outside,  brauften 

over,  iiber 

overcoat,  ber  llberrocf  -3  "e 

overcome,  uberttrinben 

own,  eigen 


page,  bie  ©ette 
painting,  bag  ©emtilbe  -g  - 
pair,  bag  ^aar  -eg  -e 
palace,  ber  ^alaft  -g  ^e 
paper,  bag  papier  -g  -e 


parents,  bie  ©Item 

Paris,  ^arig 

park,  ber  $ar!  -g  -e  (-g) 

parson,  ber  ^Pfarrer  -g  - 

partake,  genie^en 

patient,  ber  patient  -en  -en 

Paul,  ^aul 

pay,  bejaljlen 

pea,  bie  @rbfe 

peace,  ber  griebe  -ng 

pear,  bie  SBirne 

peasant,  ber  Sauer  -g  (-n)  -n 

peculiar,  bejonber 

pen,  bie  geber 

pencil,  ber  Sleiftift  -g  -e 

people,  bie  Seute 

permitted,  to  be,  burfen 

physician,  ber  Slrjt  -eg  tte 

piano,  bag  Glacier  -g  -e 

pick,  pflitcfen 

picture,  bag  33ilb  -eg  -er 

place,  ftellen ;  bie  ©tette  . 

plant,  pflanjen ;  bie  ^flange 

plate,  ber  teller  -g  - 

please,  bitte 

plum,  bie  ^pflaume 

poem,  bag  @ebid;t  -g  -e 

poet,  ber  2)ict)ter  -g  - 

poor,  arm 

potato,  bie  £artoffel 

pound,  bag  ^pfunb  -eg  -e 

poverty,  bie  5lrmut 

powder,  bag  ^Suluer  -g 

Prague,  ^rag 

praise,  loben 

pray,  beten 

prefer,  lieber  (with  a  verb,  as  lieber 

effen) 

present,  bag  ©efcfyen!  -g  -e 
president,  ber  ^rafibent  -en  -en 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


149 


pretty, 

pride,  bie  §orf)mut 

prince,  ber  ^rinj  -en  -en 

professor,  ber  ^Srofeflor  -g  -en 

progress,  ber  gortfdjrttt  -g  -e 

proverb,  bag  ©prirfjroort  -g  *er 

Prussia,  ^reufcen 

punish,  beftrafen 

pupil,  ber  <Srf)iUec  -g  - 

put,  ftellen ;  put  off,  auffrf)ieben 


quarter  of  an  hour,  eine  SSiertel= 

ftunbe 

quickly,  jtfjnell 
quite,  fefyr 

R 

railroad  accident,  bag  @tfenbaljn= 

unglitcf  -g  -gfa'Ue 
rain,  regnen ;  ber  ^egen  -g  - 
raise,  bauen 

rapidity,  bie  ©c^nelligfeit 
rarely,  felten 
rat,  bie  ^atte 
read,  lefen 
ready,  bereit 
receive,  befommen 
recite,  ^erfagen 
recognize,  erfennen 
recover,  genejen 
red,  rot 
reddish,  rotlic^ 

regiment,  bag  Regiment  -3  -er 
region,  bag  ®ebiet  -S  -e 
rejoice,  jtrf)  freuen  (iiber) 
relative,  ber  SSernwnbte  -n  -n 
remain,  bleiben 
reply,  antroorten 


republic,  bie 

rest  one's  self,  ftc^  augru^en 

return,  guriitffommen 

revolve,  ftc^  bretyen 

reward,  belo^nen 

rich,  reid^ 

ride  at  full  speed,  fprengen 

rider,  ber  better  -g  - 

right,  rerf)t 

ring,  tauten 

Ring  Street,  bie  9ttngftrafje 

ripe,  reif 

rise,  ftetgen,  (of  the  sun}  aitfge^en 

river,  ber  glufl  -fleg  'fjc 

rock,  rciegen ;  ber  ©tein  -eg  -e 

roof,  bag  2)arf)  -eg  -"er 

room,  bag  Qimmev  -g  - 

rose,  bie  9?ofe 

run,  laufen 


sack,  ber  ©atf  -eg  *e 

same,  berfelbe 

satisfy,  befriebigen 

save,  retten 

say,  fagen 

school,  bie  <Srf)iile 

see,  f efjen ;  go  to  see,  befitcfyen 

seem,  fc^einen 

self,  felbft 

sell,  uerfaufen 

send,  fdjiden,  fenben 

sentence,  ber  <3a£  -eg  ^e 

servant,  ber  Wiener  -g  - 

set  out,  abretfen 

seven,  fieben 

several,  meljrere,  eintge 

shall,  follen,  (of futurity)  roerben 

sheep,  bag  ©d^af  -eg  -e 

sheer,  lauter 


ISO 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


shepherd,  ber  §irt  -en  -en 

shoe,  ber  ©d)ufy  -eg  -e 

short,  lurj 

show,  geigen 

sick,  Iran! 

silent,  to  be,  fdjroeigen 

since,  prep,  feit;  conj.  ba 

sing,  ftngen 

sink,  untergefyen 

sister,  bie  ©cfyroefter 

sit,*fi|en;  sit  down,  ficfy  fyinfe^en 

six,  fecfyg 

skate,  ©d)littfd)uf)  laufen 

sled,  ber  ©djlitten  -g  - 

sleep,  fdjlafen;   go  to  sleep,  ein= 

fd)lafen 
small,  flein 
Smith,  ©djtnibt 
snow,  ber  ©djnee  -g 
so,  fo 

soldier,  ber  ©olbat  -en  -en 
some,  etroag,  einige,  roelcfye;  some 

people,  manege  Seute 
somebody,  jemanb 
something,  etroaS 
son,  ber  (SoEjn  -eS  *e 
song,  ber  ©efang  -S  -"c 
soon,  balb 
sorrow,  bie  (Sorge 
soup,  bie  (Suppe 
sour,  fauer 
south,  ber  ©iiben  -§ 
spade,  ber  ©paten  -3  - 
spark,  ber  gunfe  -n3  -n 
sparkle,  funfeln 
speak,  jprec^en 
spend,  au^geben 
spring,  ber  grueling  -S  -e 
stairway,  bie  £reppe 
stamp,  bie  SBriefmarfe 


stand,  fte^en 

start,  anfangen 

state,  ber  ©taat  -e§  -en 

stately,  ftattlid) 

station,  ber  Sa^n^of  -g  ^e 

stay,  bleiben 

steal,  ftefjlen 

step,  treten 

still,  noc^ 

stir,  jic^  bercegen 

stop,  cmfOoren 

storm,  ber  ©turm  -eg  *c 

story,  bie  ©efd^tc^ie 

stove,  ber  Dfen  -g  ^ 

stranger,  ber  grembe  (declined as  adj.) 

stream,  ber  ©trom  -eg  ** 

street,  bie  ©trafje 

strengthen,  ftdrfen 

string,  ber  gab  en  -g  *• 

strong,  ftar! 

struggle,  ber.5!ampf  -eg  ^t 

student,  ber  ©tubent  -en  -en 

study,  ftubteren 

stupid,  bumm 

stupidity,  bie  SDummtyett 

succeed,  gelingen  (impers.  with  dat. 

of  the  person) 
success,  ber  (Srfolg  -g  -e 
successful,  erfolgreic^ 
such,  fold);  such  a,  fold),  (or  fo)  etn 
suffer,  letben 

suit,  gefaHen ;  ber  Slngug  -g  -"e 
sum,  bie  ©umme 
summer,  ber  ©ommer  -g  - 
sun,  bie  ©onne 
Sunday,  ber  ©omttag 
sundown,  ber  ©onnenuntergang  -g 
surely,  genrif; 

surprise,  bie  liberrafd^ung 
surprised,  to  be,  fief)  nwnbern 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


swallow,  bie 
sweet,  fiif; 
swim,  fdjnrimmen 
Switzerland,  bie  <Sdjroei§ 


table,  ber  Xifdj  -eg  -e 
tailor,  ber  (Scfyneiber  -g  - 
take,  netymen ;  take  a  drive, 

ren  fafyren ;  take  off,  au^te^en 
talented,  begabt 
talk,  fprecfjen 
tall,  grof; 
tea,  ber  Xee  -g 
teacher,  ber  Sefjrer  -g  - 
teamster,  ber  gufyrmann  -g  -leute 
tear,  bie  £rane 
tell,  fagen,  (relate)  er^aljlen 
ten,  gefjn 
than,  alg,  rate 
thank,  banfen  (with  ctat.) 
the,  (</<?/".  0r*.)  ber,  bie,  bag ;  (correL 

adv.)  the  . .  .  the,  je  .  .  .  befto 
there,  ba,  e^ 
thief,  ber  2)ieb  -eg  -e 
think,  benten,  glauben,  nteinen 
this,  biefer 
three  times,  breimal 
through,  burc§ 
throw,  raerfen 
ticket,  bie  ga^r!arte,  ba3 

-e  (-S) 

time,  bie  3^t 
to-day,  ^eute 
to-morrow,  morgen 
too,  aud^,  gu 
tooth,  ber  Qa^n  -eg  *c 
top,  ber  ©tpfel  -§  - 
torn,  jerriflen 
town,  bie  ©labt  -e 


train, 

translate,  iiberfe^en 

travel,  reifen 

tree,  ber  Saum  -eg  K 

trip,  bie  Dieije 

trouble,  bie 

true,  raa^r 

trust,  trauen  (with  dat) 

truth,  bie  SSa^r^eit 

tub,  ber  3uber  -g  - 

turnip,  bie  ^iifce 

twelve,  jraolf 

twenty-four,  trierimbatDanjig 

two,  jraei ;  two  kinds  of,  groeterlei 

U 

umbrella,  ber  ^egenfcfyirm  -g  -e 
uncle,  ber  Dnfel  -g  - 
under,  unter 
understand,  Derfte^en 
undertake,  unternetymen 
university,  bie  llnit)erfitat 
until,  big 
use,  gebraucfyen 
useful,  nii^Iid^ 
usually,  geroofynltdj 


vacation,  bie  gerien  (//.) 
valley,  bag  Xal  -eg  *er 
vegetables,  bag  ©emiife  -g 
verb,  bag  Qeitroort  -g  "er 
very,  fefyr ;  very  much,  fetyr 
vex,  argern 
vice,  bag  Safter  -g  - 
victory,  ber  @ieg  -eg  -e 
village,  bag  £>orf  -eg  *er 
vinegar,  ber  @ffig  -g 
violently,  f)eftig 
visit,  befud^en 


152 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


W 

wagon,  ber  SBagen  -g  - 

wake  up,  cwfroadjen 

wall,  bie  SBanb  *e 

want,  rooUen;  bie  -ftot 

warm,  roarm 

wash,  nwjdjen 

waste,  Derfdjroenben ;  lay  waste,  t)er= 

roitften 

watch,  bie  llfjr  -en 
water,  (horses)  trdnfen,  (plants)  be= 

giefeen;  bag  Staffer  -g  - 
weak,  frf)tt)adj 
wear,  tragen 
week,  bie  2Bod)e 
weigh,  ttriegen 
welcome,  tt)ill?ommen 
well,  gefunb,  gut,  roofyl;  bev  33run= 

n  en  -3  - 

well-formed,  roofylgebilbet 
whale,  ber  SBalfijrf)  -cS  -e 
what,  roa3,  raeld^er ;  what  kind  of, 

ttmS  fiir  ein 

when,  raann,  raenn,  al^ 
where,  n)0 
wherever,  TOO  immer 
whether,  ob 
which,  roeldjer 
while,  rad^renb 
white,  raeif; 
whoever,  n)er 
why,  raarum 


widow,  bie  SBitroe 

wife,  bie  grau  -en 

will,  rcollen,  (of futurity)  toerben 

William  II,  SBt^elm  II. 

wind,  ber  SBinb  -e§  -e 

window,  bag  genfter  -S  - 

wine,  ber  SBein  -eg  -e 

winter,  ber  SBtnter  -g  - 

wisdom,  bie 

wise,  flug 

wish,  roollen, 

with,  mit 

without,  ofjne 

wolf,  ber  23BoIf  -eg  *e 

woman,  bie  ^$\,&\\,  -en 

word  bag  SBort  -eg  ^er 

work,    arbetten;    bie   2lrbett,    bag 

2Berf  -eg  -e 

workman,  ber  Slrbeiter  -g  - 
world,  bie  9Bett  -en 
worth,  ber  SBert  -g 
wound,  bie  SBunbe 
write,  fdjretben 


yard,  ber  §of  -eg  *e 
year,  bag  Sa^r  -eg  -e 
yellow,  gelb 
yes,  ja 

yesterday,  geftern 
yet,  bocf),  nod) 
young,  jung 


INDEX 


The  references  are  to  sections  of  the  text. 


aber,  177 

accent,  12 

adjectives,  75-109: 

comparison  of,  98-109 ;  declen- 
sion of,  84-86, 108 ;  demonstrative, 
91-96;  indefinite  numeral,  90;  in- 
terrogative, 97;  limiting,  75;  par- 
ticipial, 87;  possessive,  32,  89; 
proper,  88 ;  qualifying,  75 ;  table 
of  endings,  81 ;  used  as  nouns,  86 ; 
vowel  mutation  in,  109 

adverbs,  110-116 

all,  90,  note  5 

alphabet,  1 

al3,  31,  103,  183,  185 

ate  ob,  285,  4 

am  form  of  the  superlative,  106,  2  ; 
111 

article,  25-32,  173  : 

definite,  25~29,  173;  indefinite, 
30-32 

aufftefyen,  247 

bringen,  230 

capitals,  23 
conjunctions,  174-186: 

coordinate,  174-180;  subordinate, 

181-186 

consonant  combinations,  4 

ba  +  preposition,  128 
biefer,  91 


diphthongs,  3,  9 

bu,  131 
bun!en,  230 
burfen,  271 

etn  paar,  90,  i  a 
ein  roenig,  90,  2  a 
eitel,  90,  3  a 
eg  gibt,  279,  5 

former,  158 

ganj,  90,  note  4 
gefjen,  236 
gender,  70~74 
genug,  90,  3  a 
gerundive,  202 
griifjen,  229 

Ejaben,  206,  207,  222 
b,  90,  note  4 
226 

rjorf),  99 

tf)r,  89,  123,  131,  136,  138,  note 
imperative,  234-237,  240-244 

impersonal  verbs,  279 
indefinite  pronouns,  161-163 
indicative,  present,  of  strong  verbs, 

232-238 

indirect  discourse,  286-289 
infinitive,  198,  199,  274 


'53 


154 


HANDBOOK  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


interjections,  187 

interrogative  pronouns,  141-143 

jeber,  162 
jemcmb,  161 

feitt,  30,  162 
fennen,  230 
fonnen,  271 

lafjen  -f-  infinitive,  276 
latter,  158 
Icwter,  90,  3  a 
ioben,  224 

man,  161,  266,  i 

manrf),  90,  note  i 

mefyr,  90,  3  a 

mefyrer-,  90,  note  2 

mein,  89 

metner,  136, 137 

modal  auxiliaries,  267-278 

mood,  280 

mutated  vowels,  2 

mutation,    in    adjectives,     109 ;    in 

nouns,  35,  39,  46,  51,  54,  55 ;  in 

verbs,  233,  244 

naf),  99 

md)t,  308 

nid)t3,  161 

nouns,  33-74 : 

declension  of,  33-61  ;  class  I, 
strong,  44-48;  class  II,  strong, 
49-51;  class  III,  strong,  52-54; 
mixed,  59~61 ;  weak,  56~58  ;  with 
borrowed  plurals,  65  ;  differentia- 
tion of,  66  ;  list  of,  322-339 ;  mono- 
syllabic, 322-326,  333-336 ;  poly- 
syllabic, 327-332 ;  with  mutation, 


322-332  ;  without  mutation,  333- 
339 ;  of  weight,  62,  63 ;    proper, 
67-69 
numerals,  117-122 

order  of  words,  290-310  : 

inverted,  293 ;  normal,  292  ;  trans- 
posed, 294 

participles,  87,  201,  203,  275 

passive  voice,  260-266 

prefixes,  250-252 

prepositions,  164-173 

principal  parts  of  nouns,  34 ;  of 
verbs,  197 

pronouns,  123-163  : 

demonstrative,  152-160 ;  indef- 
inite, 161-163 ;  interrogative,  141- 
143;  personal,  123-131;  posses- 
sive, 136-140;  reflexive,  132-135, 
254,  255  ;  relative,  144-151 

pronunciation,  6~13 

reben,  229 
rubern,  226 

fdjlagen,  231 

fefjen,  235,  241 

jein,  208,  209,  221,  276 

felber,  felbft,  133 

fid)  fcfylagen,  258 

fi$  umfeljen,  259 

fie,  123 

@te,  123, 131 

fold),  96,  156 

fonbern,  178 

jtefjen,  236 

subjunctive,  280-289;  vowel  of 
present,  205;  vowel  of  imper- 
fect, 245 


INDEX 


I5S 


superlative,  104-108,  111-116 

syllables,  division  into,  14-22 

tenses,  formation  of,  211-220 
unreal  conditions,  285,  3 

verbs,  189-298 : 

auxiliary,  190 ;  conjugation  of, 
221-265  ;  differentiation  of,  320, 
321 ;  endings  of,  225 ;  impersonal, 
279;  in  eln,  ern,  226;  in  ieren, 
eien,  203  ;  inseparable,  248,  249  ; 
irregular  weak,  230 ;  list  of  strong, 
319;  modal  auxiliary,  267-278; 
present  indicative  of,  232-238; 
present  subjunctive  of,  204,  205  ; 
reflexive,  253-259 ;  separable, 
246,  259 ;  stem  of,  200 ;  strong, 
231-245;  strong  verbs  with  a, 
232,  233;  strong  verbs  with  e, 
232,  234-236  ;  weak,  224-230 


n,  249 
triel,  90,  3  c 

voice,  196 ;  passive,  260-266 
vowels,  6-9,  39,  205,  232-238,  311  : 

gradation  of,  311-318  ;  in  present 
indicative,  232-238;  in  present 
subjunctive,  205 ;  in  imperfect 
subjunctive,  245 ;  mutation  of, 
39,  46,  51,  54,  55  ;  pronunciation 
of,  6-9 

rocmn,  183, 184 

nmS,  141-144,  148,  161,  note 

wa%  fur  ein,  97,  141 

weight,  nouns  of,  62,  63 

roenig,  90,  3  c 

roenn,  183,  186 

roer,  141,  142,  144,  147,  163 

roerben,  223 

roifjen,  271 

WO  +  preposition,  143,  146 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


IN  STACKS 

SEP  2  9 1960 


•UM    0  I'JM 


LD  21A-50w-4,'60 
(A9562slO)476B 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


YB  01339 


926647 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


